Lake Elsinore City Council
September 24, 2024

REPORT TO CITY COUNCIL
To: Honorable Mayor and Members of the City Council
From: Jason Simpson, City Manager
Prepared by: Damaris Abraham, Community Development Director Date: September 24, 2024
Subject: Notice of Decision – Planning Commission Approval of Planning Application No. 2023-17 for Exterior Building Façade and Related Site Improvements with a Request for Parking Reduction for an Existing Commercial Center Located at 31681 and 31701 Riverside Drive Recommendation
Receive and File the Notice of Decision for Planning Application No. 2023-17 approved by the Planning Commission at their Regular Meeting on August 20, 2024.

Background
The project site is an existing 1.99-acre commercial center located along Riverside Drive between Joy Street and Lincoln Street at 31681 and 31701 Riverside Drive. The project site encompasses Assessor Parcel Numbers (APNs) 379-381-053 and 379-381-054. The site is fully developed with an approximately 14,000-square-foot two-story commercial building and 12,000-square-foot onestory commercial building along with existing parking spaces and landscaping.

Planning Application No. 2023-17 is a request for a Commercial Design Review (CDR No. 2023- 05) to remodel the existing exterior façade and interior renovations of the commercial buildings including the following proposed improvements:
• Demolish both structure’s existing storefront, roof membrane, and interior/exterior walls and doors to construct a new storefront façade with interior renovations including partition walls and restrooms;
• Demolish a small portion of the existing two-story building to reduce the building size from 13,837 square feet (sq. ft.) to 13,435 sq. ft.;
• Demolish the existing exterior stairwell attached to the two-story building and construct a new interior stairwell with an accessible chair lift;
• Construct a new 833-square-foot patio with a second story deck for the existing two- story building; and
PA 2023-17 (Lakefront Plaza Revitalization)

• New commercial center identification signage, individual unit signage, and site improvements to the parking and landscaping.

The applicant also requested a reduction in the required number of parking spaces associated with the proposed remodeling and change in uses as required by LEMC 17.148.030.D.

On August 20, 2024, the Planning Commission took the following action with a vote 5-0:

1. Found that the project is exempt from the California Environmental Quality Act (CEQA) pursuant to CEQA Guidelines Section 15301 (Class 1 Existing Facilities); and

2. Adopted A RESOLUTION OF THE PLANNING COMMISSION OF THE CITY OF LAKE ELSINORE, CALIFORNIA, APPROVING PLANNING APPLICATION NO. 2023-17 (COMMERCIAL DESIGN REVIEW NO. 2023-05) FOR EXTERIOR BUILDING FAÇADE

AND RELATED SITE IMPROVEMENTS WITH A PARKING REDUCTION FOR THE EXISTING LAKEFRONT PLAZA COMMERCIAL CENTER LOCATED AT 31681 AND 31701 RIVERSIDE DRIVE (APNS: 379-381-053 AND 379-381-054).

Discussion
The Planning Commission voted 5-0 to approve the project at its regular meeting on August 20, 2024, with the applicant present at the meeting. There were no speakers during the public comment portion of the meeting and no written comments received prior to the meeting.

The Planning Commission’s decision is final, and no action by the City Council is required unless the City Council, by majority vote, elects to review and reconsider the Planning Commission’s decision by ordering the matter set for a future noticed public hearing according to Section

17.410.110.F of the Lake Elsinore Municipal Code (LEMC), or the applicant or an interested person files a complete appeal application within 15 days of this notice appearing on the City Council’s Agenda.

Fiscal Impact
The time and cost related to processing this application have been covered by fees paid for by the applicant. No. General Fund budgets have been allocated or used in the processing of this application. Project approval does not fiscally impact the City’s General Fund. Mitigation Measures to protect the City fiscally have already been included in the Conditions of Approval.

Attachments
Attachment 1 - Planning Commission Staff Report

REPORT TO PLANNING COMMISSION
To: Honorable Chair and Members of the Planning Commission From: Damaris Abraham, Community Development Director
Prepared by: Carlos Serna, Associate Planner
Date: August 20, 2024
Subject: Planning Application No. 2023-17 (Lakefront Plaza Revitalization) – Proposal for Exterior Building Façade and Related Site Improvements with a Request for Parking Reduction for an Existing Commercial Center on a 1.99-acre Site Located at 31681 and 31701 Riverside Drive
Applicant: Richard Leigh, Fluid and Fare
Recommendation

1. Find that the proposed project is exempt from the California Environmental Quality Act (CEQA) pursuant to CEQA Guidelines Section 15301 (Class 1 Existing Facilities); and

2. Adopt A RESOLUTION OF THE PLANNING COMMISSION OF THE CITY OF LAKE ELSINORE, CALIFORNIA, APPROVING PLANNING APPLICATION NO. 2023-17 (COMMERCIAL DESIGN REVIEW NO. 2023-05) FOR EXTERIOR BUILDING FAÇADE AND

RELATED SITE IMPROVEMENTS WITH A PARKING REDUCTION FOR THE EXISTING LAKEFRONT PLAZA COMMERCIAL CENTER LOCATED AT 31681 AND 31701 RIVERSIDE DRIVE (APNS: 379-381-053 AND 379-381-054).

Project Location
The project site is an existing 1.99-acre commercial center located along Riverside Drive between Joy Street and Lincoln Street at 31681 and 31701 Riverside Drive. The project site encompasses Assessor Parcel Numbers (APNs) 379-381-053 and 379-381-054.

The commercial retail plaza was originally entitled in the mid-to-late 1980s and is now known as the Lakefront Plaza. The site is fully developed with an approximately 14,000-square-foot twostory commercial building and 12,000-square-foot one-story commercial building along with existing parking spaces and landscaping. Existing businesses at Lakefront Plaza include a mixture of religious institutions, commercial retail shops, and two restaurants.

PA No. 2023-17 (Lakefront Plaza Revitalization)

Environmental Setting

EXISTING

LAND USE GENERAL PLAN ZONING
Project
Site Commercial General Commercial (GC) General Commercial (C-2) North Residential Medium Density Residential (MDR) Medium Density Residential (R-2) South Commercial Commercial Mixed Use (CMU) Commercial Mixed Use (CMU) East Commercial General Commercial (GC) General Commercial (C-2) West Commercial General Commercial (GC) General Commercial (C-2) Table 1: Environmental Setting
Project Description
Planning Application No. 2023-17 is a request for a Commercial Design Review (CDR No. 2023- 05) to remodel the existing exterior façade and interior renovations of the commercial buildings including the following proposed improvements:
• Demolish both structure’s existing storefront, roof membrane, and interior/exterior walls and doors to construct a new storefront façade with interior renovations including partition walls and restrooms;
• Demolish a small portion of the existing two-story building to reduce the building size from 13,837 square feet (sq. ft.) to 13,435 sq. ft.;
• Demolish the existing exterior stairwell attached to the two-story building and construct a new interior stairwell with an accessible chair lift;
• Construct a new 833-square-foot patio with a second story deck for the existing twostory building; and • New commercial center identification signage, individual unit signage, and site improvements to the parking and landscaping.

The applicant is also requesting a reduction in the required number of parking spaces associated with the proposed remodeling and change in uses (refer to Attachment 5 for the Parking Study).

The proposed improvements are intended to accommodate a mix of new and existing retail, office, and restaurant tenant spaces. Notably, two new restaurant spaces will be added including a second story modern restaurant with a view of Lake Elsinore. The applicant has experience in opening and operating successful restaurants in neighboring cities including Temecula (1909 and Toast). The applicant is seeking to revitalize the existing center and bring new restaurant concepts to serve the Lake Elsinore community including visitors.

PA No. 2023-17 (Lakefront Plaza Revitalization)

Analysis
The following analysis below provides a discussion of the proposed project’s consistency with the commercial development standards and requirements pursuant to the Lake Elsinore Municipal Code (LEMC) as well as the General Plan. In addition, the Design Review Committee, including Staff from Planning, Building and Safety, Fire, and Engineering Departments and the Elsinore Valley Municipal Water District, has reviewed the project and have included recommended conditions of approval to ensure compliance with adopted plans, policies, and regulations.

General Plan Consistency
The subject site has a General Plan Land Use designation of General Commercial (GC) and is located in the Lakeview District. The GC Land Use designation provides for retail, services, restaurants, professional and administrative offices, hotels and motels, mixed-use projects, public and quasi-public uses, and similar and compatible uses with a maximum 0.40 floor area ratio (FAR). The project is proposing to modify an existing multi-tenant commercial retail building with an existing 0.26 FAR. The proposed project includes changes in uses that will continue to be consistent with the intent of the GC Land Use designation. The proposed project improvements do not involve an expansion in square footage or FAR. Therefore, the project is consistent with the General Plan.

Municipal Code Consistency
The current zoning designation of the subject site is General Commercial (C-2). According to LEMC Section 17.124.020, all permitted uses of the Commercial Office (C-O) and the Neighborhood Commercial (C-1) district as contained within LEMC Sections 17.116.020 and

17.120.020 are also permitted uses in the C-2 zone. Restaurants and retail stores are considered permitted uses in the C-O and C-1 zones and as such, also permitted in the C-2 zone. The proposed remodel and exterior site improvements comply with the applicable development standards for the C-2 zone including building setbacks, height, and landscaping.

The proposed parking reduction request is consistent with the findings outlined in LEMC Section

17.148.030.D.1 and is discussed in detail in the Parking Analysis Section below. In addition, the project includes conditions of approval to address any future parking concerns.

Architectural Elevations
The architectural design of the proposed building complies with the Nonresidential Development Standards (Chapter 17.112) of the LEMC. The commercial building exteriors would be modernized through a more rectangular form with asymmetrical walls and varying rooflines. The structure also employs recessed and pop-out walls to add additional architectural articulation and stone veneer will be employed throughout the structure to avoid long expanses of untreated open walls. The updated exterior consists of stucco in cool shades of white and gray with blue accents.

Furthermore, the proposed landscaping improvements complement the proposed building design, provide shade and break-up expanses of pavement.

PA No. 2023-17 (Lakefront Plaza Revitalization)

Parking Analysis
LEMC Section 17.148.030.A requires one (1) space for each 250 sq. ft. of gross floor area for commercial uses in the C-2 zoning district. For restaurant uses, LEMC Section 17.148.030.E.13 requires one (1) space for each 45 sq. ft. of customer area plus one (1) space for each 200 sq. ft. of non-customer area. Notably, the applicant indicated that the proposed patio and second story deck will not be used as a dedicated dining area resulting in expanded customer capacity.

Accordingly, it was determined that such area should not be counted towards the customer area for purposes of calculating the parking requirement for the customer area. The proposed project would require 179 parking spaces based on the LEMC (refer to Parking Summary Table below).

SUITE TENANT NAME LAND

USE LEMC REQUIRED PARKING

REQUIRED

PARKING
STALLS
Building One
A Commercial Uses (TBD) Retail 1 Space Per 250 sq. ft. 11.9 B AP Beauty Supplies Retail 1 Space Per 250 sq. ft. 4.8 C/D 74 Cantina Mexican
Cuisine Restaurant
1 space for each 45 square feet of customer
area, plus 1 space for each 200 square feet
of non-customer area. Gross floor area
includes 40% customer area and 60% noncustomer area.

52.5 E/F All-Pro Engine and Mower
Supply Retail 1 Space Per 250 sq. ft. 82.6
Building Two
G/H Restaurant (TBD) Restaurant
1 space for each 45 square feet of customer
area, plus 1 space for each 200 square feet
of non-customer area. Gross floor area
includes 40% customer area and 60% noncustomer area.

22.9 I/J Aero Delivery, Inc. Retail 1 Space Per 250 sq. ft. 7.1 K
Dreamcatchers
Photography Retail 1 Space Per 250 sq. ft. 3.0
L Commercial (TBD) Retail 1 Space Per 250 sq. ft. 2.9
M/N VIP Best Insurance Agency Retail 1 Space Per 250 sq. ft. 10.7 O Pizza Bowl Restaurant
1 space for each 45 square feet of customer
area, plus 1 space for each 200 square feet
of non-customer area. Gross floor area
includes 40% customer area and 60% noncustomer area.

21.5 P Restaurant TBD Restaurant
1 space for each 45 square feet of customer
area, plus 1 space for each 200 square feet
of non-customer area. Gross floor area
includes 40% customer area and 60% noncustomer area.

22.8 Q Commercial (TBD) Office 1 Space Per 250 sq. ft. 5.2 TOTAL PARKING REQUIRED PER LEMC1 179
TOTAL PARKING PROPOSED PER PARKING STUDY 135
Table 2: Parking Summary
1 Pursuant to LEMC Section 17.148.020.C, the number of parking spaces required resulting in a fractional number shall be rounded to the next higher whole number.

PA No. 2023-17 (Lakefront Plaza Revitalization)

The project proposes to provide 135 parking spaces including six (6) accessible parking spaces.

As such, the applicant is requesting to reduce their required parking by 44 spaces. Per LEMC Section 17.148.030.D, a request to reduce the number of required parking spaces may be made to the Planning Commission concurrent with the design review of a commercial or industrial project or with a proposed change of use within a commercial or industrial building when the applicant determines that the actual number of needed parking spaces is less than that required by the code.

Based on the applicant’s parking study completed by K2 Traffic Engineering, Inc. (dated May 23, 2024) for the proposed project, the following findings are in accordance with LEMC Section

17.148.030.D for the requested parking reduction:

1. A parking study prepared by a traffic and parking consultant was submitted for this project and includes a shared parking analysis based on the mix of current and proposed land uses within the existing commercial plaza;

2. The shared parking analysis includes a Time-of-Day Factor Model for the proposed project based on the mix of land uses and square footages as identified on the site plan. This analysis is based on the principle that different land uses have different peak periods of parking demand throughout a given day (e.g., restaurants have peak demands during typical lunch and dinner times). Given the proposed mix of uses and their varying peak parking demand times, the shared parking analysis determined that they may be able to share a single pool of parking;

3. Furthermore, based on the results of the shared parking analysis, the proposed parking supply of 135 parking spaces including six (6) accessible spaces is projected to adequately accommodate peak parking demand at 12:00 P.M. on weekdays and 2:00 P.M. on weekends at the project site with a surplus of three (3) parking spaces;

4. Reduced parking will not affect the health, safety and welfare of the public because the parking study demonstrated a sufficient number of parking spaces would be provided.

Furthermore, the parking lot is designed to allow efficient on-site circulation and access for emergency vehicles; and

5. The project has been conditioned to ensure compliance with the findings and the intent of LEMC Section 17.148.030.D and to ensure that an adequate parking management plan will be implemented to ensure adequate parking spaces will be provided per code requirements should demand for parking increase on site (COA Nos. 13, 14, and 15).

Environmental Determination
The proposed project is exempt from the California Environmental Quality Act (Cal. Pub. Res.

Code §§21000 et seq.: “CEQA”) and the CEQA Guidelines (14 C.C.R. §§ 15000 et seq.) pursuant to CEQA Guidelines Section 15301 (Class 1 Existing Facilities). Class 1 consists of the operation, repair, maintenance, permitting, leasing, licensing, or minor alteration of existing public or private structures, facilities, mechanical equipment, or topographical features, involving negligible or no PA No. 2023-17 (Lakefront Plaza Revitalization)

expansion of use beyond that existing at the time of the lead agency’s determination. The project proposes to remodel an existing 13,837 sq. ft. two-story commercial building including a 402 sq. ft. reduction and exterior modifications. The project also proposes improvements to the existing 11,959 sq. ft. one-story commercial building fascia.

MSHCP Consistency
The proposed project is consistent with the Western Riverside County Multiple Species Habitat Conservation Plan (MSHCP). The project site is completely disturbed and is developed with an existing commercial center. The subject property is not located in an MSHCP criteria cell and is not subject to the City’s LEAP and the Western Riverside County Regional Conservation Authority’s (RCA) JPR process. The project complies with all other applicable requirements of the MSHCP.

Public Notice
Notice of the hearing for this application has been published in the Press-Enterprise newspaper and mailed to property owners within 300 feet of the subject property. As of the writing of this report, no written comments concerning this application have been received by staff.

Attachments
Attachment 1 – CDR Resolution
Attachment 2 – Conditions of Approval
Attachment 3 – GIS Exhibits
Attachment 4 – Design Review Package
Attachment 5 – Parking Study
Attachment 6 – Public Notice Package
RESOLUTION NO. 2024-

A RESOLUTION OF THE PLANNING COMMISSION OF THE CITY OF LAKE ELSINORE, CALIFORNIA, APPROVING PLANNING APPLICATION NO. 2023-17 (COMMERCIAL DESIGN REVIEW NO. 2023-05) FOR EXTERIOR BUILDING FAÇADE AND RELATED SITE IMPROVEMENTS WITH A PARKING REDUCTION

FOR THE EXISTING LAKEFRONT PLAZA COMMERCIAL CENTER LOCATED AT 31681 AND 31701 RIVERSIDE DRIVE (APNS: 379-381-053 AND 379-381-054) Whereas, Richard Leigh, Fluid and Fare, has filed an application with the City of Lake Elsinore (City) requesting approval of Planning Application No. 2023-17 (Commercial Design Review No. 2023-05) to make minor modifications related to existing building size and architectural elevations for the existing 13,837 sq. ft. two-story commercial building (13,435 sq. ft. after remodel). The project also proposes minor modifications related to the architectural elevations of the existing 11,989 sq. ft. one-story commercial building and other on-site modifications. The project site is located on a 1.99-acre site at 31681 and 31701 Riverside Drive (APNS: 379-381-053 and 379-381-054);
Whereas, Section 6.0 of the Western Riverside County Multiple Species Habitat Conservation Plan (MSHCP) requires that all discretionary projects within a MSHCP Criteria Cell undergo the Lake Elsinore Acquisition Process (LEAP) and Joint Project Review (JPR) process to analyze the scope of the proposed development and establish a building envelope that is consistent with the MSHCP criteria;
Whereas, Section 6.0 of the MSHCP further requires that the City adopt consistency findings demonstrating that the proposed discretionary entitlement complies with the MSHCP Criteria Cell, and the MSHCP goals and objectives;
Whereas, pursuant to Section 17.415.050 (Major Design Review) of the Lake Elsinore Municipal Code (LEMC), the Planning Commission (Commission) has the responsibility of reviewing and approving, conditionally approving, or denying design review applications; Whereas, pursuant to Section 17.148.030.D.1. (Parking Study) of the LEMC, the Commission has the responsibility of reviewing and approving, conditionally approving, or denying parking reduction requests; and
Whereas, on August 20, 2024, at a duly noticed Public Hearing, the Commission has considered evidence presented by the Community Development Department and other interested parties with respect to this item.

NOW, THEREFORE, THE PLANNING COMMISSION OF THE CITY OF LAKE ELSINORE DOES HEREBY RESOLVE, DETERMINE AND ORDER AS FOLLOWS:

Section 1: The Commission has considered the project and its consistency with the MSHCP prior to adopting Findings of Consistency with the MSHCP.

Section 2: That in accordance with the MSHCP, the Commission makes the following findings for MSHCP consistency:

1. The Project is not subject to the City’s LEAP and the Western Riverside County Regional Conservation Authority’s (RCA) JPR processes as it is not located within a Criteria Cell.

PC Reso. No. 2024-____

2. The Project is consistent with the Riparian/Riverine Areas, Vernal Pools Guidelines, and the Fuel Management Guidelines as the Project is wholly located within an existing building and does not include any earth disturbing activities therefore Sections 6.1.2 or

6.3.1 of the MSHCP are not applicable.

3. The project is consistent with the Protection of Narrow Endemic Plant Species Guidelines and the Additional Survey Needs and Procedures because the project is not located within any Narrow Endemic Plant Species Survey Areas or Critical Species Survey Areas.

4. The Project is consistent with the Fuels Management Guidelines because the Project site is not within or adjacent to any MSHCP Criteria Cell or conservation areas.

Section 3: The Commission has reviewed and analyzed the proposed project pursuant to the California Planning and Zoning Laws (Cal. Gov. Code §§ 59000 et seq.), the Lake Elsinore General Plan (GP), and the LEMC and finds and determines that the proposed project is consistent with the requirements of California Planning and Zoning Law and with the goals and policies of the GP and the LEMC.

Section 4: The Commission hereby finds and determines that the project is categorically exempt from California Environmental Quality Act (Cal. Publ. Res. Code §§21000 et seq. “CEQA”) and CEQA Guidelines (14. Cal. Code Regs. §§15000 et seq.), specifically pursuant to Section 15301 (Class 1 – Existing Facilities). Class 1 consists of the operation, repair, maintenance, permitting, leasing, licensing, or minor alteration of existing public or private structures, facilities, mechanical equipment, or topographical features, involving negligible or no expansion of use beyond that existing at the time of the lead agency’s determination. The project proposes to remodel an existing 13,837 sq. ft. two-story commercial building including a 402 sq. ft. reduction and exterior modifications. The project also proposes improvements to the existing 11,959 sq. ft. one-story commercial building fascia.

Section 5: That in accordance with Section 17.415.050.G of the LEMC, the Commission makes the following findings regarding Commercial Design Review No. 2023-04:

1. The project, as approved, will comply with the goals and objectives of the General Plan and the zoning district in which the project is located.

The subject site has a General Plan Land Use designation of General Commercial (GC) and is located in the Lake View District which allows retail, services, restaurants, professional and administrative offices, hotels, and motels, mixed-use projects, public and quasi-public uses, and similar and compatible uses with a maximum 0.40 floor area ratio (FAR). The project’s proposed changes in uses will continue to be consistent with the intent of the GC Land Use designation as well as the Lake View District Plan. The proposed project improvements do not involve an expansion in square footage that would increase the FAR. Furthermore, the project is consistent with the goal of General Plan Land Use Policy 1.3 since it proposes to establish new sit-down restaurant tenant spaces.

Therefore, the Project is consistent with the General Plan.

PC Reso. No. 2024-____

The proposed project also complies with the intent of the C-2 zoning district because the proposed change in uses is permitted in the zone and the remodeling will help attract new businesses including restaurants to continue serving the residents and visitors of the City.

2. The Project complies with the design directives contained in the LEMC and all applicable provisions of the LEMC.

The project is appropriate to the site and surrounding developments because the proposed new uses are compatible with the existing neighboring businesses which also include a variety of retail, commercial, and restaurants. The architectural design of the proposed buildings conforms to the Nonresidential Development Standards (Chapter

17.112) of the LEMC because it will modernize the Lakefront Plaza with a new improved façade including a new exterior color palette. Enhanced onsite landscaping has been provided thereby creating interest and varying vistas for the a pedestrian experience along abutting streets. The architecture has been designed to enhance the surrounding area. In addition, the project has been designed to ensure safe and efficient circulation is provided onsite.

3. Conditions and safeguards pursuant to Section 17.415.050.G.3 of the LEMC, including guarantees and evidence of compliance with conditions, have been incorporated into the approval of the Project to ensure development of the property in accordance with the objectives of Section 17.415.050.

The Design Review Committee, including Staff from Planning, Building and Safety, Fire, and Engineering Departments and the Elsinore Valley Municipal Water District, has reviewed the project and have included recommended conditions of approval to ensure compliance with adopted plans, policies, and regulations. Furthermore, the project will be required to demonstrate compliance with the conditions of approval and other applicable design and development standard requirements pursuant to LEMC Section 17.415.050 during the plan check review process prior to the issuance of permit(s) for construction.

Section 6: That in accordance with Section 17.148.030.D of the LEMC, the Commission makes the following findings regarding Commercial Design Review No. 2023-05 for the parking reduction:

1. A parking study prepared by a traffic and parking consultant was submitted for this project and includes a shared parking analysis based on the mix of current and proposed land uses within the existing commercial plaza;

2. The shared parking analysis includes a Time-of-Day Factor Model for the proposed project based on the land uses and square footages as identified on the site plan. This analysis is based on the principle that different land uses have different peak periods of parking demand throughout a given day (e.g., restaurants have peak demands during typical lunch and dinner times). Given the proposed mix of uses and their varying peak parking demand times, the shared parking analysis determined that they may be able to share a single pool of parking;

3. Furthermore, based on the results of the shared parking analysis, the proposed parking supply of 135 parking spaces including six (6) accessible spaces is projected to adequately accommodate peak parking demand at 12:00 P.M. on weekdays and 2:00 P.M. on weekends at the project site with a surplus of three (3) parking spaces; PC Reso. No. 2024-____

4. Reduced parking will not affect the health, safety and welfare of the public because the parking study demonstrated a sufficient number of parking spaces would be provided.

Furthermore, the parking lot is designed to allow efficient on-site circulation and access for emergency vehicles; and

5. The project has been conditioned to ensure compliance with the findings and the intent of LEMC Section 17.148.030.D and to ensure that an adequate parking management plan will be implemented to ensure adequate parking spaces will be provided per code requirements should demand for parking increase on site (COA Nos. 13, 14 and 15).

Section 7: Based upon the evidence presented, both written and testimonial, and the above findings, the Commission hereby finds that the project is consistent with the MSHCP.

Section 8: Based upon the evidence presented, the above findings, and the Conditions of Approval imposed upon the project, the Commission hereby approves Commercial Design Review No. 2023-05.

Section 9: This Resolution shall take effect immediately upon its adoption.

Passed and Adopted on this 20th day of August, 2024.

Jodi Peters, Chair
PC Reso. No. 2024-____

Attest:
___________________________________
Damaris Abraham,
Community Development Director

STATE OF CALIFORNIA )
COUNTY OF RIVERSIDE ) ss.

CITY OF LAKE ELSINORE )
I, Damaris Abraham, Community Development Director of the City of Lake Elsinore, California, hereby certify that Resolution No. 2024-__ was adopted by the Planning Commission of the City of Lake Elsinore, California, at a regular meeting held August 20, 2024 and that the same was adopted by the following vote:

AYES:

NOES:

ABSTAIN:

ABSENT:

Damaris Abraham,
Community Development Director
Applicant’s Initials: _____ Page 1 of 11

CONDITIONS OF APPROVAL
PROJECT: PA 2023-17/CDR 2023-05
PROJECT NAME: Lakefront Plaza Revitalization
PROJECT LOCATION: APNs: 379-381-053 and 379-381-054
APPROVAL DATE:

EFFECTIVE DATE:

EXPIRATION DATE:

GENERAL

1. Planning Application No. 2023-17 (Commercial Design Review No. 2023-05) to make minor modifications related to existing building size and architectural elevations for the existing 13,837 sq. ft. two-story commercial building (13,435 sq. ft. after remodel). The project also proposes minor modifications related to the architectural elevations of the existing 11,989 sq. ft. one-story commercial building and other on-site modifications. The project site is an existing 1.99-acre commercial center (Lakefront Plaza) located along Riverside Drive between Joy Street and Lincoln Street at 31681 and 31701 Riverside Drive (APNs: 379- 381-053 and 379-381-054).

2. The applicant shall defend (with counsel acceptable to the City), indemnify, and hold harmless the City, its Officials, Officers, Employees, Agents, and its Consultants (Indemnitees) from any claim, action, or proceeding against the Indemnitees to attack, set aside, void, or annul an approval of the City, its advisory agencies, appeal boards, or legislative body concerning approval, implementation and construction of and CDR 2023- 05 which action is bought within the time period provided for in California Government Code Sections 65009 and/or 66499.37, and Public Resources Code Section 21167, including the approval, extension or modification of CDR 2023-05 or any of the proceedings, acts or determinations taken, done, or made prior to the decision, or to determine the reasonableness, legality or validity of any condition attached thereto. The Applicant's indemnification is intended to include, but not be limited to, damages, fees and/or costs awarded against or incurred by Indemnitees and costs of suit, claim or litigation, including without limitation attorneys' fees, penalties and other costs, liabilities and expenses incurred by Indemnitees in connection with such proceeding. The City will promptly notify the applicant of any such claim, action, or proceeding against the City. If the project is challenged in court, the City and the applicant shall enter into formal defense and indemnity agreement, consistent with this condition.

3. Within 30 days of project approval, the applicant shall sign and complete an "Acknowledgment of Conditions" and shall return the executed original to the Community Development Department for inclusion in the case records.

PLANNING DIVISION

4. Commercial Design Review No. 2023-05 shall lapse and become void two years following the date on which the design review became effective, unless one of the following: (1) prior to the expiration of two years, a building permit related to the design review is issued and construction commenced and diligently pursued toward completion; or (2) prior to the expiration of two years, the applicant has applied for and has been granted an extension of the design review approval pursuant to subsections (1) and (2) of Lake Elsinore Municipal Code (LEMC) Section 17.415.050.I.1. Notwithstanding conditions to the contrary, a design PA 2023-17/ CDR 2023-05 PC: August 20, 2024
Conditions of Approval CC: TBD
Applicant’s Initials: _____ Page 2 of 11
review granted pursuant to LEMC Section 17.415.050.I.2 shall run with the land for this twoyear period, subject to any approved extensions, and shall continue to be valid upon a change of ownership of the site, which was the subject of the design review application.

5. All Conditions of Approval shall be reproduced on page one of building plans prior to their acceptance by the Building and Safety Division, Community Development Department. All Conditions of Approval shall be met prior to the issuance of a Certificate of Occupancy.

6. All future development proposals shall be reviewed by the City on a project-by-project basis.

If determined necessary by the Community Development Director or designee, additional environmental analysis will be required.

7. Any proposed minor revisions to approved plans shall be reviewed and approved by the Community Development Director or designee. Any proposed substantial revisions to the approved plans shall be reviewed according to the provisions of the Municipal Code in a similar manner as a new application. Grading plan revisions shall be reviewed by the City Engineer.

8. Provisions of the City's Noise Ordinance (LEMC Chapter 17.176) shall be satisfied during all site preparation and construction activity. Site preparation activity and construction shall not commence before 7:00 AM and shall cease no later than 5:00 PM, Monday through Friday. Only finish work and similar interior construction may be conducted on Saturdays and may commence no earlier than 8:00 am and shall cease no later than 4:00 p.m.

Construction activity shall not take place on Sunday, or any Legal Holidays.

9. No individual signs are approved as part of this approval. The applicant or designee shall submit an application for a sign permit, pay appropriate fees and receive approval from the Community Development Department for any sign(s) installed at the project site.

10. Graffiti shall be removed within 24 hours.

11. All materials and colors depicted on the approved plans shall be used. If the applicant wishes to modify any of the approved materials or colors depicted on the plans, the applicant shall submit a proposal setting forth the modifications for review by the Community Development Director or his designee.

12. The entire site shall be kept free from trash and debris at all times and in no event shall trash and debris remain for more than 24 hours.

13. In accordance with Section 17.148.030.D of the LEMC and the Shared Parking Analysis provided in the Parking Analysis, prepared by K2 Traffic Engineering, Inc., dated 05-23- 2024, the project shall provide 135 parking spaces including six ADA accessible spaces.

Per Section 17.148.030.D.1.i of the LEMC, the project shall provide additional parking spaces should the demand for parking increase on site. Where additional parking cannot be accommodated, the applicant shall be responsible for instituting parking solutions including but not limited to offering valet parking or securing off-site parking at adjacent lots via reciprocal access agreement(s) and/or shared parking agreement(s).

14. Prior to the issuance of a building permit, the applicant shall provide a parking management plan for staff’s review and approval.

PA 2023-17/ CDR 2023-05 PC: August 20, 2024
Conditions of Approval CC: TBD
Applicant’s Initials: _____ Page 3 of 11

15. In accordance with Section 17.148.030.D.2 of the LEMC, the parking determination granting reduced parking requirements may be revoked at any time if there is evidence of insufficient on-site parking, i.e., “spill over” parking onto a public right-of-way or onto an adjacent lot(s).

Upon revocation of a parking determination approval, the applicant will be required to submit a new application for a parking determination or provide on-site parking per code requirements.

16. Proposed uses shall be limited to those identified in the floor plans for Buildings 1 and 2 (Sheets A1.0, B1.0, and B1.1) dated 08-08-23 (revised 04-17-24). In the event the applicant proposes to modify the floor plan, the modification shall be subject to review by the Community Development Director or his designee. Uses that require a Conditional Use Permit are subject to review by the Planning Commission.

17. If any of the conditions of approval set forth herein fail to occur, or if they are, by their terms, to be implemented and maintained over time, if any of such conditions fail to be so implemented and maintained according to their terms, the City shall have the right to revoke or modify all approvals herein granted, deny or further condition issuance of all future building permits, deny revoke, or further condition all certificates of occupancy issued under the authority of approvals herein granted; record a notice of violation on the property title; institute and prosecute litigation to compel their compliance with said conditions or seek damages for their violation.

Prior to Issuance of Grading Permits/Building Permits

18. All roof mounted or ground support air conditioning units or other mechanical equipment incidental to development shall be architecturally screened or shielded by landscaping so that they are not visible from neighboring property or public streets. Any roof mounted central swamp coolers shall also be screened, and the Community Development Director, prior to issuance of building permit shall approve screening plan.

19. The project shall meet all requirements of the Elsinore Valley Municipal Water District (EVMWD). The applicant shall submit water and sewer plans to the EVMWD and shall incorporate all district conditions and standards.

20. The property address (in numerals at least six inches high) shall be displayed near the entrance and be easily visible from the front of the subject property and public right-of-way.

21. The applicant shall construct trash enclosure(s) to match the colors, materials and design of the project architecture.

22. Prior to issuance of a building permit, the Final Landscaping / Irrigation Detail Plans shall be submitted to the Community Development Department with appropriate fees, for review and approval by the Community Development Director or designee. a. All planting areas shall have permanent and automatic sprinkler system with 50% plant coverage using a drip irrigation method.

PA 2023-17/ CDR 2023-05 PC: August 20, 2024
Conditions of Approval CC: TBD
Applicant’s Initials: _____ Page 4 of 11
b. All planting areas shall be separated from paved areas with a six inch (6”) high and six inch (6”) wide concrete curb. Runoff shall be allowed from paved areas into landscape areas.
c. Planting within fifteen feet (15’) of ingress/egress points shall be no higher than twentyfour inches (24”). d. Landscape planters shall be planted with an appropriate parking lot shade tree pursuant to the LEMC and Landscape Design Guidelines.
e. No required tree planting bed shall be less than 5 feet wide. f. Root barriers shall be installed for all trees planted within 10 feet of hardscape areas to include sidewalks.
g. Any transformers and mechanical or electrical equipment shall be indicated on landscape plan and screened as part of the landscaping plan. h. The landscape plan shall provide for ground cover, shrubs, and trees and meet all requirements of the City’s adopted Landscape Guidelines. i. All landscaping and irrigation shall be installed within affected portion of any phase at the time a Certificate of Occupancy is requested for any building. j. Final landscape plan must be consistent with approved site plan. k. Final landscape plans to include planting and irrigation details and shall blend in with the existing shopping center.
l. Final landscape plans shall include drought tolerant planting consistent with Elsinore Valley Municipal Water District standards subject to plan check and approval by the City’s landscape plan check consultant.
m. No turf shall be permitted pursuant to LEMC Chapter 19.08: Water Efficient Landscape Requirements.

23. Landscaping installed for the project shall be continuously maintained to the reasonable satisfaction of the Community Development Director. If it is determined that the landscaping is not being maintained, the Director of Community Development shall have the authority to require the property owner to bring the landscaping into conformance with the approved landscape plan. The continued maintenance of all landscaped areas shall be the responsibility of the developer or any successors in interest.

24. The proposed location of on-site construction trailers shall be approved by the Community Development Director or designee. A cash bond of $1,000 shall be required for any construction trailers placed on the site and used during construction. Bonds will be released after removal of trailers and restoration of the site to an acceptable state, subject to approval of the Community Development Director or designee. Such trailer(s) shall be fully on private property and outside the public right of way.

25. Prior to building permit issuance, the applicant shall initiate and complete Covenants, Conditions and Restrictions (CC&Rs) which shall be approved by the City. All CC&R documents that address including, but not limited to, reciprocal easements, shall be submitted for review and approval by City Planning, Engineering and the City Attorney and upon City approval shall be recorded. Such documents shall include Covenants, Conditions and Restrictions (CC&Rs).
 All landscaping, all drainage basins, and common areas including but not limited to parking areas and drive aisles, shall be maintained in accordance with the CC&Rs.
 Provisions to restrict parking upon other than approved and developed parking PA 2023-17/ CDR 2023-05 PC: August 20, 2024
Conditions of Approval CC: TBD
Applicant’s Initials: _____ Page 5 of 11
spaces shall be written into the CC&Rs for the project.

BUILDING DIVISION
General Conditions

26. Final Building and Safety Conditions. Final Building and Safety Conditions will be addressed when building construction plans are submitted to Building and Safety for review. These conditions will be based on occupancy, use, the California Building Code (CBC), and related codes which are enforced at the time of building plan submittal.

27. Compliance with Code. All design components shall comply with applicable provisions of the 2022 edition of the California Building, Plumbing and Mechanical Codes: 2022 California Electrical Code; California Administrative Code, 2022 California Energy Codes, 2022 California Green Building Standards, California Title 24 Disabled Access Regulations, and Lake Elsinore Municipal Code.

28. Green Measures. The application shall provide 10% voluntary green measures on the project, as stipulated by the 2022 California Green Building Standards.

29. Disabled Access. Applicant shall provide details of all applicable disabled access provisions and building setbacks on plans to include:
a. All ground floor units to be adaptable.
b. Disabled access from the public way to the entrance of the building. c. Van accessible parking located as close as possible to the main entry. d. Path of accessibility from parking to furthest point of common area. e. Path of travel from public right-of-way to all public areas on site, such as club house, trach enclosure tot lots and picnic areas.

30. Street Addressing. Applicant must obtain street addressing for all proposed buildings by requesting street addressing and submitting a site plan for commercial or multi-family residential projects or a recorded final map for single- family residential projects. It takes 10 days to issue address and notify other agencies. Please contact Sonia Salazar at [email protected] or 951-674-3124 X 277.

31. Clearance from LEUSD. A receipt or clearance letter from the Lake Elsinore School District shall be submitted to the Building and Safety Department to ensure the payment or exemption from School Mitigation Fees.

32. Obtain Approvals Prior to Construction. Applicant must obtain all building plans and permit approvals prior to commencement of any construction work.

33. Obtaining Separate Approvals and Permits. Trash enclosures, patio covers, light standards, and any block walls will require separate approvals and permits.

34. Sewer and Water Plan Approvals. On-site sewer and water plans will require separate approvals and permits. Septic systems will need to be approved from Riverside County Environmental Health Department before permit issuance.

PA 2023-17/ CDR 2023-05 PC: August 20, 2024
Conditions of Approval CC: TBD
Applicant’s Initials: _____ Page 6 of 11

35. House Electrical Meter. Applicant shall provide a house electrical meter to provide power for the operation of exterior lighting, irrigation pedestals and fire alarm systems for each building on the site. Developments with single user buildings shall clearly show on the plans how the operation of exterior lighting and fire alarm systems when a house meter is not specifically proposed.

At Plan Review Submittal

36. Submitting Plans and Calculations. Applicant must submit to Building and Safety four (4) complete sets of plans and two (2) sets of supporting calculations for review and approval including:
a. An electrical plan including load calculations and panel schedule, plumbing schematic, and mechanical plan applicable to scope of work.
b. A precise grading plan to verify accessibility for the persons with disabilities. c. Truss calculations that have been stamped by the engineer of record of the building and the truss manufacturer engineer.

Prior to Issuance of Grading Permit(s)

37. Onsite Water and Sewer Plans. Onsite water and sewer plans, submitted separately from the building plans, shall be submitted to Building and Safety for review and approval.

38. Demolition Permits. A demolition permit shall be obtained if there is an existing structure to be removed as part of the project. Asbestos report and lead base paint reports are required before demo permit will be issued.

Prior to Issuance of Building Permit(s)

39. Plans Require Stamp of Registered Professional. Applicant shall provide appropriate stamp of a registered professional with original signature on the plans. Provide C.D. of approved plans to the Building Division.

Prior to Beginning of Construction

40. Pre-Construction Meeting. A pre-construction meeting is required with the building inspector prior to the start of the building construction.

ENGINEERING DEPARTMENT

GENERAL

41. All new submittals for plan check or permit shall be made using the City’s online Citizen Self-Service Portal (CSSP).

42. All engineering plans shall be prepared by a licensed Civil Engineer using the City’s standard title block.

PA 2023-17/ CDR 2023-05 PC: August 20, 2024
Conditions of Approval CC: TBD
Applicant’s Initials: _____ Page 7 of 11

43. All landscaping within the public right-of-way shall be maintained by the property owner, owner’s association, firms contracted by the property owner’s association, or another maintenance entity approved by the City Council.

44. In accordance with the City’s Franchise Agreement for waste disposal and recycling, the applicant shall be required to contract with CR&R, Inc. for removal and disposal of all waste material, debris, vegetation and other rubbish generated both during cleaning, demolition, clear and grubbing or all other phases of construction and during occupancy.

45. The site will accommodate all construction activity, building activity, vehicles, etc. No staging on public streets, or private property belonging to others shall be conducted without the written permission of the property owner.

46. Minimum good housekeeping and erosion and sediment control Best Management Practices (BMPs) shall be implemented.

FEES

47. Applicant shall pay all applicable permit application and Engineering assessed fees, including without limitation plan check, at the prevalent rate at time of payment in full.

48. Applicant shall pay all applicable Mitigation and Development Impact Fees at the prevalent rate at time of payment in full. Fees are subject to change.

LAND DIVISION

49. Applicant shall submit and complete plan check review and approval approval a lot line adjustment for APN 379-381-054. The lot line adjustment shall be recorded prior to issuance of certificate of occupancy.

50. Applicant shall dedicate, in form of irrevocable offer, the right-of-way of Riverside Drive adjacent to the property for a total right-of-way of 60 feet from centerline to the project property line. Riverside Drive is classified as an Urban Arterial Highway in the City’s General Plan, where full-width is 120 feet and curb-to-curb width is 96 feet.

STORM WATER MANAGEMENT / POLLUTION PREVENTION / NPDES

51. The project is responsible for complying with the Santa Ana Region National Pollutant Discharge Elimination System (NPDES) Permits as warranted based on the nature of development and/or activity.

IMPROVEMENTS

52. Project will be responsible for the following improvements:
 Construction of commercial driveway approaches and ADA compliant curb ramps per California Department of Transportation and/or City of Lake Elsinore approved standards or a modified acceptable version to California Department of Transportation and City Engineer. Sidewalk construction incidental to driveway approach improvements shall be included.

PA 2023-17/ CDR 2023-05 PC: August 20, 2024
Conditions of Approval CC: TBD
Applicant’s Initials: _____ Page 8 of 11

53. Sight distance into and out at each project driveway shall comply with City Standard 125/126 or Caltrans standards. Project shall ensure above ground facilities are installed outside the line of sight of drivers.

54. Roof drains shall not be allowed to outlet directly through coring in the street curb. Roofs should drain to a landscaped area.

55. The site shall be planned and developed to keep surface water from entering buildings (California Green Building Standards Code 4.106.3).

56. A California licensed Civil Engineer shall prepare the improvement plans required for this project. Improvements shall be designed and constructed to City Standards and Codes (LEMC 12.04 and 16.34).

Permitting/Construction

57. An encroachment permit shall be obtained prior to any work on City right-of-way. The developer shall submit the permit application, required fees, and executed agreements, security and other required documentation prior to issuance.  A preconstruction meeting with the City Engineering Inspector (Engineering Department) is required prior to commencement of any public right-of-way improvement construction activities.

58. An Encroachment Permit from the California Department of Transportation shall be obtained prior to any work within California Department of Transportation right of way.

Permit shall be obtained prior to issuance of City permits.

59. All compaction reports shall be submitted to the Engineering Department before final inspection of public works improvements will be scheduled and approved.

60. The project site shall implement full trash capture methods/devices approved by the Region Water Quality Control Board. This shall include installation of connector pipe screens on all onsite and offsite catch basins to which the project discharges.

61. All restaurants and commercial food handling facilities must provide an area for the washing/steam cleaning of equipment and accessories. The area must be self-contained, equipped with a grease trap, and properly connected to a sanitary sewer. If the wash area is located outdoors, it must be covered, paved have secondary containment, and be connected to the sanitary sewer or other appropriately permitted disposal facility. Plan Requirements: The Owner/Applicant shall incorporate these food facility requirements into project design and depict on plans, including detail plans as needed.

PRIOR TO BUILDING PERMIT

62. Any dedications shall be recorded with the recorded copy provided to the City prior to issuance of the building permit

63. All public improvement plans shall be completed and approved by the City Engineer.

PA 2023-17/ CDR 2023-05 PC: August 20, 2024
Conditions of Approval CC: TBD
Applicant’s Initials: _____ Page 9 of 11

PRIOR TO OCCUPANCY / FINAL APPROVAL

64. All Required lot line adjustment(s) shall be recorded with the recorded copy provided to the City prior to issuance of first occupancy.

65. All public improvements shall be constructed in accordance with the approved plans or as a condition of this development to the satisfaction of the City Engineer prior to issuance of first occupancy.

66. Proof of acceptance of maintenance responsibility of slopes, open spaces, landscape areas, and drainage facilities shall be provided.

67. In the event of the damage to City roads from hauling or other construction related activity, applicant shall pay full cost of restoring public roads to the baseline condition.

68. Applicant shall pay all outstanding applicable processing and development fees prior to occupancy and/or final approval.

69. Applicant shall submit documentation pursuant to City’s Security Release handout.

CITY OF LAKE ELSINORE FIRE MARSHAL

70. The applicant/operator shall comply with all requirements of the Riverside County Fire Department Lake Elsinore Office of the Fire Marshal. Questions should be directed to the Riverside County Fire Department, Lake Elsinore Office of the Fire Marshal at 130 S. Main St., Lake Elsinore, CA 92530. Phone: (951) 671-3124 Ext. 225.

71. Prior to issuance of building permits, the applicant/developer shall provide the Office of the Fire Marshal with an approved site plan for Fire Lanes and Signage. (CFC 501.3)

72. Fire flow shall be determined by the building of the single largest square footage. The required fire flow is estimated to be 1500 GPM at 20 PSI for a 2-hour duration, per the 2022 California Fire Code.

73. Each parcel shall maintain independent access to the circulating roadway. Prior to first occupancy, reciprocal access agreements or dedicated access shall be established.

74. Construction Permits Fire Department Review: Submittal of construction plans to the Office of the Fire Marshal for development, construction, installation, and operational use permitting will be required. Final fire and life safety conditions will be addressed when the Office of the Fire Marshal reviews these plans. These conditions will be based on occupancy, use, California Building Code (CBC), California Fire Code, and related codes, which are in effect at the time of building plan submittal.

DEPARTMENT OF ADMINISTRATIVE SERVICES
Annex into the City of Lake Elsinore Community Facilities District No. 2015-2 (Maintenance Services)

75. Prior to issuance of a grading permit, the applicant shall submit an application to the Department of Administrative Services to initiate the annexation process into the Community PA 2023-17/ CDR 2023-05 PC: August 20, 2024
Conditions of Approval CC: TBD
Applicant’s Initials: _____ Page 10 of 11
Facilities District No. 2015-2 (Maintenance Services) or current Community Facilities District in place at the time of annexation to fund the on-going operation and maintenance of the public right-of-way landscaped areas and neighborhood parks to be maintained by the City and for street lights in the public right-of-way for which the City will pay for electricity and a maintenance fee to Southern California Edison, including parkways, street maintenance, open space and public storm drains constructed within the development and federal NPDES requirements to offset the annual negative fiscal impacts of the project. The annexation process shall be completed prior to issuance of the first certificate of occupancy for the project. Alternatively, the applicant may propose alternative financing mechanisms to fund the annual negative fiscal impacts of the project with respect to Maintenance Services.

Applicant shall make a non-refundable deposit of $15,000 or at the current rate in place at the time of annexation toward the cost of annexation, formation or other mitigation process, as applicable.

PA 2023-17/ CDR 2023-05 PC: August 20, 2024
Conditions of Approval CC: TBD
Applicant’s Initials: _____ Page 11 of 11
I hereby state that I acknowledge receipt of the approved Conditions of Approval for the above named project and do hereby agree to accept and abide by all Conditions of Approval as approved by the Planning Commission of the City of Lake Elsinore on _________. I also acknowledge that all Conditions shall be met as indicated.

Date:

Applicant’s Signature:

Print Name:

Address:

Phone Number:
0 155 310
US Feet
±
Coordinate System: NAD 1983 StatePlane California VI FIPS 0406 Feet Planning Application No. 2023-17
Commercial Design Review No. 2023-05
Aerial Map
Earthstar
Geographics
LEON
ST
BAZA
ST

ST CHARLES PL

BADALONA
ST

WALNUT DR

WASHINGTON ST

CANARY CT

ORIOLE CT LINNET
DR

FRASER DR
VIA
VALLE

PARKVIEW DR

QUAIL DR

SEDONA ST

ROBIN DR

VIA VALDEZ

FLANNERY ST

NASHLAND AVE

RAVEN DR

LINCOLN ST

JOY AVE

RIVERSIDE DR
Maxar
0 187.5 375
US Feet
±
Coordinate System: NAD 1983 StatePlane California VI FIPS 0406 Feet Planning Application No. 2017-17
Commercial Design Review No. 2023-05
Vicinity Map

BAZA ST

WASHINGTON ST
KANSAS
ST

ST CHARLES PL
ALVISO
ST

BADALONA ST

WALNUT DR

ORIOLE CT

SEDONA ST ESTANCIA ST
LEON
ST

LINNET DR

VIA VALLE

RIVERSIDE DR

PARKVIEW PL

ILLINOIS
ST

QUAIL DR

ROBIN DR

VIA CORDOVA
FRASER
DR

WOODCREST
DR

FLANNERY ST

LAKE CREST DR

WISCONSIN ST

NASHLAND AVE

VIA VALDEZRAVEN DR

PARKVIEW DR

JOY AVE

LINCOLN ST
0 100 200
US Feet
±
Coordinate System: NAD 1983 StatePlane California VI FIPS 0406 Feet Planning Application No. 2023-17
Commercial Design Review No. 2023-05
General Plan Exhibit
CMU -
Commercial
Mixed Use
GC - General
Commercial
LMR -
Low-Medium
Residential
MDR - Medium
Density
Residential
P/I -
Public/Institutional
R -
Recreational
GC - General
Commercial
LMR -
Low-Medium
Residential HDR - High
Density
Residential

LINCOLN ST

LINNET DR

CANARY CT

JOY AVE

QUAIL DR

ROBIN DR

RAVEN DR

NASHLAND AVE

RIVERSIDE DR
0 100 200
US Feet
±
Coordinate System: NAD 1983 StatePlane California VI FIPS 0406 Feet Planning Application No. 2023-17
Commercial Design Review No. 2023-05
Zoning Exhibit
R3 - High
Density
Residential
R2 - Medium
Density
Residential
CMU -
Commercial
Mixed Use
C2 - General
Commercial
C2 - General
Commercial

LINCOLN ST

LINNET DR

CANARYCT

JOY AVE

QUAIL DR

ROBIN DR

NASHLAND AVE

RAVEN DR

RIVERSIDE DR

CODE INFORMATIO
N
ALL CONSTRUCTION TO COMPLY WITH:

LEGAL DESCRIPTION

THE LAND REFERRED TO HEREIN BELOW IS

SITUATED IN THE CITY OF LAKE

ELSINORE, COUNTY OF RIVERSIDE, STATE OF CALIFORNIA, AND IS DESCRIBED AS FOLLOWS:

SITE DATA ACCESSIBILITY GENERAL NOTES:

1. ACCESSIBILITY PLAN DISTINGUISHES BETWEEN ACCESSIBLE AND INACCESSIBLE ELEMENTS AND NEW AND EXISTING ELEMENTS (CBC 11B-402).

FIRE
DEPARTMENT NOTES:

ADDRE
SS:
31681 & 31701 RIVERSIDE DRIVE
LAKE ELSINORE, CA 92530

1. CONSTRUCTION PERMITS FIRE
DEPARTMENT REVIEW:

SUBMITTAL OF CONSTRUCTION PLANS

TO THE OFFICE OF THE

FIRE MARSHAL FOR DEVELOPMENT, CONSTRUCTION,

INSTALLATION, AND OPERATIONAL USE PERMITTING WILL BE
REQUIRED. FINAL FIRE AND LIFE SAFETY CONDITIONS WILL BE

ADDRESSED WHEN THE OFFICE OF THE

FIRE MARSHAL
REVIEWS THESE PLANS. THESE CONDITIONS WILL BE BASED

ON OCCUPANCY, USE, CALIFORNIA BUILDING CODE (CBC), CALIFORNIA FIRE CODE, AND RELATED COS, WHICH ARE IN

EFFECT AT THE TIME OF BUILDING PLAN
SUBMITTAL.

BUILDING CODE:

PLUMBING CODE:

ELECTRICAL CODE:
2022 CALIFORNIA BUILDING CODE
2022 CALIFORNIA PLUMBING CODE
2022 CALIFORNIA ELECTRIC CODE
PERMIT NUMBER:

APN:
2023- PARCELS 1 AND 2 OF PARCEL MAP NO. 20208, 17

IN THE CITY OF LAKE
ELSINORE, COUNTY OF RIVERSIDE, STATE OF CALIFORNIA, AS PER PARCEL MAP RECORDED IN BOOK 125, PAGE 46, OF PARCEL MAPS, IN THE OFFICE OF THE COUNTY RECORDER OF SAID COUNTY.

MECHANICAL CODE: 2022 CALIFORNIA MECHANICAL CODE 2. ACCESSIBLE ROUTES OF TRAVEL USING ---- --- OR EQUIVALENT SYMBOL (CBC 11B-206.2.1, CBC 11B-206.2.2):
379-381-053, 379-381-054

RIVERSIDE
ENERGY CODE:

GREEN BUILDING:

FIRE CODE:
2022 CALIFORNIA ENERGY CODE
2022 CALIFORNIA GREEN BUILDING CODE
2022 CALIFORNIA FIRE CODE (2021 IFC)
COUN
TY: A. BETWEEN ALL BUILDING EXTERIOR GROUND-FLOOR EXITS AND THE PUBLIC WAY.

FIRE HAZARD:

LOT SIZE:

NON- VHFHSZ *THE PROJECT SHALL COMPLY WITH THE DEVELOPMENT STANDARDS

AS OUTLINED IN THE THE LEMC
B. BETWEEN ACCESSIBLE PARKING SPACES AND BUILDING OR FACILITY ENTRANCES.

FOR CONVEYANCING PURPOSES ONLY: APN 379-381-053 (AFFECTS PARCEL 1); 379-381-054 (AFFECTS PARCEL 2) EXISTING: 1.99 ACRES
C. (86,834 S.F.)
D.

E.

BETWEEN PASSENGER LOADING ZONES AND BUILDING OR FACILITY ENTRANCES. BETWEEN PUBLIC STREETS OR SIDEWALKS AND BUILDING OR FACILITY ENTRANCES. BETWEEN PUBLIC TRANSPORTATION STOPS AND BUILDING OR FACILITY ENTRANCES.

BUILDING AREAS:

BUILDING 1: 12,000 S.F.
(EXISTING) BUILDING 2: 13,435 S.F.

TOTAL (MODIFIED)
(1ST FLOOR): 9,681 S.F.

2. 3.

4. FIRE FLOW SHALL BE DETERMINED BY

THE BUILDING OF THE
SINGLE LARGEST SQUARE FOOTAGE.

THE MINIMUM FIRE
FLOW WILL BE 1500 GPM AT 20 PSI FOR A 2-HOUR DURATION, PER THE 2022 CALIFORNIA FIRE CODE.

ASSURANCE
THIS LEGAL DESCRIPTION DESCRIBES THE SAME NOTE: PROPERTY AS DESCRIBED THE TITLE REPORT NO. NCS-1133997-ONT1 OF FIRST AMERICAN TITLE INSURANCE COMPANY BEARING AN EFFECTIVE DATE OF JUNE 2, 2022.
(2ND FLOOR):
*1ST FLR PATIO (COMMON 3,754 S.F.

TENANT AREA): 833 S.F.
*2ND FLR DECK (COMMON
TENANT AREA): 833 S.F. PROPOSED TRASH ENCLOSURE: 287 S.F.

F. BETWEEN ACCESSIBLE BUILDINGS, FACILITIES, ELEMENTS, AND SPACES ON THE SAME SITE.

PRIOR TO ISSUANCE OF BUILDING PERMITS, THE APPLICANT/DEVELOPER SHALL PROVIDE THE OFFICE OF THE

FIRE MARSHAL WITH ANA APPROVED

SITE PLAN FOR FIRE
LANES AND SIGNAGE. (CFC 501.3)
BUILDING HEIGHT: MAX HEIGHT: 45'-0"
PROVIDED: ±25'-0"

3. ACCESSIBLE ROUTES SHALL COINCIDE WITH OR BE LOCATED IN THE SAME AREA AS GENERAL CIRCULATION PATHS. (CBC 11B-206.3).

CONSTRUCTIO
N TYPE:

EXISTING: V-B/NONSPRINKLERED
PROPOSED: V- B/SPRINKLERED

4. WHERE MORE THAN ONE ROUTE OF TRAVEL IS PROVIDED, ALL ROUTES SHALL BE ACCESSIBLE. (CBC 11B-206.2.1).

EACH PARCEL SHALL HAVE

INDEPENDENT ACCESS TO THE
CIRCULATING ROADWAY. SHARED ACCESS SHALL BE

DOCUMENTED, AND RECIPROCAL ACCESS AGREEMENTS OR
DEDICATED ACCESS SHALL BE ESTABLISHED.

OCCUPAN CYS:

SPECIFIC PLAN:

LAND USE:

B

5. MINIMUM 48-INCH-WIDE WALK AND SIDEWALKS. (CBC 11B-403.5.1, CBC 11B-406.6).

N/A
EXISTING: COMMERCIAL
/ RETAIL
EXISTING: C2 (GENERAL COMMERCIAL)

6. MAX RUNNING SLOPE OF EACH WALK AND SIDEWALK DOES NOT EXCEED 5% SLOPE UNLESS RAMP PROVIDED PER (CBC 11B-403.3).

ZON
E: SURROUNDIN G LAND

USE AND
ZONING:

NORTH: R1 (SINGLE

FAMILY RESIDENTIAL)
SOUTH: CMU
(COMMERCIAL MIXED USE)
EAST: C2 (GENERAL COMMERCIAL) WEST: C2 (GENERAL COMMERCIAL)

7. MAX 2.1% CROSS SLOPE OF EACH ACCESSIBLE ROUTE. (CBC 11B-503.3). 8. ACCESSIBLE ROUTE SURFACES OF STABLE, FIRM, AND SLIP-RESISTANT MATERIAL. (CBC 11B-302.1). FAR COVERAGE :

LOT COVERAGE
:
22,725 S.F. MODIFIED (26%) BUILDING 2
9,681 S.F. (1ST FLR) 3,754 S.F. (2ND FLR) 13,435 S.F. TOTAL

9. FOR WALKS WITH CONTINUOUS GRADIENTS, DIMENSION ON SITE ACCESSIBILITY PLAN MINIMUM 5-FOOT-LONG LEVEL RESTRING AREAS AT MAXIMUM 400-FOOT INTERVALS. (CBC 11B- 403.7).

BUILDING: 21,968
S.F. (26%)
LANDSCAPING: 6,717 S.F. (8%)
IMPERVIOUS: 58,149
S.F. (67%)
TOTAL: 86,834 S.F.
(100%)

10. FOR ABRUPT CHANGES IN LEVEL BETWEEN 1/4 INCH AND 1/2 INCH ON ACCESSIBLE ROUTES, DETAIL MAXIMUM 50% BEVELED SLOPE PER CBC FIGURE 11B-303.3. (CBC 11B-303.3).

PARKIN G:
*REFER TO PARKING STUDY
EXISTING: 138 STALLS
PROPOSED: 135 STALLS
(INCLUDING 6 H.C.) OWNER / APPLICANT
31681 RIVERSIDE DRIVE, LLC

RICKY LEIGH
28656 OLD TOWN

FRONT STREET
TEMECULA, CA 92590 PHONE: (951) 294- 1064
E-MAIL:
[email protected] om

11. FOR ABRUPT CHANGES IN LEVEL GREATER THAN 1/2 INCH ON ACCESSIBLE ROUTES, PROVIDE PEDESTRIAN 12. ANY GRATES OR SIMILAR OPENINGS RAMP PER (CBC 11B-303.4).

LOCATED ON ACCESSIBLE ROUTES AND DETAIL MAXIMUM 1/2-INCH SPACES PER CBC FIGURE 11B-302.3 WITH ANY ELONGATED OPENINGS PLACED PERPENDICULAR TO DOMINANT DIRECTION OF TRAVEL. (CBC 11B-302.3).

ARCHITECT / EXHIBIT PREPARER
EMPIRE DESIGN GROUP, INC. 511 N MAIN STREET
LAKE ELSINORE, CA 92530 PHONE: (951) 696-1490 CELL PHONE: (951) 809- 7601 E-MAIL: [email protected] CONTACT: GREGORY HANN, ARCHITECT PARCE
L 1
P. M. 20208
SEPARATE SUBMITTALS 1. UNIFORM SIGN PROGRAM PROJECT DESCRIPTION:

13. AT ANY ACCESSIBLE ROUTE WITH ADJACENT VERTICAL DROP EXCEEDING 4 INCHES, DETAIL MINIMUM 6- INCH-HIGH WARNING CURB. (CBC 11B-303.5).

1. THE PROJECT
INVOLVES (2) PARCELS. 14. AT ANY WALK OR SIDEWALK WITH ADJACENT VERTICAL DROP EXCEEDING 30 INCHES, DETAIL MINIMUM 42-INCH-HIGH GUARDRAIL WITH OPENINGS NOT ALLOWING PASSAGE OF 4-INCH-DIAMETER SPHERE. (CBC 1-13.1, CBC 1013.2).

2. BUILDINGS 1 AND 2 EXTERIOR FACADE
IMPROVEMENTS CONSIST OF; NEW STUCCO, PAINT COLORS, FINISHES, AWNINGS & CANOPIES, AND

2. BUILDING 1 INTERIOR EXTERIOR BUILDING LIGHTING.

IMPROVEMENTS CONSIST OF; A NEW
AUTOMATIC SPRINKLER SYSTEM.

15. AT ANY WALK ENTERING OR ADJOINING VEHICULAR WAYS WITHOUT CURB, RAILING, OR BARRIER SEPARATION, DETAIL CONTINUOUS DETECTABLE WARNING STRIP WITH 36-INCH (ABSOLUTE) DEPTH FOR ENTIRE LENGTH/WIDTH OF TRANSITION. (CBC 11B-247.1.2.5, CBC 11B-705.1.2.5).

3. BUILDING 2 INTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS CONSIST OF; RELOCATING THE EXTERIOR STAIRCASE TO THE INTERIOR, ADA WHEELCHAIR LIFT, MULTI-STALL COMMON AREA RESTROOMS ON THE 2ND FLOOR, COMMON AREA PATIO DECK ON BOTH

FLOORS, AND A NEW
AUTOMATIC SPRINKLER SYSTEM.

PARCE L 2
P. M. 20208

16. DETECTABLE WARNINGS REQUIRED SHALL COMPLY WITH THE FOLLOWING (CBC 11B-705): A. INCLUDING RAISED, TRUNCATED DOMES PER CBC FIGURE 11B-705.1:

4. SITE IMPROVEMENTS CONSIST OF; A PATH OF TRAVEL TO PUBLIC RIGHT OF WAY AND THROUGHOUT THE EXISTING CENTER, A PROPOSED

TRASH ENCLOSURE, PARKING LOT CONFIGURATION, ADA PARKING, AC PAVING AND STRIPING, CONCRETE CURBS AND LANDSCAPE

STEP-OUTS, NEW LANDSCAPING, NE SITE

LIGHTING, AND MODIFIED
DRIVEWAY IMPROVEMENTS.
· MINIMUM 0.9-INCH AND MAXIMUM

0.92-INCH BASE DIAMETER
· MINIMUM 0.45-INCH AND MAXIMUM 0.47-INCH TOP DIAMETER

0.20-INCH
· HEIGHT MINIMUM 2.3-INCH AND MAXIMUM 2.4-
INCH CENTER-TO-CENTER SPACING AND MINIMUM 0.65-INCH EXCEPTION: MINIMUM 1.6-INCH AND BASE-TO-BASE SPACING MAXIMUM 2.4-INCH CENTER-TO-CENTER SPACING ACCEPTABLE FOR DOMES IN RADIAL PATTERN.

5. LOT LINE ADJUSTMENT REQUIRED FOR

THE PROPERTY BOUNDARY TO
THE SOUTHWEST AS IT CURRENTLY SHEET OVERLAPS THE BUILDING.

INDEX: 17. CURB RAMPS AND FLARED SIDES SHALL NOT PROJECT INTO VEHICULAR TRAFFIC LANES, PARKING STALLS, OR PARKING ACCESS AISLES. (CBC 11B-406.5.1).

AS 1.0 AS 1.1 AS 1.2 A1.0 A 2.0 B 1.0ARCHITECTURAL

SITE PLAN

FUTURE PHASE

SITE PLAN

EXISTING SITE PLAN

18. SURFACES OF CURB RAMPS AND FLARED SIDES SHALL BE STABLE, FIRM AND SLIP-RESISTANT. (CBC 11B-302.1, CBC 11B-405.4, CBC 11B-406.5.4).

BUILDING 1 - PROPOSED

FLOOR PLAN
BUILDING 1 - PROPOSED EXTERIOR ELEVATIONS BUILDING 2 - PROPOSED 1ST

FLOOR PLAN
BUILDING 2 - PROPOSED 2ND

FLOOR PLAN
BUILDING 2 - PROPOSED EXTERIOR ELEVATIONS BUILDING 1 - EXISTING FLOOR PLAN BUILDING 2 - EXISTING 1ST

FLOOR PLAN
BUILDING 2 - EXISTING 2ND

FLOOR PLAN

EXISTING BUILDING ELEVATIONS

19. PERPENDICULAR CURB RAMPS PER THE FOLLOWING (CBC 11B-406.2, CBC 11B-406.2.2):

B 1.1 B 2.0

EXISTI NG
BUILDI NG 1
12,000 S.F.

A.

B. C.

RAMP RUN WITH MAXIMUM 8.3% RUNNING SLOPE. RAMP RUN WITH MAXIMUM 2.1% CROSS SLOPE. WHERE PROVIDED, FLARED SIDES WITH MAXIMUM 10% SLOPE PER CBC FIGURE 11B-406.2.2.AB 1.0 AB 1.1 AB 1.2 AB 2.0 MB 1.0
SN 1.0

MATERIALS BOARD

SIGNAGE PLAN (UNDER
SEPARATE SUBMITTAL) 20. LANDINGS SHALL BE PROVIDED AT THE TOP OF CURB RAMPS AND BLENDED TRANSITIONS (SHOW ON PLANS). THE LANDING CLEAR LENGTH SHALL BE 48 INCHES (1219 MM) MINIMUM. THE LANDING CLEAR WIDTH SHALL BE AT LEAST AS WIDE AS THE CURB RAMP, EXCLUDING ANY FLARED SIDES, OR THE BLENDED TRANSITION LEADING TO THE LANDING. THE SLOPE OF THE LANDING IN ALL DIRECTIONS SHALL BE 1:48 MAXIMUM. (CBC 11B-406.5.3).

PHOTOME
TRIC SHEET 1

SITE LIGHTING PHOTOMETRIC PLAN
LANDSC
APE
SHEET 1CONCEPTUAL

LANDSCAPE PLAN
BN
GH

BN VICINITY MAP

ARCHITECTUR

ALSITE PLAN

NOT TO SCALE

SIT E AS

1.0 ARCHITECTURAL SITE PLAN
SITE
ADDRE
SS: DATA 31681 & 31701 RIVERSIDE DRIVE
LAKE ELSINORE, CA APN 92530 :
379-381-053, 379-381-054 PARKIN G:
*REFER TO PARKING STUDY EXISTING: 138 STALLS
PROPOSED: 135 STALLS
(INCLUDING 4 H.C.)
FUTURE PHASE: 123 STALLS
(INCLUDING 4 H.C.) *IF AND WHEN RIVERSIDE DRIVE IS EXPANDED TO

FULL-WIDTH, THE LANDLORD WILL BE REQUIRED TO REDUCE THE MAXIMUM NUMBER OF DINE-IN RESTAURANTS TO THREE (3), INSTEAD OF THE CURRENT PROPOSED FOUR (4). (THIS IS DUE TO THE REDUCED PARKING DURING
THE FUTURE PHASE.)
MODIFIED BUILDING 2
9,681 S.F. (1ST FLR) 3,754 S.F. (2ND FLR) 13,435 S.F. TOTAL PARCE
L 1
P. M. 20208

QUAIL DRIVE
PARCE L 2
P. M. 20208

EXISTI NG
BUILDI NG 1
11,959 S.F.

BN
GH

BN VICINITY MAP

NOT TO SCALE

FUTURE PHASE SITE PLAN SIT E AS

1.1 FUTURE PHASE SITE PLAN
S 53°05'27" E
320.02'
EXISTING BUILDING 2 9,931 S.F. (1ST FLR) 3,906 S.F. (2ND FLR) 13,837 S.F. TOTAL PARCE
L 1
P. M. 20208
BASIS OF BEARINGS' S 53°05'27" E 814.55'
QUAIL DRIVE PARCE L 2
P. M. 20208

EXISTI NG
BUILDI NG 1
11,959 S.F.

S 53°05'27" E
346.54' BN
GH
BN

EXI STI NG

SITE PLAN
AS

1.2 EXISTING SITE PLAN

LEGE ND

BUILDING DATA

UTILIT Y
ROO M
(P)
FIR
RISE E
R

SUITE E/FRETAI
L
3,351
S.F.

SUITE C/D
RESTAURANT 4,414 S.F. CUSTOMER AREA = 2,118 S.F. (48%)

SUITE A
RETAI
L
2,987 S.F.

SUITE B
RETAI
L
1,207 S.F.

BN
GH
BN
BUILDING 1 - PROPOSED
FLOOR PLAN BUILDING 1 - PROPOSED FLOOR PLAN A

1.0 PROPOSED EAST ELEVATION

PROPOSED NORTH ELEVATION
BN

GH PROPOSED BN
PERSPECTIVE 1
PROPOSED PERSPECTIVE 2
BUILDING 1 - PROPOSED

EXTERI OR ELEVATI ONS
A

2.0 LEGE ND

BUILDING DATA

SUITE O
RESTAURANT 1,810 S.F. CUSTOMER AREA 655 S.F. (36%)
2ND
FLOOR
LOBB Y

SUITE M
/ NOFFIC
E
2,665
PROPOSED S.F.

PATIO
(COMMON

TENANT AREA)

SUITE G / H
RESTAURANT 1,925 S.F. CUSTOMER AREA 770 S.F. (40%)

SUITE I / JRETAI
L
1,763 S.F.

SUITE K
RETAI
L
743 S.F.

SUITE
L
RETAI
L
730 S.F.
833 S.F.
(P)
FIRE
RISE R
BN
GH
BN
BUILDING 2 - PROPOSED
1ST FLOOR PLAN BUILDING 2 - PROPOSED 1ST FLOOR PLAN
B

1.0 LEGE ND

BUILDING DATA
SUITE P RESTAURANT 1,917 S.F. CUSTOMER AREA 770 S.F. (40%) 2ND
FLOOR
LOBB Y

SUITE Q
OFFIC
E
1,294 S.F.

PROPOSED DECK
(COMMON
TENANT AREA) 833 S.F.

WOME NSR.R.MEN SR.R.

BN
GH
BN
BUILDING 2 - PROPOSED
2ND FLOOR PLAN BUILDING 2 - PROPOSED 2ND FLOOR PLAN
B

1.1 PROPOSED EAST ELEVATION

PROPOSED SOUTH ELEVATION

PROPOSED WEST ELEVATION
BN
GH
BN
BUILDING 2 - PROPOSED

EXTERI OR ELEVATI ONS
B

2.0 PROPOSED PERSPECTIVE 1PROPOSED PERSPECTIVE 2

LEGE ND

UTILIT Y
ROO M

SUITE E/FRETAI
L
3,351
S.F.

SUITE C/D

RESTAUR ANT
4,414 S.F.

SUITE A

CHUR CH
2,987 S.F.

SUITE B
RETAI
L
1,207 S.F.

BN
GH
BN
BUILDING 1 - EXISTING
FLOOR PLAN BUILDING 1 - EXISTING FLOOR PLAN
AB

1.0 LEGE ND

SUITE O

RESTAUR ANT
1,810
S.F.

SUITE M
/ NOFFIC
E
2,665
S.F.

SUITE G /HCHUR CH
1,925 S.F.

SUITE I / JRETAI
L
1,763 S.F.

SUITE K
RETAI
L
743 S.F.

SUITE
L
RETAI
L
730 S.F.

BN
GH
BN
BUILDING 2 - EXISTING
1ST FLOOR BUILDING 2 - EXISTING PLAN
1ST FLOOR PLAN
AB

1.1 LEGE ND

SUITE P
OFFIC ES 3,754 S.F.

BN
GH
BN
BUILDING 2 - EXISTING
2ND FLOOR BUILDING 2 - EXISTING PLAN
2ND FLOOR PLAN
AB

1.2 EXISTING BUILDING 1 EAST ELEVATION
EXISTING BUILDING 1 SOUTH ELEVATION
EXISTING BUILDING 2 EAST ELEVATION
BN
GH
BN

EXISTING BUILDING
ELEVATIONS EXISTING BUILDING 2 NORTH ELEVATION
AB

2.0 TYPICAL FRONT ELEVATION
EXTERIOR FINISHES:

SHADING MATERIALS: WINDO WS LIGH TS
COLOR LEGEND:

RAILI NG:

BN
GH
BN

MATERI ALS BOARD
MB

1.0 SIGNAGE SUMMARY
A
B
RETAIL SIGNAGE CALCULATION: PER 17.196.180
BUILDING 1 SIGNAGE FRONTAGE: 180 LINEAR FEET
BUILDING 2 SIGNAGE FRONTAGE: 257 LINEAR FEET
TOTAL BUILDING SIGNAGE FRONTAGE: 437 LINEAR FEET
OPTIO
SIGNAGE ALLOWED: 1 S.F. PER 1 LINEAR FOOT OF N A

BUILDING SIGNAGE FRONTAGE
TOTAL BUILDING SIGNAGE ALLOWED = 437 S.F.

TOTAL BUILDING SIGNAGE PROVIDED = 420 S.F.

MODIFIED BUILDING 2
9,681 S.F. (1ST FLR) 3,754 S.F. (2ND FLR) 13,435 S.F. TOTAL OPTIO
N B

ILLUMINATED STOREFRONT SIGN (PROPOSED)
A
AIL
DRIVE
A B

EXISTI NG
BUILDI NG 1
12,000 S.F.

ILLUMINATED DOUBLEFACE MONUMENT SIGN (EXISTING)
BN
GH
BN

SIGNAGE PLAN
(UNDER SEPARATE SUBM
TTAL)
SN

1.0 SIGNAGE PLAN

K2 Traffic Engineering, Inc.
1442 Irvine Blvd, Suite 235, Tustin, CA 92780 T.714-832-2116 F.949-266-5875 Email: [email protected] May 23, 2024
Gregory S. Hann, Architect
Empire Design Group, Inc.
511 N. Main Street
Lake Elsinore, CA 92530
Re: Parking Analysis- Lake Elsinore Plaza Renovation
31701 & 31681 Riverside Drive, Lake Elsinore
Dear Gregory,
Per your request, we have prepared this parking analysis and for the renovation project of Lake Elsinore Plaza. This letter presents out methodologies and findings.

PROJECT INFORMATION
Lake Elsinore Plaza is an existing commercial center located at 31701 & 31681 Riverside Drive in the City of Lake Elsinore. The site consists of two existing commercial buildings: 11,959 sq. ft. in Building One and 13,435 sq. ft. in Building Two. Upon project completion, the site will provide a total of 135 spaces, including six (6) accessible spaces. The proposed site plan is shown in Exhibit 1.

This renovation and tenant improvement project includes aesthetics improvements and functionality adjustments for both buildings. The proposed floor plan for Building One is shown in Exhibit 2. The proposed floor plan of Building Two for the ground and second floors are shown in Exhibits 3 and 4, respectively.

According to the City of Lake Elsinore, the future widening of Riverside Drive may result in a loss of 13 parking spaces due to a required dedication of 10-foot Rightof-Way along Riverside Drive to achieve the ultimate half-street width of 60 feet.

Such future widening is not a part of this development and does not concern this parking analysis. Nonetheless, the future dedication of Right-of-Way is illustrated in Exhibit 5.

APPROVED
NRL 6/4/24
Parking Analysis for Lake Elsinore Plaza May 23, 2024
31701 & 31681 Riverside Drive, Lake Elsinore Page 2 of 4 K2 Traffic Engineering, Inc.
1442 Irvine Blvd, Suite 210, Tustin, CA 92780 T.714-832-2116 F.949-266-5875 Email: [email protected]

EXISTING AND FUTURE TENANTS
Rhema Word Ministries in Suite A and Encouragement Church in Suites G/H will move out and not renew their leases. All other existing tenants are expected to remain in place. The complete list of existing tenants and vacant units is shown in Exhibit 6.

Upon project completion, Suite A will be repurposed for retail use, and Suite G/H will be repurposed for restaurant use. Suite P is currently a vacant office on the second floor of Building Two will be split into two units for restaurant use (1,917 sq. ft. in Suite P) and office use (1,295 sq. ft. in Suite Q). The list of future tenants and proposed uses can be found in Exhibit 7.

PARKING CALCULATION
According to Lake Elsinore Municipal Code, the parking requirement for commercial uses including office and retail is one parking space for 250 square feet of gross floor area. The parking requirement for restaurant and other eating, drinking, and food establishments is one space for each 45 square feet of customer area, plus one space for each 200 square feet of non-customer area. Parking calculation of existing and future tenants can be found in Exhibits 6 and 7, respectively.

TIME-OF-DAY FACTOR
The study applied shared parking methodology with time-of-day factors derived from the published data of “Shared Parking, Third Edition” by Urban Land Institute (ULI). Time-of-day factors are applied future tenants and vacant units to determine the hourly parking demands for weekday and weekend, as shown in Exhibit 8. The projected peak parking utilization of future tenants and vacant units is 61 spaces on weekday at 12:00 PM and 58 spaces on weekends at 2:00 PM.

Parking Analysis for Lake Elsinore Plaza May 23, 2024
31701 & 31681 Riverside Drive, Lake Elsinore Page 3 of 4 K2 Traffic Engineering, Inc.
1442 Irvine Blvd, Suite 210, Tustin, CA 92780 T.714-832-2116 F.949-266-5875 Email: [email protected]

PARKING SURVEY
In order to observe actual parking usage by existing tenants, the study conducted field observations at the subject commercial center on Thursday, December 12, 2023 and Saturday, December 14, 2023. Parked vehicles were counted hourly during the business hours from 11 AM to 7 PM. It is noted that Encouragement Church (Suite G/H) and Rhema Word Ministries (Suite A) are not open at the time of survey.

Based on our observations, parking usage in the weekends is apparently higher than the typical weekday. Peak parking took place on weekdays at 7 PM with 32 spaces occupied, and Saturday at 6 PM with 75 spaces occupied among the capacity of 135 spaces. The peak parking usage was equivalent to 56% of the parking capacity.

Complete survey can be found in Appendix A.

EMPIRICAL PARKING DEMAND
The empirical parking demands of existing and future tenants, including vacant units, for weekday and weekend are illustrated in Exhibits 9 & 10, respectively.

The empirical peak parking demand at the subject plaza is anticipated to be 83 spaces on weekday at 7:00 PM, and 132 spaces on Saturday at 6:00 PM. As a worst case scenario, the project site is anticipated to have an empirical parking surplus of three (3) spaces as shown in Table 1.

Table 1. Empirical Parking Demand
Peak Parking Usage
Parking
Demand
Parking
Percentage Note
Existing Tenants 75 56% Peak parking at 6 PM Saturday
Additional Demand 57 42%
Restaurant, Retail, and Office Uses by
future tenants and vacant units
Overall Empirical Demand 132 98%
Parking Capacity 135 100%
Parking Surplus + 3

Parking Analysis for Lake Elsinore Plaza May 23, 2024
31701 & 31681 Riverside Drive, Lake Elsinore Page 4 of 4 K2 Traffic Engineering, Inc.
1442 Irvine Blvd, Suite 210, Tustin, CA 92780 T.714-832-2116 F.949-266-5875 Email: [email protected]

PARKING SUFFICIENCY
Upon project completion, the site will provide a total of 135 parking spaces, including six (6) ADA accessible spaces, sufficient to accommodate the empirical parking demand of all uses with a parking surplus of three spaces. The project is not expected to result in parking overflow onto public streets.

Regards,
K2 Traffic Engineering, Inc.

Jende Kay Hsu, P.E., T.E.

California License # TR2285
(;,67,1*
%8,/',1*

6)
(;,67,1*%8,/',1*

6)
67)/5

6)
1')/5

6)727$/
3$5&(/
30
3$5&(/
30
48$,/'5,9(
5,9(56,'('5,9( 
:,'(38%/,&52$'
/&

:,'(38%/,&52$'
/&
48$,/'5,9(
$5&+,7(&785$/
6,7(3/$1
$6 $5&+,7(&785$/6,7(3/$1
5,9(56,'('5,9(//&
5,&.</(,*+
2/'72:1)5217675((7
7(0(&8/$&$


3+21(




(0$,/
UOHLJK#IOXLGDQGIDUHFRP
&2'(,1)250$7,21 6,7('$7$
$''5(66
 5,9(56,'('5,9(
$5&+,7(&7(;+,%,735(3$5(5
(03,5('(6,*1*5283,1&
10$,1675((7
/$.((/6,125(&$
3+21(






&(//3+21(





(0$,/
JKDQQ#HPSLUHJUEL]
&217$&7
*5(*25<+$11$5&+,7(&7
9,&,1,7<0$3
/$.((/6,125(&$

3(50,7180%(5

$31


&2817<
 5,9(56,'(
2:1(5$33/,&$17352-(&7'(6&5,37,21

 7+(352-(&7,192/9(6

3$5&(/6
 (;7(5,25),1,6+$1'3$,177(1$17,03529(0(1772%27+ %8,/',1*6$1'
 %8,/',1*02',),&$7,216723529,'($67)/2253$7,2$1' 1')/225'(&.
 352326('3$7+2)75$9(/7238%/,&5,*+72):$<$1'
7+528*+2877+((;,67,1*&(17(5
(;,67,1*


$&5(6
6)
/276,=(

&216758&7,217<3(
2&&83$1&<6
%63(&,),&3/$1
1$=21(
 (;,67,1*
&
*(1(5$/&200(5&,$/

(;,67,1*%8,/',1*

6) %8,/',1*$5($6
0$;+(,*+7

 %8,/',1*+(,*+7

6855281',1*/$1' 1257+
5
6,1*/()$0,/<5(6,'(17,$/

6287+
&08
&200(5&,$/0,;('86(
($67
&
*(1(5$/&200(5&,$/
:(67
&
*(1(5$/&200(5&,$/

/$1'86(
 (;,67,1*
&200(5&,$/5(7$,/86($1'=21,1*

(;,67,1*75$6+(1&/2685(
6)
),5(+$=$5'
1219+)+6=/27&29(5$*(
%8,/',1*
6)


/$1'6&$3,1*
6)


,03(59,286
6)

727$/
6)


3$5.,1*

6+((7,1'(;

$6 $5&+,7(&785$/6,7(3/$1$  %8,/',1*)/2253/$1$ %8,/',1*(;7(5,25(/(9$7,216 % %8,/',1*),567)/2253/$1% %8,/',1*6(&21')/2253/$1% %8,/',1*(;7(5,25(/(9$7,216 $%6 (;,67,1*6,7(3/$1$% (;,67,1*%8,/',1*)/2253/$1$% (;,67,1*%8,/',1*),567)/2253/$1$% (;,67,1*%8,/',1*6(&21')/2253/$1$% (;,67,1*%8,/',1*(/(9$7,216 0% 0$7(5,$/6%2$5'
61 6,*1$*(3/$1
3+2720(75,&
6+((7 6,7(/,*+7,1*3+2720(75,&3/$1
/$1'6&$3(
6+((7 &21&(378$//$1'6&$3(3/$1

02',),('
67)/225


6)
/(*$/'(6&5,37,21
7+(/$1'5()(55('72+(5(,1%(/2:,66,78$7(',17+(&,7<2)/$.( (/6,125(&2817<2)5,9(56,'(67$7(2)&$/,)251,$$1',6'(6&5,%(' $6)2//2:6

3$5&(/6$1'2)3$5&(/0$312,17+(&,7<2)/$.((/6,125(&2817<2)5,9(56,'(67$7(2)&$/,)251,$$63(53$5&(/ 0$35(&25'(',1%22.3$*(2)3$5&(/0$36,17+(2)),&(2)7+(&2817<5(&25'(52)6$,'&2817< )25&219(<$1&,1*385326(621/<
$31

$))(&763$5&(/




$))(&763$5&(/

$6685$1&(127(

7+,6/(*$/'(6&5,37,21'(6&5,%(67+(6$0(3523(57<$6'(6&5,%('7+(7,7/(5(3257121&6

2172)),567$0(5,&$17,7/(,1685$1&(
&203$1<%($5,1*$1())(&7,9('$7(2)-81(
352326('3$7,2
67)/225

6)
02',),('
1')/225

6)

352326(''(&.
1')/225

6)3529,'('
“
6)

)$5&29(5$*(

$//&216758&7,2172&203/<:,7+

%8,/',1*&2'(
&$/,)251,$%8,/',1*&2'(
3/80%,1*&2'(
&$/,)251,$3/80%,1*&2'((/(&75,&$/&2'(
&$/,)251,$(/(&75,&&2'(
0(&+$1,&$/&2'(
&$/,)251,$0(&+$1,&$/&2'(
(1(5*<&2'(
&$/,)251,$(1(5*<&2'(
*5((1%8,/',1*
&$/,)251,$*5((1%8,/',1*&2'(
),5(&2'(
&$/,)251,$),5(&2'(
,)&

7+(352-(&76+$//&203/<:,7+7+('(9(/230(1767$1'$5'6 $6287/,1(',17+(7+(/(0&
$&&(66,%,/,7<*(1(5$/127(6

 $&&(66,%,/,7<3/$1',67,1*8,6+(6%(7:((1$&&(66,%/($1' ,1$&&(66,%/((/(0(176$1'1(:$1'(;,67,1*(/(0(176
&%&
%

 $&&(66,%/(5287(62)75$9(/86,1*25(48,9$/(176<0%2/

&%&%&%&%

$ %(7:((1$//%8,/',1*(;7(5,25*5281')/225(;,76$1'7+( 38%/,&:$<
% %(7:((1$&&(66,%/(3$5.,1*63$&(6$1'%8,/',1*25
)$&,/,7<(175$1&(6
& %(7:((13$66(1*(5/2$',1*=21(6$1'%8,/',1*25
)$&,/,7<(175$1&(6
' %(7:((138%/,&675((76256,'(:$/.6$1'%8,/',1*25
)$&,/,7<(175$1&(6
( %(7:((138%/,&75$163257$7,2167236$1'%8,/',1*25
)$&,/,7<(175$1&(6
) %(7:((1$&&(66,%/(%8,/',1*6)$&,/,7,(6(/(0(176$1' 63$&(6217+(6$0(6,7(
 $&&(66,%/(5287(66+$//&2,1&,'(:,7+25%(/2&$7(',17+( 6$0($5($$6*(1(5$/&,5&8/$7,213$7+6
&%&%

 :+(5(025(7+$121(5287(2)75$9(/,63529,'('$//5287(6 6+$//%($&&(66,%/(
&%&%

 0,1,080,1&+:,'(:$/.$1'6,'(:$/.6
&%&%&%&
%

 0$;5811,1*6/23(2)($&+:$/.$1'6,'(:$/.'2(6127 (;&(('6/23(81/(665$033529,'('3(5
&%&%

 0$;&52666/23(2)($&+$&&(66,%/(5287(
&%&%

 $&&(66,%/(5287(685)$&(62)67$%/(),50$1'6/,35(6,67$17 0$7(5,$/
&%&%


 )25:$/.6:,7+&217,18286*5$',(176',0(16,21216,7( $&&(66,%,/,7<3/$10,1,080)227/21*/(9(/5(675,1*$5($6$7 0$;,080)227,17(59$/6
&%&%

 )25$%5837&+$1*(6,1/(9(/%(7:((1,1&+$1',1&+21 $&&(66,%/(5287(6'(7$,/0$;,080%(9(/('6/23(3(5&%& ),*85(%
&%&%

 )25$%5837&+$1*(6,1/(9(/*5($7(57+$1,1&+21 $&&(66,%/(5287(63529,'(3('(675,$15$033(5
&%&%

 $1<*5$7(6256,0,/$523(1,1*6/2&$7('21$&&(66,%/(5287(6 $1''(7$,/0$;,080,1&+63$&(63(5&%&),*85(% :,7+$1<(/21*$7('23(1,1*63/$&('3(53(1',&8/$572
'20,1$17',5(&7,212)75$9(/
&%&%

 $7$1<$&&(66,%/(5287(:,7+$'-$&(179(57,&$/'523 (;&((',1*,1&+(6'(7$,/0,1,080,1&++,*+:$51,1*&85%

&%&%

 $7$1<:$/.256,'(:$/.:,7+$'-$&(179(57,&$/'523 (;&((',1*,1&+(6'(7$,/0,1,080,1&++,*+*8$5'5$,/ :,7+23(1,1*6127$//2:,1*3$66$*(2),1&+',$0(7(5
63+(5(
&%&&%&

 $7$1<:$/.(17(5,1*25$'-2,1,1*9(+,&8/$5:$<6:,7+287 &85%5$,/,1*25%$55,(56(3$5$7,21'(7$,/&217,18286 '(7(&7$%/(:$51,1*675,3:,7+,1&+
$%62/87(
'(37+)25(17,5(/(1*7+:,'7+2)75$16,7,21
&%&%&%&
%

 '(7(&7$%/(:$51,1*65(48,5('6+$//&203/<:,7+7+(
)2//2:,1*
&%&%

$ ,1&/8',1*5$,6('7581&$7(''20(63(5&%&),*85(
%

x 0,1,080
,1&+$1'0$;,080
,1&+%$6(',$0(7(5x 0,1,080,1&+$1'0$;,080,1&+723',$0(7(5x ,1&++(,*+7x 0,1,080,1&+$1'0$;,080,1&+&(17(572&(17(5 63$&,1*$1'0,1,080,1&+%$6(72%$6(63$&,1*
(;&(37,21
0,1,080,1&+$1'0$;,080,1&+
&(17(572&(17(563$&,1*$&&(37$%/()25'20(6,15$',$/ 3$77(51
 &85%5$036$1')/$5('6,'(66+$//127352-(&7,1729(+,&8/$5 75$)),&/$1(63$5.,1*67$//6253$5.,1*$&&(66$,6/(6 &%&
%

 685)$&(62)&85%5$036$1')/$5('6,'(66+$//%(67$%/(),50 $1'6/,35(6,67$17
&%&%&%&%&%&%


 3(53(1',&8/$5&85%5$0363(57+()2//2:,1*
&%&%
&%&%

$ 5$03581:,7+0$;,0805811,1*6/23(
% 5$03581:,7+0$;,080&52666/23(
& :+(5(3529,'(')/$5('6,'(6:,7+0$;,0806/23(3(5 &%&),*85(%
 /$1',1*66+$//%(3529,'('$77+(7232)&85%5$036$1' %/(1'('75$16,7,216
6+2:213/$16
7+(/$1',1*&/($5/(1*7+
6+$//%(,1&+(6

00
0,1,0807+(/$1',1*&/($5:,'7+6+$//%($7/($67$6:,'($67+(&85%5$03(;&/8',1*$1< )/$5('6,'(6257+(%/(1'('75$16,7,21/($',1*727+(/$1',1* 7+(6/23(2)7+(/$1',1*,1$//',5(&7,2166+$//%(

0$;,080
&%&%

02',),('%8,/',1*
6)
%1
*+
%1
/$.((/6,125(&$

/$.((/6,125(3/$=$
 5,9(56,'('5
0$;,080
&%& % 




'()(55('68%0,77$/6
7+()2//2:,1*,7(06$672%(68%0,77('$6'()(55('68%0,77$/6$// '()(55('68%0,77$/60867%(68%0,77('$33529('$1'+$9(3(50,76 ,668('35,2572&200(1&,1*:25.:25.&200(1&('35,2572 3(50,7,668$1&(:,//%(&+$5*(''28%/(3(50,7)((6),1(6$1'3(1$/7,(6$1'$//:25.&29(5('83)520$335235,$7(,163(&7,216 :,//%(5(48,5('72%(81&29(5('3(57+(&$/,)251,$),5(&2'( '())(5('68%0,77$/,7(06$5($6)2//2:6

x 6,*1$*('(021(:3/$16
127726&$/(
6,7(
(;,67,1*
9%121635,1./(5('352326('
9%635,1./(5('



5()(5723$5.,1*678'<
EXHIBIT 1. PROPOSED SITE PLAN
68,7($
5(7$,/

6)
6
68,7(%
5(7$,/
6)
6
68,7(&'
5(67$85$17
6)
&86720(5$5($ 6)


66
68,7(()
5(7$,/
6)
6
87,/,7<
5220
),5(
5,6(5
352326('%8,/',1*
)/2253/$1
$
%1
*+
%1
/$.((/6,125(&$

/$.((/6,125(3/$=$
 5,9(56,'('5
352326('67)/2253/$1
/(*(1'6,7('$7$

EXHIBIT 2. FLOOR PLAN - BUILDING ONE

SUITE G / H

RESTAURANT
1,925 S.F.

CUSTOMER AREA 770 S.F. (40%)
23 S

SUITE I/ J
RETAIL
1,470 S.F.
7 S

SUITE K
RETAIL
743 S.F.
3 S

SUITE LRETAIL
730 S.F.
3 S

SUITE M / N
RETAIL
2,665 S.F.
11 S

SUITE O

RESTAURANT
1,810 S.F.

CUSTOMER AREA 655 S.F. (36%)
15 S + 4 S
TENANT
COMMON
SPACE
(833 S.F.)
FIRE
RISER

LOBBY AREA
(338 S.F.)
PROPOSED BUILDING 2

FIRST FLOOR PLAN
B 1.0
BN
GH
BN
LAKE ELSINORE, CA 92530

LAKE ELSINORE PLAZA
31701 & 31681 RIVERSIDE DR.

PROPOSED 1ST FLOOR PLAN
LEGEND
1 2
3/29/2024 11:40:20 AM, design
EXHIBIT 3. FLOOR PLAN- BUILDING TWO, 1ST FLOOR

SUITE P

RESTAURANT
1,917 S.F.

CUSTOMER AREA 770 S.F. (40%)

SUITE Q
OFFICE
1,294 S.F.
(COMMON

TENANT AREA)
543 S.F.

PROPOSED DECK
(COMMON TENANT
AREA)
833 S.F.

MENS
R.R.

WOMENS
R.R.
2ND
FLOOR
LOBBY
BUILDING 2 - PROPOSED
2ND FLOOR PLAN
B 1.1
BN
GH
BN
LAKE ELSINORE, CA 92530

LAKE ELSINORE PLAZA
31701 & 31681 RIVERSIDE DR.

BUILDING 2 - PROPOSED 2ND FLOOR PLAN

LEGENDBUILDING DATA
EXHIBIT 4. FLOOR PLAN- BUILDING TWO, 2ND FLOOR
RETAIL

SUITE A
2,987 S.F.
12 S
RETAIL

SUITE B
1,207 S.F.
5 S

SUITE C/D

RESTAURANT
4,414 S.F.

CUSTOMER AREA = 2,118 S.F. (48%)
47 S + 8 S

SUITE E/F
RETAIL
3,351 S.F.
14 S
ROOM

UTILITY
FIRE
RISER

EXISTING
BUILDING 1
11,595 S.F.

SUITE G / H

RESTAURANT
1,925 S.F.

CUSTOMER AREA 770 S.F. (40%)
23 S

SUITE I/ J
RETAIL
1,470 S.F.
7 S
743 S.F.

RETAIL

SUITE K
3 S
730 S.F.

RETAILSUITE L
3 S

SUITE M / N
RETAIL
2,665 S.F.
11 S

SUITE O

RESTAURANT
1,810 S.F.

CUSTOMER AREA 655 S.F. (36%)
15 S + 4 S
TENANT
COMMON
SPACE
(833 S.F.)
FIRE
RISER

LOBBY AREA
(338 S.F.)
EXISTING BUILDING 2
9,681 S.F. (1ST FLR)
3,754 S.F. (2ND FLR)
13,435 S.F. TOTAL
PARCEL 1
P.M. 20208
PARCEL 2
P.M. 20208

QUAIL DRIVE
RIVERSIDE DRIVE 100' WIDE PUBLIC ROAD
LC
60' WIDE PUBLIC ROAD
LC

QUAIL DRIVE

FUTURE PHASE

SITE PLAN
AS 1.1 FUTURE PHASE SITE PLAN

SITE DATA
PARKING:

VICINITY MAP
BN
GH
BN
LAKE ELSINORE, CA 92530

LAKE ELSINORE PLAZA
31701 & 31681 RIVERSIDE DR.

NOT TO SCALE
SITE
EXISTING: 138 STALLSPROPOSED: 135 STALLS (INCLUDING 4 H.C.)FUTURE PHASE: 123 STALLS (INCLUDING 4 H.C.) 2 ADDRESS: 31681 & 31701 RIVERSIDE DRIVE*IF AND WHEN RIVERSIDE DRIVE IS EXPANDED TO FULL-WIDTH, THE LANDLORDWILL BE REQUIRED TO REDUCE THE MAXIMUM NUMBER OF DINE-INRESTAURANTS TO THREE (3), INSTEAD OF THE CURRENT PROPOSED FOUR (4).(THIS IS DUE TO THE REDUCED PARKING DURING THE FUTURE PHASE.) LAKE ELSINORE, CA 92530
APN: 379-381-053, 379-381-054
EXHIBIT 5. FUTURE SITE PLAN (AFTER LAND DEDICATION)
Exhibit 6. List of Existing Tenants
Prepared 5/23/2024
Suite Tenant Name Use
GFA
(Sq. Ft.) Business Hours Parking Ratio
Req'd
Parking

BUILDING ONE
A Rhema World Ministries Church 2,987 Worship Services on Sunday See Note 2 46.9 B AP Beauty Supplies Retail 1,207 9 am - 6 pm, daily. Closed Tuesday 1 per 250 sf 4.8 C/D 74 Cantina Mexican Cuisine Restaurant 4,414 M-F 10am- 11pm; Sat, Sun: 10am- 11:30pm See Note 1 52.5 E/F All-Pro Engine & Mower Supply Retail 3,351 M-F 7:30am- 5pm 1 per 250 sf 13.4 Building One Total 11,959 Sub-Total 117.6

BUILDING TWO
G/H Encouragement Church Church 1,925 Worship Services on Sunday See Note 2 30.3 I/J Aero Delivery, Inc. Retail 1,763 24/7 1 per 250 sf 7.1 K Dreamcatchers Photography Retail 743 M-W 9am - 5:30pm, Sat, Sun 9am-2pm 1 per 250 sf 3.0 L Vacant Retail 730 N/A 1 per 250 sf 2.9
M/N VIP Best Insurance Agency Office 2,665 M-F, 10:30 am - 5:30 pm 1 per 250 sf 10.7 O Pizza Bowl Restaurant 1,810 Wed-Mon, 11 am - 9 pm, Tue, 3 - 9 pm See Note 1 21.5 P Vacant Office 3,754 N/A 1 per 250 sf 15.0
Building Two Total 13,390 Sub-Total 90.5
Overall Leasable Space 25,349 Overall Parking Demand 208.1 Round Up 209
Current church tenants in Suites A & G/H will not renew leases as shown in greenVacant units are shown in orange Note 1: One space for each 45 square feet of customer area, plus one space for each 200 square feet of non-customer area. Gross floor area includes 40% customer area and 60% noncustomer area.Note 2: One space per each three seats, or one space per 21 sq. ft. of assembly floor area. Church assembly area estimated at 35% of the gross floor area Exhibit 7. List of Future Tenants
Prepared 5/23/2024
Suite Tenant Name Proposed Use
GFA
(Sq. Ft.) Business Hours Parking Ratio
Req'd
Parking

BUILDING ONE
A Commercial TBD Retail 2,987 TBD 1 per 250 sf 11.9
B AP Beauty Supplies Retail 1,207 9 am - 6 pm, daily. Closed Tuesday 1 per 250 sf 4.8 C/D 74 Cantina Mexican Cuisine Restaurant 4,414 M-F 10am- 11pm; Sat, Sun: 10am- 11:30p m See Note 1 52.5
E/F All-Pro Engine & Mower Supply Retail 3,351 M-F 7:30am- 5pm 1 per 250 sf 13.4 Building One Total 11,959 Sub-Total 82.6

BUILDING TWO
G/H Restaurant TBD Restaurant 1,925 TBD See Note 1 22.9 I/J Aero Delivery, Inc. Retail 1,763 24/7 1 per 250 sf 7.1 K Dreamcatchers Photography Retail 743 M-W 9am - 5:30pm, Sat, Sun 9am-2pm 1 per 250 sf 3.0 L Commercial TBD Retail 730 TBD 1 per 250 sf 2.9
M/N VIP Best Insurance Agency Office 2,665 M-F, 10:30 am - 5:30 pm 1 per 250 sf 10.7 O Pizza Bowl Restaurant 1,810 Wed-Mon, 11 am - 9 pm, Tue, 3 - 9 pm See Note 1 21.5 P Restaurant TBD Restaurant 1,917 TBD See Note 1 22.8
Q Commercial TBD Office 1,294 TBD 1 per 250 sf 5.2
Building Two Total 12,847 Sub-Total 96
Overall Leasable Space 24,806 Overall Parking Demand 178.7 Round Up 179
New tenants in Suites A & G/H replacing church uses are shown in greenVacant units are shown in orange Note 1: One space for each 45 square feet of customer area, plus one space for each 200 square feet of non-customer area. Gross floor area includes 40% customer area and 60% non-customer area.Note 2. Current Suite P will be converted into Suites P and Q plus a common space of 543 sq. ft.

Exhibit 8. Time-of-Day Factors for Future Tenants and Vacant Units 11:00 AM 12:00 PM 1:00 PM 2:00 PM 3:00 PM 4:00 PM 5:00 PM6:00 PM7:00 PM

WEEKDAY
90% 100% 90% 50% 45% 45% 75% 80% 80%
41 46 41 23 21 21 34 37 37
60% 75% 100% 100% 95% 85% 85% 85% 90%
9 11 15 15 14 13 13 13 13
100% 85% 85% 95% 95% 85% 60% 25% 15%
544554311
55 61 60 43 40 38 50 51 51

WEEKEND
65% 85% 90% 95% 95% 90% 95% 100% 95%
30 39 41 43 43 41 43 46 43
90% 95% 100% 100% 95% 90% 80% 75% 70%
13 14 15 15 14 13 12 11 10
0% 0% 0% 0% 0% 0% 0% 0% 0%
000000000
43 53 56 58 57 54 55 57 53
1 Restaurant use includes Suites G/H and P
2 Retail use includes Suites A and L
3 Office use includes Suite Q
4 Hourly demand is rounded up to the next whole number
Hourly Demand 4
Use
GFA
(Sq. Ft.)
Maximum
Parking
Demand
Office 3 5.2
Office 3 5.2
Resturant 1 45.7
Retail 2 14.8
3,842
3,717
1,294
3,842
3,717
1,294

WEEKEND TOTAL

WEEKDAY TOTAL
Resturant 1 45.7
Retail 2 14.8
80 140120100
emand D
Exhibit 9. Project Parking Demand - Thursday Project
Existing Tenant 31701 Riverside Drive, Lake Elsinore
K2 Traffic Engineerng, Inc.

Survey: Thursday 12/14/2023
Capacity = 135
Overal Parking
Demand = 83
0 604020
11:00 AM
12:00 PM
1:00 PM
2:00 PM
3:00 PM
4:00 PM
5:00 PM
6:00 PM
7:00 PM
D Parking
Time
Existing Tenant
Peak Parking =32
at 7 PM
Future Tenant = 51
at 7 PM
80 140120100
emand D
Exhibit 10. Project Parking Demand - Saturday Project
Existing Tenant 31701 Riverside Drive, Lake Elsinore
K2 Traffic Engineerng, Inc.

Survey: Saturday 12/16/2023
Capacity = 135
Future Tenant = 57
at 6 PM
Overal Parking
Demand = 132
0 604020
11:00 AM
12:00 PM
1:00 PM
2:00 PM
3:00 PM
4:00 PM
5:00 PM
6:00 PM
7:00 PM
D Parking
Time
Existing Tenant
Peak Parking =75
at 6 PM
P6643 Lake Elsinore Plaza Parking Date: 12/14/2023
31701 Riverside Drive, Lake Elsinore Day: Thursday
By: Danny C.

Area A B C D E F G Total
Capacity 15 15 20 25 20 12 28 135
Handicap
Included 0 1 0 1 3 0 05
11:00 AM 0 0 0 6 3 1 0 10
12:00 PM 0 1 1 7 1 1 0 11
1:00 PM 0 4 1 6 6 1 1 19
2:00 PM 0 4 3 6 7 1 0 21
3:00 PM 0 3 2 3 6 1 0 15
4:00 PM 1 6 1 3 5 1 0 17
APPENDIX A. PARKING SURVEY - THURSDAY
4:00 PM 1 6 1 3 5 1 0 17
5:00 PM 0 3 3 3 8 1 0 18
6:00 PM 2 7 2 3 9 1 0 24
7:00 PM 1 14 3 4 9 1 0 32 *
Existing peak demand occurred at 7:00 PM MAX = 32
K2 Traffic Engineering, Inc.

P6643 Lake Elsinore Plaza Parking Date: 12/16/2023
31701 Riverside Drive, Lake Elsinore Day: Saturday
By: Danny C.

Area A B C D E F G Total
Capacity 15 15 20 25 20 12 28 135
Handicap
Included 0 1 0 1 3 0 05
11:00 AM 0 2 0 8 6 1 0 17
12:00 PM 0 0 1 9 7 1 0 18
1:00 PM 0 0 2 8 6 1 0 17
2:00 PM 1 0 4 5 4 1 0 15
3:00 PM 1 0 1 2 3 1 0 8
4:00 PM 1 2 3 1 3 1 0 11
APPENDIX A. PARKING SURVEY - SATURDAY
4:00 PM 1 2 3 1 3 1 0 11
5:00 PM 3 7 11 5 8 1 0 35
6:00 PM 5 15 16 19 19 1 0 75 *
7:00 PM 4 15 18 17 19 1 0 74
Existing peak demand occurred at 6:00 PM MAX = 75
K2 Traffic Engineering, Inc.

APPENDIX A. PARKING SURVEY MAP

NOTICE OF PUBLIC HEARING
NOTICE IS HEREBY GIVEN that the Planning Commission of the City of Lake Elsinore, California, will hold a Public Hearing on August 20, 2024, at the Lake Elsinore Cultural Center, 183 North Main Street, Lake Elsinore, California, 92530, at 6:00 p.m., or as soon thereafter as the matter may be heard, to consider the following:

Planning Application No. 2023-17 (Lakefront Plaza Revitalization): A request by Richard Leigh, Fluid and Fare, requesting approval of Commercial Design Review (CDR No. 2023-05) for exterior building and related site improvements for the existing Lakefront Plaza commercial center.

Proposed improvements include a new façade for the existing buildings, new landscaping, and a small reduction in square footage. No new square footage or new buildings are proposed. The proposed request also includes a parking reduction. The project site is located on an approximately 1.99-acre site within the General Commercial (C-2) District at 31681 and 31701 Riverside Drive (APNs: APNS: 379-381-053 & 379-381-054).

The proposed project is exempt from California Environmental Quality Act (CEQA), pursuant to California Environmental Quality Act (Cal. Pub. Res. Code §§21000 et seq.: “CEQA”) and the CEQA Guidelines (14 C.C.R. §§ 15000 et seq.) pursuant to CEQA Guidelines Section 15301 (Class 1 Existing Facilities).

ALL INTERESTED PERSONS are invited to submit written information, express opinions or otherwise submit written evidence by email to [email protected].

If you wish to legally challenge any action taken by the City on the above matter, you may be limited to raising only those issues you or someone else at the Public Hearing described in this notice, or in written correspondence delivered to the City prior to or at the Public Hearing. If you require accommodation to participate in a Public Hearing, please contact the Administrative Secretary at (951) 674-3124 ext. 297. All Agenda materials are available for review on the City’s website at www.lake-elsinore.org the Friday before the Public Hearing.

FURTHER INFORMATION on this item may be obtained by contacting Carlos Serna, Associate Planner in the Planning Division at [email protected] or (951) 674-3124, ext. 916.

Damaris Abraham,
Community Development Director
The Press-Enterprise
3512 14 Street
Riverside, California 92501
(951) 368-9229
City of Lake Elsinore
130 South Main Street
Lake Elsinore, California 92530
Publication: The Press-Enterprise

PROOF OF PUBLICATION OF
Ad Desc: 0011685906
FILE NO. 0011685906

PROOF OF PUBLICATION
I am a citizen of the United States. I
am over the age of eighteen years and
not party to or interested in the aboveentitled matter. I am an authorized representative of THE PRESSENTERPRISE, a newspaper of general circulation, printed and published daily
in the County of Riverside, and which
newspaper has been adjudicated a
newspaper of general circulation by the
Superior Court of the County of
Riverside, State of California, under
date of April 25, 1952, Case Number
54446, under date of March 29, 1957,
Case Number 65673, under date of
August 25, 1995, Case Number
267864, and under date of September
16, 2013, Case Number RIC 1309013;
that the notice, of which the annexed is
a printed copy, has been published in
said newspaper in accordance with the
instructions of the person(s) requesting
publication, and not in any supplement
thereof on the following dates, to wit:
08/10/2024
I certify (or declare) under the penalty
of perjury that the foregoing is true and
correct.

Date: August 10, 2024.

At: Riverside, California
______________
Signature
PC NOPH PA 2023-14 (Lakefront Plaza) - Page 1 of 1

Laura Emerson 05-24-2024
Laura Emerson
Laura Emerson
Employee Express Mapping
4000 Barranca Pkwy #250, Irvine CA 92604
949-771-0051
05/24/2024
379-120-001 379-120-009 379-120-012

WESSELINK FAMILY TRUST DATED LAKE PARK RV RESORT
900 SKOKIE BLVD
NORTHBROOK IL 60062

FOODMAKER INC
26400 LA ALAMEDA #207
MISSION VIEJO CA 92691
26400 LA ALAMEDA #207
MISSION VIEJO CA 92691
379-132-020 379-132-021 379-132-022

SAUL DELACRUZ
16525 JOY ST
LAKE ELSINORE CA 92530
ZHENG JING 2014 TRUST
20739 LYCOMING ST #84
DIAMOND BAR CA 91789

STEVE J THOMPSON
34217 MAZARINE DR
TEMECULA CA 92592
379-132-023 379-132-024 379-132-025

GERMANIA CELAYA
16533 JOY ST

VERONICA MENDOZA
16537 JOY ST

P THANGARATRAM D LALANI
35 LONG VIEW RD
LAKE ELSINORE CA 92530 LAKE ELSINORE CA 92530 COTO DE CAZA CA 92679 379-132-031 379-132-032 379-132-033

ARAMPATH GUNAWARDHANA
4521 CAMPUS DR #377
IRVINE CA 92612

STEVE THOMPSON
34217 MAZARINE DR
TEMECULA CA 92592

WHYTNE GUSTAFSON
16547 JOY ST
LAKE ELSINORE CA 92530
379-132-034 379-132-035 379-171-046

STEVEN S REDEN
3763 EL LADO DR
GLENDALE CA 91208

CIRCLE K STORES INC
255 E RINCON #100
CORONA CA 92879

CARLOS DELAPUENTE
15047 EUREKA ST
LAKE ELSINORE CA 92530
379-171-047 379-171-048 379-171-049

JORGE RAMOS
3588 RAVEN DR
LAKE ELSINORE CA 92530

MARTIN CORTES
18670 CHIPPEWA RD
LAKE ELSINORE CA 92532

WARREN D GADDY
4642 KIMBERWICK CIR
IRVINE CA 92604
379-171-050 379-171-051 379-171-052

NORINE E MAY
29880 LONGHORN DR
CANYON LAKE CA 92530

RICARDO P AVALOS
3568 RAVEN DR
LAKE ELSINORE CA 92530

LYSAH COLEMAN
3560 RAVEN DR
LAKE ELSINORE CA 92530
379-171-053 379-171-054 379-171-055

WEI LIANG
1005 HOLIDAY DR
WEST COVINA CA 91791

DANIEL CALAS
772 ROBIN DR
LAKE ELSINORE CA 92530
FLORES FAMILY TRUST 10/3/2023
16919 BELL AVE
LAKE ELSINORE CA 92530
379-171-056 379-171-084 379-171-085

ANGEL S GUTIERREZ JOSE
782 ROBIN DR
LAKE ELSINORE CA 92530

BROOKSTONE LANDING INC
171 B AVENIDA VAQUERO
SAN CLEMENTE CA 92672

BROOKSTONE LANDING INC
171 B AVENIDA VAQUERO
SAN CLEMENTE CA 92672
379-180-005 379-192-004 379-192-023

TOM CHEN TOM CHEN YAN HOEUNG
15155 CAMPHOR WAY
LAKE ELSINORE CA 92530
15155 CAMPHOR WAY
LAKE ELSINORE CA 92530
15155 CAMPHOR WAY
LAKE ELSINORE CA 92530
379-192-025 379-381-006 379-381-007
TOM CHEN 3600 NASHLAND TRUST UTD 3580 NASHLAND TRUST UTD 15155 CAMPHOR WAY
LAKE ELSINORE CA 92530
427 E 17TH ST #744
COSTA MESA CA 92627
427 E 17TH ST #F
COSTA MESA CA 92627
379-381-008 379-381-009 379-381-010

IGMIDIO YARANON
3581 NASHLAND AVE #D
LAKE ELSINORE CA 92530
3438 NASHLAND TRUST UTD 3541 NASHLAND TRUST UTD
427 E 17TH ST #F
COSTA MESA CA 92627
427 E 17TH ST #F
COSTA MESA CA 92627
379-381-011 379-381-012 379-381-019

ALICE YARANON
3581 NASHLAND AVE #D
LAKE ELSINORE CA 92530

IGMIDIO R YARANON
3581 NASHLAND AVE #D
LAKE ELSINORE CA 92530

LAKE FRONT PARK VIEW PLAZA
P O BOX 217
MONTEREY PARK CA 91754
379-381-023 379-381-024 379-381-025

WARREN D GADDY
4642 KIMBERWICK CIR
IRVINE CA 92604

JOSE D ROMERO
562 QUAIL DR
LAKE ELSINORE CA 92530

EDWARD THANGARATNAM
35 LONG VIEW RD
TRABUCO CANYON CA 92679
379-381-026 379-381-027 379-381-028
WHITE FAMILY REVOCABLE 2020 SILVINO NEGRETE
15923 GEORGIA AVE
PARAMOUNT CA 90723

SILVINO NEGRETE
15923 GEORGIA AVE
PARAMOUNT CA 90723
654 S OAK TREE DR
COVINA CA 91723
379-381-029 379-381-030 379-381-031

LAURO T VASQUEZ
348 LAURA LAKE DR
LAKE ELSINORE CA 92530

GUI ZHU CHEN
592 QUAIL DR
LAKE ELSINORE CA 92530

GOLDEN BLACK
1101 CALIFORNIA AVE #201A
CORONA CA 92881
379-381-045 379-381-046 379-381-047

ALFONSO BARAJAS
534 QUAIL DR
LAKE ELSINORE CA 92530

WEI LIANG
1005 HOLIDAY DR
WEST COVINE CA 91791
WHITE FAMILY REVOCABLE 2020
654 S OAK TREE DR
COVINA CA 91723
379-381-048 379-381-049 379-381-050

FELIX ROCHA LUNA
522 QUAIL DR

RICHARD GALL
514 QUAIL DR

MOISES FERREYRA
512 QUAIL DR
LAKE ELSINORE CA 92530 LAKE ELSINORE CA 92530 LAKE ELSINORE CA 92530 379-381-051 379-381-053 379-381-054

DAVID K KIDD BARRON
504 QUAIL DR
LAKE ELSINORE CA 92530
31681 RIVERSIDE DRIVE LLC
28656 OLD TOWN FRONT ST
TEMECULA CA 92590
31681 RIVERSIDE DRIVE LLC
28656 OLD TOWN FRONT ST
TEMECULA CA 92590
379-382-025 379-382-026 379-382-027

MARIA APARICIO
595 QUAIL DR
LAKE ELSINORE CA 92530
LEUNG FAMILY TRUST 2007 DATED MS BORROWER TAH
1508 BROOKHOLLOW DR
SANTA ANA CA 92705
1605 S FREMONT AVE
ALHAMBRA CA 91803
379-382-028 379-382-029 379-382-030

TRINIDAD GUTIERREZ
583 QUAIL DR

ELY I CASTILLO RON
575 QUAIL DR

KAYLA MARIE RAMIREZ
553 QUAIL DR
LAKE ELSINORE CA 92530 LAKE ELSINORE CA 92530 LAKE ELSINORE CA 92530 379-382-031 379-382-032 379-382-033

ESTELA ELIZABETH MACHADO GOMEZ LIVING TRUST
543 QUAIL DR

GISELA GUTIERREZ
545 QUAIL DR 535 QUAIL DR
LAKE ELSINORE CA 92530 LAKE ELSINORE CA 92530 LAKE ELSINORE CA 92530 379-382-034 379-382-035 379-382-036

EDWARD THANGARATNAM
35 LONG VIEW RD

FRANCISCO RAMIREZ
525 QUAIL DR

SURAWEERA SHANTHA &
11 LAS FIERAS
TRABUCO CANYON CA 92679 LAKE ELSINORE CA 92530 RANCHO SANTA MARG CA 92688 379-382-037 379-382-038 379-382-039

PEREZ JORGE & EVA PEREZ LAURIE K SAFREED
513 QUAIL DR

LYNDA M KRISKO
515 QUAIL DR 505 QUAIL DR
LAKE ELSINORE CA 92530 LAKE ELSINORE CA 92530 LAKE ELSINORE CA 92530 1 APN Name Address City State Zip
379-120-001 Wesselink Family Trust
379-120-009 Lake Park Rv Resort
379-120-012 Foodmaker Inc
379-132-020 Saul Delacruz
26400 La Alameda #207
900 Skokie Blvd
26400 La Alameda #207
16525 Joy St
20739 Lycoming St #84
34217 Mazarine Dr
16533 Joy St
Mission Viejo
Northbrook
Mission Viejo
Lake Elsinore
Diamond Bar
Temecula
Lake Elsinore
Lake Elsinore
Coto De Caza
Irvine
CA
IL
92691
60062
92691
92530
91789
92592
92530
92530
92679
92612
92592
92530
91208
92879
92530
92530
92532
92604
92530
92530
92530
91791
92530
92530
92530
92672
92672
92530
92530
92530
92530
92627
92627
92530
92627
92627
92530
92530
91754
92604
92530
92679
CA
CA
CA
CA
CA
CA
CA
CA
CA
CA
CA
CA
CA
CA
CA
CA
CA
CA
CA
CA
CA
CA
CA
CA
CA
CA
CA
CA
CA
CA
CA
CA
CA
CA
CA
CA
CA
CA
CA
CA
379-132-021 Zheng Jing 2014 Trust
379-132-022 Steve J Thompson
379-132-023 Germania Celaya
379-132-024 Veronica Mendoza
379-132-025 P Thangaratram D Lalani
379-132-031 Arampath Gunawardhana
379-132-032 Steve Thompson
379-132-033 Whytne Gustafson
379-132-034 Steven S Reden
379-132-035 Circle K Stores Inc
379-171-046 Carlos Delapuente
379-171-047 Jorge Ramos
379-171-048 Martin Cortes
379-171-049 Warren D Gaddy
379-171-050 Norine E May
379-171-051 Ricardo P Avalos
379-171-052 Lysah Coleman
379-171-053 Wei Liang
16537 Joy St
35 Long View Rd
4521 Campus Dr #377
34217 Mazarine Dr
16547 Joy St
Temecula
Lake Elsinore
3763 El Lado Dr Glendale
255 E Rincon #100
15047 Eureka St
3588 Raven Dr
18670 Chippewa Rd
4642 Kimberwick Cir
29880 Longhorn Dr
3568 Raven Dr
3560 Raven Dr
1005 Holiday Dr
772 Robin Dr
16919 Bell Ave
Corona
Lake Elsinore
Lake Elsinore
Lake Elsinore
Irvine
Canyon Lake
Lake Elsinore
Lake Elsinore
West Covina
Lake Elsinore
Lake Elsinore
Lake Elsinore
San Clemente
San Clemente
Lake Elsinore
Lake Elsinore
Lake Elsinore
Lake Elsinore
Costa Mesa
Costa Mesa
Lake Elsinore
Costa Mesa
Costa Mesa
Lake Elsinore
Lake Elsinore
Monterey Park
Irvine
379-171-054 Daniel Calas
379-171-055 Flores Family Trust 10/3/2023
379-171-056 Angel S Gutierrez Jose
379-171-084 Brookstone Landing Inc
379-171-085 Brookstone Landing Inc
379-180-005 Tom Chen
379-192-004 Tom Chen
379-192-023 Yan Hoeung
379-192-025 Tom Chen
379-381-006 3600 Nashland Trust Utd 04/14/2020 427 E 17th St #744 379-381-007 3580 Nashland Trust Utd 04/14/2020 427 E 17th St #F 782 Robin Dr
171 B Avenida Vaquero
171 B Avenida Vaquero
15155 Camphor Way
15155 Camphor Way
15155 Camphor Way
15155 Camphor Way
379-381-008 Igmidio Yaranon
379-381-009 3438 Nashland Trust Utd 04/14/2020 427 E 17th St #F 3581 Nashland Ave #D
379-381-010 3541 Nashland Trust Utd 4/14/20
379-381-011 Alice Yaranon
379-381-012 Igmidio R Yaranon
379-381-019 Lake Front Park View Plaza Inc
379-381-023 Warren D Gaddy
427 E 17th St #F
3581 Nashland Ave #D
3581 Nashland Ave #D
P O Box 217
4642 Kimberwick Cir
379-381-024 Jose D Romero 562 Quail Dr
379-381-025 Edward Thangaratnam
Lake Elsinore
35 Long View Rd Trabuco Canyon
3880
2 379-381-026 White Family Revocable 2020 Trust 654 S Oak Tree Dr Covina CA CA
CA
CA
CA
CA
CA
CA
CA
CA
CA
CA
CA
CA
CA
CA
CA
CA
CA
CA
CA
CA
CA
CA
CA
CA
91723
90723
90723
92530
92530
92881
92530
91791
91723
92530
92530
92530
92530
92590
92590
92530
91803
92705
92530
92530
92530
92530
92530
92530
92679
92530
92688
92530
92530
92530
379-381-027 Silvino Negrete
379-381-028 Silvino Negrete
379-381-029 Lauro T Vasquez
379-381-030 Gui Zhu Chen
15923 Georgia Ave
15923 Georgia Ave
348 Laura Lake Dr
592 Quail Dr
Paramount
Paramount
Lake Elsinore
Lake Elsinore
379-381-031 Golden Black 1101 California Ave #201A Corona 379-381-045 Alfonso Barajas 534 Quail Dr Lake Elsinore
West Covine
Covina
Lake Elsinore
Lake Elsinore
Lake Elsinore
Lake Elsinore
379-381-046 Wei Liang 1005 Holiday Dr
654 S Oak Tree Dr
522 Quail Dr
379-381-047 White Family Trust
379-381-048 Felix Rocha Luna
379-381-049 Richard Gall 514 Quail Dr
379-381-050 Moises Ferreyra
379-381-051 David K Kidd Barron
379-381-053 31681 Riverside Drive Llc
379-381-054 31681 Riverside Drive Llc
379-382-025 Maria Aparicio
512 Quail Dr
504 Quail Dr
28656 Old Town Front St Temecula
28656 Old Town Front St Temecula
595 Quail Dr Lake Elsinore
Alhambra
Santa Ana
379-382-026 Leung Family Trust
379-382-027 Ms Borrower Tah
379-382-028 Trinidad Gutierrez
379-382-029 Ely I Castillo Ron
379-382-030 Kayla Marie Ramirez
379-382-031 Estela Elizabeth Machado Pineda
379-382-032 Gomez Living Trust
379-382-033 Gisela Gutierrez
379-382-034 Edward Thangaratnam
379-382-035 Francisco Ramirez
379-382-036 Suraweera Shantha & Bernadette
379-382-037 Perez Jorge & Eva Perez
379-382-038 Laurie K Safreed
379-382-039 Lynda M Krisko
1605 S Fremont Ave
1508 Brookhollow Dr
583 Quail Dr
575 Quail Dr
553 Quail Dr
545 Quail Dr
543 Quail Dr
535 Quail Dr
35 Long View Rd
525 Quail Dr
Lake Elsinore
Lake Elsinore
Lake Elsinore
Lake Elsinore
Lake Elsinore
Lake Elsinore
Trabuco Canyon
Lake Elsinore
11 Las Fieras
515 Quail Dr
513 Quail Dr
Rancho Santa Marg CA
Lake Elsinore
Lake Elsinore
Lake Elsinore
CA
CA
505 Quail Dr CA
3880

17) Engineering Standards, Design Manual, and Specifications Update Adopt A RESOLUTION OF THE CITY COUNCIL OF THE CITY OF LAKE ELSINORE,

CALIFORNIA, ADOPTING AND APPROVING THE CITY OF LAKE ELSINORE

ENGINEERING STANDARDS AND SPECIFICATIONS FOR PUBLIC WORKS CONSTRUCTION – 2024 EDITION.

REPORT TO CITY COUNCIL
To: Honorable Mayor and Members of the City Council
From: Jason Simpson, City Manager
Prepared by: Remon Habib, City Engineer
Date: September 24, 2024
Subject: Engineering Standards, Design Manual, and Specifications Update Recommendation
Adopt A RESOLUTION OF THE CITY COUNCIL OF THE CITY OF LAKE ELSINORE,

CALIFORNIA, ADOPTING AND APPROVING THE CITY OF LAKE ELSINORE ENGINEERING STANDARDS AND SPECIFICATIONS FOR PUBLIC WORKS CONSTRUCTION – 2024 EDITION.

Background
The City of Lake Elsinore Engineering Standard Plans and Desing Manual (Engineering Standards) were last revised in 2009 and 2018, respectively. Since then, many industry standards and best practices have evolved to provide safer, more durable public improvements. The purpose of these Engineering Standards is to provide policies and design and construction guidelines.

Design professionals, private developers, and contractors use these guidelines for residential and commercial development and public works projects to ensure public welfare, preserve the community aesthetic, and promote efficient development within the City. Engineering Standards are used in connection with design, bidding, and construction of all public works projects by or for the City.

Engineering Standards Update

Discussion
Engineering Standards include various design criteria, technical specifications and standard construction details that are minimum requirements for design and construction of public improvements. Any improvements installed in the City right of way that do not meet the Engineering Standards without prior exceptions issued by the City Engineer shall be removed and reinstalled at the owner or contractor’s expense to ensure public safety and uniformity of infrastructure with the City. The adoption of Engineering Standards will include the following:

Standard Plans, Design Manual, Streetlight Manual, and Technical Specifications. The updated Engineering Standards may impact the cost of future City or private development projects.

All new standards attached to this staff report are being presented as ”DRAFT” until formally approved by the Council. Upon Council approval, the City Engineer will remove ”DRAFT” watermarks and enforce them as current Engineering Standards.

Engineering Standards will be maintained as a living document, which will be revised to reflect current industry standards and uphold minimum acceptable standards for quality design and construction work in the City. Any revisions to the adopted edition shall become effective immediately upon approval by the City Engineer without the need for adoption by the City Council.

Fiscal Impact
There is no fiscal impact with adopting the Engineering Standards.

Attachments
Attachment 1 - Resolution
Attachment 2 - Engineering Standard Plans
Attachment 3 - Engineering Design Manual
Attachment 4 - Street Light Manual
Attachment 5 - Special Provisions
Attachment 6 - Traffic Signal Specifications
Engineering
RESOLUTION NO. 2024-___

A RESOLUTION OF THE CITY COUNCIL OF THE CITY OF LAKE ELSINORE,

CALIFORNIA, ADOPTING AND APPROVING THE CITY OF LAKE ELSINORE

ENGINEERING STANDARDS AND SPECIFICATIONS FOR PUBLIC WORKS CONSTRUCTION – 2024 EDITION
Whereas, the City of Lake Elsinore Engineering Standards and Specifications (Engineering Standards) provide policies, design and construction guidelines, which include various design criteria, technical specifications and standard construction details which are considered minimum requirements for design and construction of public improvements; and Whereas, the City’s Engineering Department have developed a comprehensive set of Engineering Standards and Specifications that encompass design, construction, and improvement of public infrastructure among other subjects; and Whereas, the City Council recognizes that the design uniformity is in the best interest of the local community; and
Whereas, the City’s Engineering Standards represent the current views of the public works officials, eliminating conflicts and confusion; and Whereas, the City’s Engineering Standards must be periodically updated to account for the changes in construction practices and for the protection of public health and safety.

NOW, THEREFORE, THE CITY COUNCIL OF THE CITY OF LAKE ELSINORE, DOES HEREBY RESOLVE, DETERMINE AND ORDER AS FOLLOWS:

Section 1. That the foregoing recitals are true and correct.

Section 2. The Council approve the Engineering Standards which contain the following:
• Engineering Standard Plans
• Engineering Design Manual
• Engineering Street Light Manual
• Engineering Special Provisions
• Engineering Traffic Signal Specifications.

Section 3. The Council adopt the following Standards:
• The “Greenbook” (Latest Edition) – Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction
• California Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devises (CA MUTCD) – latest edition
Section 4. The City Engineer of the City of Lake Elsinore is authorized and empowered to sign all necessary elements to implement and carry out the purpose specified in this Resolution.

Section 5. The City Engineer is authorized to make periodic changes and modifications to the Engineering Standards and Specifications as necessary to comply with current public works standards, materials, and methods of construction.

Resolution No. 2024-___

Section 6. Engineering Standard shall govern over any conflicts with the Ordinances that cover design standard, guidelines, and policies.

Section 7. This Resolution takes effect and is in force immediately upon passage.

Passed and Adopted at a regular meeting of the City Council of the City of Lake Elsinore, California, this 10th day of September 2024.
.

Steve Manos
Mayor
Attest:

Candice Alvarez, MMC
City Clerk

STATE OF CALIFORNIA )
COUNTY OF RIVERSIDE ) ss.

CITY OF LAKE ELSINORE )
I, Candice Alvarez, MMC, City Clerk of the City of Lake Elsinore, California, do hereby certify that Resolution No. 2024- ______ was adopted by the City Council of the City of Lake Elsinore, California, at the regular meeting of September 10, 2024, and that the same was adopted by the following vote:

AYES:

NOES:

ABSENT:

ABSTAIN:

Candice Alvarez, MMC
City Clerk
DRAFT
DRAFT
DRAFT
DRAFT
DRAFT
DRAFT
DRAFT
DRAFT

CITY OF LAKE ELSINORE
STANDARD PLAN NO.

APPROVED BY:

CITY ENGINEER DATE
REVISION BY: APPROVED DATE

REMON HABIB DRAFT

CITY OF LAKE ELSINORE
STANDARD PLAN NO.

APPROVED BY:

CITY ENGINEER DATE
REVISION BY: APPROVED DATE

REMON HABIB DRAFT

CITY OF LAKE ELSINORE
STANDARD PLAN NO.

APPROVED BY:

CITY ENGINEER DATE
REVISION BY: APPROVED DATE

REMON HABIB DRAFT

CITY OF LAKE ELSINORE
STANDARD PLAN NO.

APPROVED BY:

CITY ENGINEER DATE
REVISION BY: APPROVED DATE

REMON HABIB DRAFT

CITY OF LAKE ELSINORE
STANDARD PLAN NO.

APPROVED BY:

CITY ENGINEER DATE
REVISION BY: APPROVED DATE

REMON HABIB DRAFT

CITY OF LAKE ELSINORE
STANDARD PLAN NO.

APPROVED BY:

CITY ENGINEER DATE
REVISION BY: APPROVED DATE

REMON HABIB DRAFT

CITY OF LAKE ELSINORE
STANDARD PLAN NO.

APPROVED BY:

CITY ENGINEER DATE
REVISION BY: APPROVED DATE

REMON HABIB DRAFT

CITY OF LAKE ELSINORE
STANDARD PLAN NO.

APPROVED BY:

CITY ENGINEER DATE
REVISION BY: APPROVED DATE

REMON HABIB DRAFT

CITY OF LAKE ELSINORE
STANDARD PLAN NO.

APPROVED BY:

CITY ENGINEER DATE
REVISION BY: APPROVED DATE

REMON HABIB DRAFT

CITY OF LAKE ELSINORE
STANDARD PLAN NO.

APPROVED BY:

CITY ENGINEER DATE
REVISION BY: APPROVED DATE

REMON HABIB DRAFT

CITY OF LAKE ELSINORE
STANDARD PLAN NO.

APPROVED BY:

CITY ENGINEER DATE
REVISION BY: APPROVED DATE

REMON HABIB DRAFT

CITY OF LAKE ELSINORE
STANDARD PLAN NO.

APPROVED BY:

CITY ENGINEER DATE
REVISION BY: APPROVED DATE

REMON HABIB DRAFT

CITY OF LAKE ELSINORE
STANDARD PLAN NO.

APPROVED BY:

CITY ENGINEER DATE
REVISION BY: APPROVED DATE

REMON HABIB DRAFT

CITY OF LAKE ELSINORE
STANDARD PLAN NO.

APPROVED BY:

CITY ENGINEER DATE
REVISION BY: APPROVED DATE

REMON HABIB DRAFT

CITY OF LAKE ELSINORE
STANDARD PLAN NO.

APPROVED BY:

CITY ENGINEER DATE
REVISION BY: APPROVED DATE

REMON HABIB DRAFT

CITY OF LAKE ELSINORE
STANDARD PLAN NO.

APPROVED BY:

CITY ENGINEER DATE
REVISION BY: APPROVED DATE

REMON HABIB DRAFT

CITY OF LAKE ELSINORE
STANDARD PLAN NO.

APPROVED BY:

CITY ENGINEER DATE
REVISION BY: APPROVED DATE

REMON HABIB DRAFT

CITY OF LAKE ELSINORE
STANDARD PLAN NO.

APPROVED BY:

CITY ENGINEER DATE
REVISION BY: APPROVED DATE

REMON HABIB DRAFT

CITY OF LAKE ELSINORE
STANDARD PLAN NO.

APPROVED BY:

CITY ENGINEER DATE
REVISION BY: APPROVED DATE

REMON HABIB DRAFT

CITY OF LAKE ELSINORE
STANDARD PLAN NO.

APPROVED BY:

CITY ENGINEER DATE
REVISION BY: APPROVED DATE

REMON HABIB DRAFT

CITY OF LAKE ELSINORE
STANDARD PLAN NO.

APPROVED BY:

CITY ENGINEER DATE
REVISION BY: APPROVED DATE

REMON HABIB DRAFT

CITY OF LAKE ELSINORE
STANDARD PLAN NO.

APPROVED BY:

CITY ENGINEER DATE
REVISION BY: APPROVED DATE

REMON HABIB DRAFT

CITY OF LAKE ELSINORE
STANDARD PLAN NO.

APPROVED BY:

CITY ENGINEER DATE
REVISION BY: APPROVED DATE

REMON HABIB DRAFT

CITY OF LAKE ELSINORE
STANDARD PLAN NO.

APPROVED BY:

CITY ENGINEER DATE
REVISION BY: APPROVED DATE

REMON HABIB DRAFT

CITY OF LAKE ELSINORE
STANDARD PLAN NO.

APPROVED BY:

CITY ENGINEER DATE
REVISION BY: APPROVED DATE

REMON HABIB DRAFT

CITY OF LAKE ELSINORE
STANDARD PLAN NO.

APPROVED BY:

CITY ENGINEER DATE
REVISION BY: APPROVED DATE

REMON HABIB DRAFT

CITY OF LAKE ELSINORE
STANDARD PLAN NO.

APPROVED BY:

CITY ENGINEER DATE
REVISION BY: APPROVED DATE

REMON HABIB DRAFT

CITY OF LAKE ELSINORE
STANDARD PLAN NO.

APPROVED BY:

CITY ENGINEER DATE
REVISION BY: APPROVED DATE

REMON HABIB DRAFT

CITY OF LAKE ELSINORE
STANDARD PLAN NO.

APPROVED BY:

CITY ENGINEER DATE
REVISION BY: APPROVED DATE

REMON HABIB DRAFT
DRAFT

CITY OF LAKE ELSINORE
STANDARD PLAN NO.

APPROVED BY:

CITY ENGINEER DATE
REVISION BY: APPROVED DATE

REMON HABIB DRAFT

CITY OF LAKE ELSINORE
STANDARD PLAN NO.

APPROVED BY:

CITY ENGINEER DATE
REVISION BY: APPROVED DATE

REMON HABIB DRAFT

CITY OF LAKE ELSINORE
STANDARD PLAN NO.

APPROVED BY:

CITY ENGINEER DATE
REVISION BY: APPROVED DATE

REMON HABIB DRAFT

CITY OF LAKE ELSINORE
STANDARD PLAN NO.

APPROVED BY:

CITY ENGINEER DATE
REVISION BY: APPROVED DATE

REMON HABIB DRAFT

CITY OF LAKE ELSINORE
STANDARD PLAN NO.

APPROVED BY:

CITY ENGINEER DATE
REVISION BY: APPROVED DATE

REMON HABIB DRAFT

CITY OF LAKE ELSINORE
STANDARD PLAN NO.

APPROVED BY:

CITY ENGINEER DATE
REVISION BY: APPROVED DATE

REMON HABIB DRAFT

CITY OF LAKE ELSINORE
STANDARD PLAN NO.

APPROVED BY:

CITY ENGINEER DATE
REVISION BY: APPROVED DATE

REMON HABIB DRAFT

CITY OF LAKE ELSINORE
STANDARD PLAN NO.

APPROVED BY:

CITY ENGINEER DATE
REVISION BY: APPROVED DATE

REMON HABIB DRAFT

CITY OF LAKE ELSINORE
STANDARD PLAN NO.

APPROVED BY:

CITY ENGINEER DATE
REVISION BY: APPROVED DATE

REMON HABIB DRAFT

CITY OF LAKE ELSINORE
STANDARD PLAN NO.

APPROVED BY:

CITY ENGINEER DATE
REVISION BY: APPROVED DATE

REMON HABIB DRAFT

CITY OF LAKE ELSINORE
STANDARD PLAN NO.

APPROVED BY:

CITY ENGINEER DATE
REVISION BY: APPROVED DATE

REMON HABIB DRAFT

CITY OF LAKE ELSINORE
STANDARD PLAN NO.

APPROVED BY:

CITY ENGINEER DATE
REVISION BY: APPROVED DATE

REMON HABIB DRAFT

CITY OF LAKE ELSINORE
STANDARD PLAN NO.

APPROVED BY:

CITY ENGINEER DATE
REVISION BY: APPROVED DATE

REMON HABIB DRAFT

CITY OF LAKE ELSINORE
STANDARD PLAN NO.

APPROVED BY:

CITY ENGINEER DATE
REVISION BY: APPROVED DATE

REMON HABIB DRAFT

CITY OF LAKE ELSINORE
STANDARD PLAN NO.

APPROVED BY:

CITY ENGINEER DATE
REVISION BY: APPROVED DATE

REMON HABIB DRAFT

CITY OF LAKE ELSINORE
STANDARD PLAN NO.

APPROVED BY:

CITY ENGINEER DATE
REVISION BY: APPROVED DATE

REMON HABIB DRAFT

CITY OF LAKE ELSINORE
STANDARD PLAN NO.

APPROVED BY:

CITY ENGINEER DATE
REVISION BY: APPROVED DATE

REMON HABIB DRAFT

CITY OF LAKE ELSINORE
STANDARD PLAN NO.

APPROVED BY:

CITY ENGINEER DATE
REVISION BY: APPROVED DATE

REMON HABIB
MIN
2'
3'
DRAFT

CITY OF LAKE ELSINORE
STANDARD PLAN NO.

APPROVED BY:

CITY ENGINEER DATE
REVISION BY: APPROVED DATE

REMON HABIB DRAFT

CITY OF LAKE ELSINORE
STANDARD PLAN NO.

APPROVED BY:

CITY ENGINEER DATE
REVISION BY: APPROVED DATE

REMON HABIB DRAFT

CITY OF LAKE ELSINORE
STANDARD PLAN NO.

APPROVED BY:

CITY ENGINEER DATE
REVISION BY: APPROVED DATE

REMON HABIB DRAFT

CITY OF LAKE ELSINORE
STANDARD PLAN NO.

APPROVED BY:

CITY ENGINEER DATE
REVISION BY: APPROVED DATE

REMON HABIB DRAFT

CITY OF LAKE ELSINORE
STANDARD PLAN NO.

APPROVED BY:

CITY ENGINEER DATE
REVISION BY: APPROVED DATE

REMON HABIB DRAFT

CITY OF LAKE ELSINORE
STANDARD PLAN NO.

APPROVED BY:

CITY ENGINEER DATE
REVISION BY: APPROVED DATE

REMON HABIB DRAFT

CITY OF LAKE ELSINORE
STANDARD PLAN NO.

APPROVED BY:

CITY ENGINEER DATE
REVISION BY: APPROVED DATE

REMON HABIB DRAFT

CITY OF LAKE ELSINORE
STANDARD PLAN NO.

APPROVED BY:

CITY ENGINEER DATE
REVISION BY: APPROVED DATE

REMON HABIB DRAFT

CITY OF LAKE ELSINORE
STANDARD PLAN NO.

APPROVED BY:

CITY ENGINEER DATE
REVISION BY: APPROVED DATE

REMON HABIB DRAFT

CITY OF LAKE ELSINORE
STANDARD PLAN NO.

APPROVED BY:

CITY ENGINEER DATE
REVISION BY: APPROVED DATE

REMON HABIB DRAFT

CITY OF LAKE ELSINORE
STANDARD PLAN NO.

APPROVED BY:

CITY ENGINEER DATE
REVISION BY: APPROVED DATE

REMON HABIB DRAFT

CITY OF LAKE ELSINORE
STANDARD PLAN NO.

APPROVED BY:

CITY ENGINEER DATE
REVISION BY: APPROVED DATE

REMON HABIB DRAFT
DRAFT

CITY OF LAKE ELSINORE
STANDARD PLAN NO.

APPROVED BY:

CITY ENGINEER DATE
REVISION BY: APPROVED DATE

REMON HABIB DRAFT

CITY OF LAKE ELSINORE
STANDARD PLAN NO.

APPROVED BY:

CITY ENGINEER DATE
REVISION BY: APPROVED DATE

REMON HABIB DRAFT

CITY OF LAKE ELSINORE
STANDARD PLAN NO.

APPROVED BY:

CITY ENGINEER DATE
REVISION BY: APPROVED DATE

REMON HABIB DRAFT

CITY OF LAKE ELSINORE
STANDARD PLAN NO.

APPROVED BY:

CITY ENGINEER DATE
REVISION BY: APPROVED DATE

REMON HABIB DRAFT

CITY OF LAKE ELSINORE
STANDARD PLAN NO.

APPROVED BY:

CITY ENGINEER DATE
REVISION BY: APPROVED DATE

REMON HABIB DRAFT

CITY OF LAKE ELSINORE
STANDARD PLAN NO.

APPROVED BY:

CITY ENGINEER DATE
REVISION BY: APPROVED DATE

REMON HABIB DRAFT

CITY OF LAKE ELSINORE
STANDARD PLAN NO.

APPROVED BY:

CITY ENGINEER DATE
REVISION BY: APPROVED DATE

REMON HABIB DRAFT

CITY OF LAKE ELSINORE
STANDARD PLAN NO.

APPROVED BY:

CITY ENGINEER DATE
REVISION BY: APPROVED DATE

REMON HABIB DRAFT

CITY OF LAKE ELSINORE
STANDARD PLAN NO.

APPROVED BY:

CITY ENGINEER DATE
REVISION BY: APPROVED DATE

REMON HABIB DRAFT

CITY OF LAKE ELSINORE
STANDARD PLAN NO.

APPROVED BY:

CITY ENGINEER DATE
REVISION BY: APPROVED DATE

REMON HABIB DRAFT

CITY OF LAKE ELSINORE
STANDARD PLAN NO.

APPROVED BY:

CITY ENGINEER DATE
REVISION BY: APPROVED DATE

REMON HABIB DRAFT

CITY OF LAKE ELSINORE
STANDARD PLAN NO.

APPROVED BY:

CITY ENGINEER DATE
REVISION BY: APPROVED DATE

REMON HABIB DRAFT

CITY OF LAKE ELSINORE
STANDARD PLAN NO.

APPROVED BY:

CITY ENGINEER DATE
REVISION BY: APPROVED DATE

REMON HABIB DRAFT

CITY OF LAKE ELSINORE
STANDARD PLAN NO.

APPROVED BY:

CITY ENGINEER DATE
REVISION BY: APPROVED DATE

REMON HABIB DRAFT

CITY OF LAKE ELSINORE
STANDARD PLAN NO.

APPROVED BY:

CITY ENGINEER DATE
REVISION BY: APPROVED DATE

REMON HABIB DRAFT

CITY OF LAKE ELSINORE
STANDARD PLAN NO.

APPROVED BY:

CITY ENGINEER DATE
REVISION BY: APPROVED DATE

REMON HABIB DRAFT

CITY OF LAKE ELSINORE
STANDARD PLAN NO.

APPROVED BY:

CITY ENGINEER DATE
REVISION BY: APPROVED DATE

REMON HABIB DRAFT

CITY OF LAKE ELSINORE
STANDARD PLAN NO.

APPROVED BY:

CITY ENGINEER DATE
REVISION BY: APPROVED DATE

REMON HABIB DRAFT
DRAFT

CITY OF LAKE ELSINORE
STANDARD PLAN NO.

APPROVED BY:

CITY ENGINEER DATE
REVISION BY: APPROVED DATE

REMON HABIB DRAFT

CITY OF LAKE ELSINORE
STANDARD PLAN NO.

APPROVED BY:

CITY ENGINEER DATE
REVISION BY: APPROVED DATE

REMON HABIB
Casino Dr
00000
Casino

PRIVATE
Casino
Casino
DRAFT

CITY OF LAKE ELSINORE
STANDARD PLAN NO.

APPROVED BY:

CITY ENGINEER DATE
REVISION BY: APPROVED DATE

REMON HABIB DRAFT

CITY OF LAKE ELSINORE
STANDARD PLAN NO.

APPROVED BY:

CITY ENGINEER DATE
REVISION BY: APPROVED DATE

REMON HABIB DRAFT

CITY OF LAKE ELSINORE
STANDARD PLAN NO.

APPROVED BY:

CITY ENGINEER DATE
REVISION BY: APPROVED DATE

REMON HABIB

SECONDARY
##000

SECONDARY
##000 PRIMARYPRIMARY ##999 ##999 PRIMARYPRIMARY ##000 ##000

SECONDARY

SECONDARY
##999
##999
Æ )
Å
DRAFT

CITY OF LAKE ELSINORE
STANDARD PLAN NO.

APPROVED BY:

CITY ENGINEER DATE
REVISION BY: APPROVED DATE

REMON HABIB DRAFT

CITY OF LAKE ELSINORE
STANDARD PLAN NO.

APPROVED BY:

CITY ENGINEER DATE
REVISION BY: APPROVED DATE

REMON HABIB DRAFT

CITY OF LAKE ELSINORE
STANDARD PLAN NO.

APPROVED BY:

CITY ENGINEER DATE
REVISION BY: APPROVED DATE

REMON HABIB DRAFT

CITY OF LAKE ELSINORE
STANDARD PLAN NO.

APPROVED BY:

CITY ENGINEER DATE
REVISION BY: APPROVED DATE

REMON HABIB DRAFT

CITY OF LAKE ELSINORE
STANDARD PLAN NO.

APPROVED BY:

CITY ENGINEER DATE
REVISION BY: APPROVED DATE

REMON HABIB DRAFT

CITY OF LAKE ELSINORE
STANDARD PLAN NO.

APPROVED BY:

CITY ENGINEER DATE
REVISION BY: APPROVED DATE

REMON HABIB DRAFT

CITY OF LAKE ELSINORE
STANDARD PLAN NO.

APPROVED BY:

CITY ENGINEER DATE
REVISION BY: APPROVED DATE

REMON HABIB DRAFT

CITY OF LAKE ELSINORE
STANDARD PLAN NO.

APPROVED BY:

CITY ENGINEER DATE
REVISION BY: APPROVED DATE

REMON HABIB DRAFT

CITY OF LAKE ELSINORE
STANDARD PLAN NO.

APPROVED BY:

CITY ENGINEER DATE
REVISION BY: APPROVED DATE

REMON HABIB DRAFT

CITY OF LAKE ELSINORE
STANDARD PLAN NO.

APPROVED BY:

CITY ENGINEER DATE
REVISION BY: APPROVED DATE

REMON HABIB DRAFT

CITY OF LAKE ELSINORE
STANDARD PLAN NO.

APPROVED BY:

CITY ENGINEER DATE
REVISION BY: APPROVED DATE

REMON HABIB DRAFT

CITY OF LAKE ELSINORE
STANDARD PLAN NO.

APPROVED BY:

CITY ENGINEER DATE
REVISION BY: APPROVED DATE

REMON HABIB DRAFT

CITY OF LAKE ELSINORE
STANDARD PLAN NO.

APPROVED BY:

CITY ENGINEER DATE
REVISION BY: APPROVED DATE

REMON HABIB DRAFT

CITY OF LAKE ELSINORE
STANDARD PLAN NO.

APPROVED BY:

CITY ENGINEER DATE
REVISION BY: APPROVED DATE

REMON HABIB DRAFT

CITY OF LAKE ELSINORE
STANDARD PLAN NO.

APPROVED BY:

CITY ENGINEER DATE
REVISION BY: APPROVED DATE

REMON HABIB DRAFT

CITY OF LAKE ELSINORE
STANDARD PLAN NO.

APPROVED BY:

CITY ENGINEER DATE
REVISION BY: APPROVED DATE

REMON HABIB DRAFT

CITY OF LAKE ELSINORE
STANDARD PLAN NO.

APPROVED BY:

CITY ENGINEER DATE
REVISION BY: APPROVED DATE

REMON HABIB DRAFT

CITY OF LAKE ELSINORE
STANDARD PLAN NO.

APPROVED BY:

CITY ENGINEER DATE
REVISION BY: APPROVED DATE

REMON HABIB DRAFT

CITY OF LAKE ELSINORE
STANDARD PLAN NO.

APPROVED BY:

CITY ENGINEER DATE
REVISION BY: APPROVED DATE

REMON HABIB DRAFT

CITY OF LAKE ELSINORE
STANDARD PLAN NO.

APPROVED BY:

CITY ENGINEER DATE
REVISION BY: APPROVED DATE

REMON HABIB DRAFT
DRAFT

CITY OF LAKE ELSINORE
STANDARD PLAN NO.

APPROVED BY:

CITY ENGINEER DATE
REVISION BY: APPROVED DATE

REMON HABIB DRAFT

CITY OF LAKE ELSINORE
STANDARD PLAN NO.

APPROVED BY:

CITY ENGINEER DATE
REVISION BY: APPROVED DATE

REMON HABIB DRAFT

CITY OF LAKE ELSINORE
STANDARD PLAN NO.

APPROVED BY:

CITY ENGINEER DATE
REVISION BY: APPROVED DATE

REMON HABIB DRAFT

CITY OF LAKE ELSINORE
STANDARD PLAN NO.

APPROVED BY:

CITY ENGINEER DATE
REVISION BY: APPROVED DATE

REMON HABIB DRAFT

CITY OF LAKE ELSINORE
STANDARD PLAN NO.

APPROVED BY:

CITY ENGINEER DATE
REVISION BY: APPROVED DATE

REMON HABIB DRAFT

CITY OF LAKE ELSINORE
STANDARD PLAN NO.

APPROVED BY:

CITY ENGINEER DATE
REVISION BY: APPROVED DATE

REMON HABIB
‐
‐ ‐
‐
DRAFT

CITY OF LAKE ELSINORE
STANDARD PLAN NO.

APPROVED BY:

CITY ENGINEER DATE
REVISION BY: APPROVED DATE

REMON HABIB DRAFT

CITY OF LAKE ELSINORE
STANDARD PLAN NO.

APPROVED BY:

CITY ENGINEER DATE
REVISION BY: APPROVED DATE

REMON HABIB DRAFT

CITY OF LAKE ELSINORE
STANDARD PLAN NO.

APPROVED BY:

CITY ENGINEER DATE
REVISION BY: APPROVED DATE

REMON HABIB
LINE
DRAFT

CITY OF LAKE ELSINORE
STANDARD PLAN NO.

APPROVED BY:

CITY ENGINEER DATE
REVISION BY: APPROVED DATE

REMON HABIB DRAFT

CITY OF LAKE ELSINORE
STANDARD PLAN NO.

APPROVED BY:

CITY ENGINEER DATE
REVISION BY: APPROVED DATE

REMON HABIB DRAFT

CITY OF LAKE ELSINORE
STANDARD PLAN NO.

APPROVED BY:

CITY ENGINEER DATE
REVISION BY: APPROVED DATE

REMON HABIB DRAFT

CITY OF LAKE ELSINORE
STANDARD PLAN NO.

APPROVED BY:

CITY ENGINEER DATE
REVISION BY: APPROVED DATE

REMON HABIB DRAFT

CITY OF LAKE ELSINORE
STANDARD PLAN NO.

APPROVED BY:

CITY ENGINEER DATE
REVISION BY: APPROVED DATE

REMON HABIB DRAFT

CITY OF LAKE ELSINORE
STANDARD PLAN NO.

APPROVED BY:

CITY ENGINEER DATE
REVISION BY: APPROVED DATE

REMON HABIB DRAFT

CITY OF LAKE ELSINORE
STANDARD PLAN NO.

APPROVED BY:

CITY ENGINEER DATE
REVISION BY: APPROVED DATE

REMON HABIB DRAFT

CITY OF LAKE ELSINORE
STANDARD PLAN NO.

APPROVED BY:

CITY ENGINEER DATE
REVISION BY: APPROVED DATE

REMON HABIB DRAFT

CITY OF LAKE ELSINORE
STANDARD PLAN NO.

APPROVED BY:

CITY ENGINEER DATE
REVISION BY: APPROVED DATE

REMON HABIB DRAFT

CITY OF LAKE ELSINORE
STANDARD PLAN NO.

APPROVED BY:

CITY ENGINEER DATE
REVISION BY: APPROVED DATE

REMON HABIB DRAFT

CITY OF LAKE ELSINORE
STANDARD PLAN NO.

APPROVED BY:

CITY ENGINEER DATE
REVISION BY: APPROVED DATE

REMON HABIB DRAFT

CITY OF LAKE ELSINORE
STANDARD PLAN NO.

APPROVED BY:

CITY ENGINEER DATE
REVISION BY: APPROVED DATE

REMON HABIB DRAFT

CITY OF LAKE ELSINORE
STANDARD PLAN NO.

APPROVED BY:

CITY ENGINEER DATE
REVISION BY: APPROVED DATE

REMON HABIB DRAFT

CITY OF LAKE ELSINORE
STANDARD PLAN NO.

APPROVED BY:

CITY ENGINEER DATE
REVISION BY: APPROVED DATE

REMON HABIB DRAFT

CITY OF LAKE ELSINORE
STANDARD PLAN NO.

APPROVED BY:

CITY ENGINEER DATE
REVISION BY: APPROVED DATE

REMON HABIB DRAFT

CITY OF LAKE ELSINORE
STANDARD PLAN NO.

APPROVED BY:

CITY ENGINEER DATE
REVISION BY: APPROVED DATE

REMON HABIB DRAFT

CITY OF LAKE ELSINORE
STANDARD PLAN NO.

APPROVED BY:

CITY ENGINEER DATE
REVISION BY: APPROVED DATE

REMON HABIB DRAFT

CITY OF LAKE ELSINORE
STANDARD PLAN NO.

APPROVED BY:

CITY ENGINEER DATE
REVISION BY: APPROVED DATE

REMON HABIB DRAFT

CITY OF LAKE ELSINORE
STANDARD PLAN NO.

APPROVED BY:

CITY ENGINEER DATE
REVISION BY: APPROVED DATE

REMON HABIB DRAFT

CITY OF LAKE ELSINORE
STANDARD PLAN NO.

APPROVED BY:

CITY ENGINEER DATE
REVISION BY: APPROVED DATE

REMON HABIB DRAFT

CITY OF LAKE ELSINORE
STANDARD PLAN NO.

APPROVED BY:

CITY ENGINEER DATE
REVISION BY: APPROVED DATE

REMON HABIB DRAFT

CITY OF LAKE ELSINORE
STANDARD PLAN NO.

APPROVED BY:

CITY ENGINEER DATE
REVISION BY: APPROVED DATE

REMON HABIB DRAFT

CITY OF LAKE ELSINORE
STANDARD PLAN NO.

APPROVED BY:

CITY ENGINEER DATE
REVISION BY: APPROVED DATE

REMON HABIB DRAFT

CITY OF LAKE ELSINORE
STANDARD PLAN NO.

APPROVED BY:

CITY ENGINEER DATE
REVISION BY: APPROVED DATE

REMON HABIB DRAFT

CITY OF LAKE ELSINORE
STANDARD PLAN NO.

APPROVED BY:

CITY ENGINEER DATE
REVISION BY: APPROVED DATE

REMON HABIB DRAFT

CITY OF LAKE ELSINORE
STANDARD PLAN NO.

APPROVED BY:

CITY ENGINEER DATE
REVISION BY: APPROVED DATE

REMON HABIB DRAFT

CITY OF LAKE ELSINORE
STANDARD PLAN NO.

APPROVED BY:

CITY ENGINEER DATE
REVISION BY: APPROVED DATE

REMON HABIB DRAFT

CITY OF LAKE ELSINORE
STANDARD PLAN NO.

APPROVED BY:

CITY ENGINEER DATE
REVISION BY: APPROVED DATE

REMON HABIB DRAFT

CITY OF LAKE ELSINORE
STANDARD PLAN NO.

APPROVED BY:

CITY ENGINEER DATE
REVISION BY: APPROVED DATE

REMON HABIB DRAFT

CITY OF LAKE ELSINORE
STANDARD PLAN NO.

APPROVED BY:

CITY ENGINEER DATE
REVISION BY: APPROVED DATE

REMON HABIB DRAFT

CITY OF LAKE ELSINORE
STANDARD PLAN NO.

APPROVED BY:

CITY ENGINEER DATE
REVISION BY: APPROVED DATE

REMON HABIB DRAFT

CITY OF LAKE ELSINORE
STANDARD PLAN NO.

APPROVED BY:

CITY ENGINEER DATE
REVISION BY: APPROVED DATE

REMON HABIB DRAFT

CITY OF LAKE ELSINORE
STANDARD PLAN NO.

APPROVED BY:

CITY ENGINEER DATE
REVISION BY: APPROVED DATE

REMON HABIB DRAFT

CITY OF LAKE ELSINORE
STANDARD PLAN NO.

APPROVED BY:

CITY ENGINEER DATE
REVISION BY: APPROVED DATE

REMON HABIB DRAFT

CITY OF LAKE ELSINORE
STANDARD PLAN NO.

APPROVED BY:

CITY ENGINEER DATE
REVISION BY: APPROVED DATE

REMON HABIB DRAFT

CITY OF LAKE ELSINORE
STANDARD PLAN NO.

APPROVED BY:

CITY ENGINEER DATE
REVISION BY: APPROVED DATE

REMON HABIB DRAFT

CITY OF LAKE ELSINORE
STANDARD PLAN NO.

APPROVED BY:

CITY ENGINEER DATE
REVISION BY: APPROVED DATE

REMON HABIB DRAFT

CITY OF LAKE ELSINORE
STANDARD PLAN NO.

APPROVED BY:

CITY ENGINEER DATE
REVISION BY: APPROVED DATE

REMON HABIB DRAFT

CITY OF LAKE ELSINORE
STANDARD PLAN NO.

APPROVED BY:

CITY ENGINEER DATE
REVISION BY: APPROVED DATE

REMON HABIB DRAFT
DRAFT

CITY OF LAKE ELSINORE
STANDARD PLAN NO.

APPROVED BY:

CITY ENGINEER DATE
REVISION BY: APPROVED DATE

REMON HABIB DRAFT

CITY OF LAKE ELSINORE
STANDARD PLAN NO.

APPROVED BY:

CITY ENGINEER DATE
REVISION BY: APPROVED DATE

REMON HABIB DRAFT

CITY OF LAKE ELSINORE
STANDARD PLAN NO.

APPROVED BY:

CITY ENGINEER DATE
REVISION BY: APPROVED DATE

REMON HABIB DRAFT

CITY OF LAKE ELSINORE
STANDARD PLAN NO.

APPROVED BY:

CITY ENGINEER DATE
REVISION BY: APPROVED DATE

REMON HABIB DRAFT

CITY OF LAKE ELSINORE
STANDARD PLAN NO.

APPROVED BY:

CITY ENGINEER DATE
REVISION BY: APPROVED DATE

REMON HABIB DRAFT

CITY OF LAKE ELSINORE
STANDARD PLAN NO.

APPROVED BY:

CITY ENGINEER DATE
REVISION BY: APPROVED DATE

REMON HABIB DRAFT

CITY OF LAKE ELSINORE
STANDARD PLAN NO.

APPROVED BY:

CITY ENGINEER DATE
REVISION BY: APPROVED DATE

REMON HABIB DRAFT

CITY OF LAKE ELSINORE
STANDARD PLAN NO.

APPROVED BY:

CITY ENGINEER DATE
REVISION BY: APPROVED DATE

REMON HABIB DRAFT

CITY OF LAKE ELSINORE
STANDARD PLAN NO.

APPROVED BY:

CITY ENGINEER DATE
REVISION BY: APPROVED DATE

REMON HABIB DRAFT

CITY OF LAKE ELSINORE
STANDARD PLAN NO.

APPROVED BY:

CITY ENGINEER DATE
REVISION BY: APPROVED DATE

REMON HABIB DRAFT

CITY OF LAKE ELSINORE
STANDARD PLAN NO.

APPROVED BY:

CITY ENGINEER DATE
REVISION BY: APPROVED DATE

REMON HABIB DRAFT

CITY OF LAKE ELSINORE
STANDARD PLAN NO.

APPROVED BY:

CITY ENGINEER DATE
REVISION BY: APPROVED DATE

REMON HABIB DRAFT

CITY OF LAKE ELSINORE
STANDARD PLAN NO.

APPROVED BY:

CITY ENGINEER DATE
REVISION BY: APPROVED DATE

REMON HABIB DRAFT

CITY OF LAKE ELSINORE
STANDARD PLAN NO.

APPROVED BY:

CITY ENGINEER DATE
REVISION BY: APPROVED DATE

REMON HABIB DRAFT

CITY OF LAKE ELSINORE
STANDARD PLAN NO.

APPROVED BY:

CITY ENGINEER DATE
REVISION BY: APPROVED DATE

REMON HABIB DRAFT

CITY OF LAKE ELSINORE
STANDARD PLAN NO.

APPROVED BY:

CITY ENGINEER DATE
REVISION BY: APPROVED DATE

REMON HABIB DRAFT

CITY OF LAKE ELSINORE
STANDARD PLAN NO.

APPROVED BY:

CITY ENGINEER DATE
REVISION BY: APPROVED DATE

REMON HABIB DRAFT

CITY OF LAKE ELSINORE
STANDARD PLAN NO.

APPROVED BY:

CITY ENGINEER DATE
REVISION BY: APPROVED DATE

REMON HABIB DRAFT

CITY OF LAKE ELSINORE
STANDARD PLAN NO.

APPROVED BY:

CITY ENGINEER DATE
REVISION BY: APPROVED DATE

REMON HABIB DRAFT

CITY OF LAKE ELSINORE
STANDARD PLAN NO.

APPROVED BY:

CITY ENGINEER DATE
REVISION BY: APPROVED DATE

REMON HABIB DRAFT

CITY OF LAKE ELSINORE
STANDARD PLAN NO.

APPROVED BY:

CITY ENGINEER DATE
REVISION BY: APPROVED DATE

REMON HABIB DRAFT

CITY OF LAKE ELSINORE
STANDARD PLAN NO.

APPROVED BY:

CITY ENGINEER DATE
REVISION BY: APPROVED DATE

REMON HABIB DRAFT

DESIGN MANUAL
&
Plan Preparation
Engineering Department
130 South Main Street
Lake Elsinore, California 92530
(951) 674-3124
August 2024 DRAFT

TABLE OF CONTENTS
Section I General Information ................................................................................. 1 Section II Parcel and Subdivision Maps ................................................................. 5 Section III Grading Plans ......................................................................................... 26 Section IV Improvement Plans ............................................................................... 57 Section V Traffic Plans ........................................................................................... 87 Section VI Miscellaneous Items .............................................................................. 98 Appendix .................................................................................................................... 100 DRAFT

SECTION I GENERAL INFORMATION
Introduction
This Design Manual has been prepared to assist subdividers, developers, civil engineers, and land surveyors in the processing of maps and the design of improvement plans in the City of Lake Elsinore. This Manual is intended as a guide in providing important and necessary information for preparing and processing these documents.

It is not the intent of this manual to anticipate all possible situations that may arise during the development process. Therefore, the standards and criteria developed within this Manual will not address every situation, but it is anticipated that the standards and criteria put forth in this Manual will apply in the majority of cases.

This Manual is divided into six (6) major sections plus the Appendix. These sections are entitled General Information, Tract and Parcel Maps, Grading Plans, Improvement Plans, Traffic, and Miscellaneous Items. Each section outlines the basic requirements and information that should be included as part of the plan set prior to submittal for City review. Checklists are included within each section to aid the user in plan preparation.

All improvement projects, whether public or private, shall be designed in accordance with this Design Manual. This information has been compiled to assist users in processing all plan checks efficiently, quickly, and accurately through the City. Failure to submit the minimum requirements will result in delays in the plan checking process.

Controlling Documents
The following documents have been used as the basis of the information provided within this Manual. The user should reference these documents whenever additional information is needed in the preparation of plans or calculations.

1. Subdivision Map Act: The current Subdivision Map Act takes precedence over all other documents and ordinances relative to the subdivision of land.

2. Subdivision Ordinance: The City Code expands, delineates, and regulates those items that the Subdivision Map Act allows the local jurisdiction to regulate.

3. Grading Ordinance: City of Lake Elsinore Ordinances 801, 882, 1021, and this manual shall govern grading, erosion control, and plan preparation of grading plans.

4. City of Lake Elsinore Standard Plans, including latest revisions.

5. Riverside County Hydrology Manual: All hydrologic calculations done in the City of Lake Elsinore should be done using the methods outlined in this Hydrology Manual. Computer programs may be used to assist the user in preparation of calculation runoffs and hydraulic data for submittal.

6. Riverside County Flood Control and Water Conservation District Design Manual Standard Drawings: All flood control devices should be referenced to the standards and information within these drawings.

7. Other documents referred to within this Manual include the following:
• Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction (Latest Edition) DRAFT • State of California, Department of Transportation, Standard Plans and Standard Specifications (Latest Edition)
• California Building Code (Latest Edition)
• International Building Code (Latest Edition)
• California Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices (CA MUTCD) (Latest Edition)
• Federal MUTCD (latest Edition)
Definitions
The definitions listed in this section are in addition to those listed in the Subdivision Map Act and the Subdivision Ordinance.

1. Legal Lot: Is a parcel established or set forth by one of the following means:
a. A deed describing the property recorded prior to March 4, 1972. b. A recorded subdivision map or parcel map.
c. Either of the above combined with a City approved and recorded boundary adjustment plat.

NOTE: A parcel is not necessarily a legal parcel just because there is an Assessor’s parcel number assigned to it.

2. Tentative Map: The tentative subdivision or parcel map is an official submittal depicting the overall development contemplated. Upon approval by the City, the tentative subdivision (parcel) map constitutes an agreement between the developer and the City.

3. Final Map: Is a map that delineates the boundary of the subdivision by bearings and distances, indicating the procedure of survey, and establishes the boundary of each lot within the subdivision.

Plan Submittal Check Lists
The following sections include check lists that should be used in verifying that the submittal is a complete package in order to avoid delays in the checking procedure.

Reminder: Failure to submit the minimum requirements will result in delays in the plan checking process. DRAFT

SECTION II PARCEL AND SUBDIVISION MAPS
Parcel Maps
A parcel map procedure is used to create a division or consolidation of land under the provisions of the Subdivision Map Act and the Subdivision Ordinance. Both a tentative parcel map and a final parcel map are required. However, under some circumstances, the requirements for a tentative parcel map may be waived by the Planning Manager and the City Engineer, who have joint responsibility for the processing and approval of tentative parcel maps. A tentative map shows existing topography, boundaries, and improvements (100 ft. beyond the project boundary including driveways, etc., located across the street from the project) plus any proposed changes. An example of when the requirement to submit a tentative parcel map might be waived would be when all public improvements have already been installed, no grading is proposed, and the only changes proposed are changes to lot line or boundaries. The City Engineer shall determine if a tentative parcel map will be waived. If waived, a letter from the City Engineer placing conditions on the subdivision will be sent to the subdivider in the same manner as if conditionally approving a tentative parcel map.

The following shall apply to all Parcel Maps:

1. Parcels. All parcels created or divided by parcel maps shall conform to City standards and no existing building or structure shall be made non- conforming with respect to yard or other zoning requirements by the process.

2. Easements. No existing easement in favor of the public shall be rendered impractical by the creation of a parcel on any parcel map.

3. Improvements. The design and construction of required improvements shall conform to the criteria and standards contained in this Manual and dictated by local ordinance.

4. Improvement Agreement/Security Instruments. A parcel map improvement agreement similar to a subdivision improvement agreement may be required for improvements in conjunction with parcel maps. Said agreements, along with security instruments, shall be fully executed prior to recordation of parcel map.

5. Final parcel maps shall be prepared either by a registered Civil Engineer with a license number of 33965 or less or a licensed land surveyor.

Tentative Parcel Maps
The following checklist provides an outline of the information required on the tentative parcel map.

Checklist for Tentative Parcel Maps
A. GENERAL

1. Fees deposited

2. Reproducible and copies submitted per Submittal Sheet in Section I, along with copies of current Grand Deeds

3. Drawn on linen, polyester base film, or vellum with black waterproof drawing ink or pencil. Lettering or type to be a minimum of 1/8 inch in height DRAFT

4. All sheets should be 18” x 26” (minimum) to 24” x 36” (maximum) with one-inch margins

5. Scale: 1” = 100’ minimum (shown graphically) with North Arrow

6. Notification List and associated items
B. MARGINAL INFORMATION

1. Title: “Tentative Parcel Map”

2. Legal description sufficient to define boundaries – division of or consolidation of property

3. Tax Assessor’s Parcel Number(s)

4. Owner’s name, address, telephone number and signature

5. Applicant’s name, address, telephone number (if other than owner)

6. Civil engineer’s or land surveyor’s name, address, telephone number and registration or license number

7. Source of water supply

8. Method of sewage disposal

9. Zoning – existing and proposed, including all adjacent parcels

10. Proposed usage of each parcel, including all adjacent parcels

11. Gross area (acres and square feet)

12. Reference to topographic source and date

13. Grading – statement if no grading proposed

14. Date of preparation and number, and dates of any revision

15. Vicinity map with north arrow and scale indicated
C. MAP INFORMATION

1. North arrow with graphic scale shown (1” = 100’ minimum)

2. Boundaries
a. Fully dimensioned (approximations)
b. Proposed as solid line, existing as dashed lines
c. City – County boundaries identified
d. Curve information (approximate) including deltas, radii, and lengths

3. Inundation lines for design flood

4. The following “existing” information shall be shown within the parcel(s) boundaries and within at least 100 feet of the boundaries thereof:
a. Highways, streets, roads – names, grades, widths (all private roads shall be designated and labeled as such)
b. Sidewalks, pavement, curbs and gutters, street light, driveways DRAFT c. Utilities:
1) Sewer lines – location, size, type, depth, manholes
2) Water lines – location, size, type
3) Gas lines – location, size
4) Electrical, telephone, and cable TV lines – location, size, type, poles, overhead or underground
d. Water Courses – widths, direction of flows
e. Buildings/structures – location with respect to lot lines f. Trees – groves, orchards, and trees of trunk diameter 4” or more g. Contours – maximum 5’ interval
h. Easements – location, purpose, size, public or private

5. The following “proposed” information shall be shown within the parcel(s) boundaries:
a. Highways, streets, roads –names, grades widths (all private roads shall be designated and labeled as such)
b. Sidewalks, pavement, curbs and gutters, street lights, driveways. c. Sewers – location, size, type, manhole locations
d. Drainage facilities
e. Removal or relocation of existing buildings and location of any proposed buildings f. Removal of existing trees of trunk diameter 4” or more g. Grading – degree of slope, benches, retaining walls, pad elevations h. Easements – location, purpose, size, public or private i. Parcel:
1) Approximate dimensions
2) Numbered in consecutive order
3) Net area of each parcel (acres or square feet)
4) Gross area of each parcel (acres or square feet)
Parcel Maps
The parcel map is the formalization of the approved tentative parcel map. Upon recordation, it officially and legally divides or consolidates parcels. The checklist provided below outlines the information required on the final parcel map.

Checklist for Parcel Maps
A. GENERAL

1. Fees deposited

2. Original and prints submitted per Submittal Sheet in Section I

3. Drawn on linen, polyester base film, or vellum with black, waterproof drawing ink or pencil. Lettering or typing to be a minimum of 1/8 inch in height. DRAFT

4. All sheets shall be 18” x 26” with one-inch margins

5. Proof of Ownership – deed and title report submitted

6. Copies of easements submitted

7. Copies of traverses and closures submitted

8. Reference maps submitted

9. Marginal line – medium heavy, 1” inside trim line
B. MARGINAL INFORMATION/FORMAT

1. “Parcel Map No. ____” boldly shown at upper top of sheet

2. Scale: 1” = 100’ minimum (shown graphically) with North arrow

3. Vicinity map with North arrow and scale indicated

4. “Sheet ___ of ___sheet(s)” shown

5. Parcel map – division of consolidation of land, legal description and map referenced

6. Basis of bearings indicated

7. City Engineer’s Certificate shown

8. City Surveyor’s Certificate shown (as appropriate)

9. Surveyor’s Certificate shown with appropriate signature and seal or Engineer’s signature and seal shown

10. Recorder’s Certificate
C. MAP DATA

1. Boundary around parcel(s) – heavy solid black line three (3) times thicker than interior parcel lines

2. Each parcel numbered

3. City and County boundary lines adjoining (or in vicinity) shown

4. Existing streets – names, widths, side lines shown as solid lines

5. Recorded maps identified by map name, number and with lots and blocks shown in “phantom letters”

6. Adjacent lot or block lines shown in dashed lines

7. Section, ¼ sections, or portions thereof identified in “phantom letters”

8. References in legal description fully identified on map

9. Mathematical data
a. Traverses include exterior boundaries, each parcel, streets and easements. b. All bearings, distances, radii and deltas of traverses shown on map c. Traverses close (1’:10,000’ if boundary)
d. Sum of parts of any line or curve must equal total length e. Area calculations furnished where required DRAFT

10. Record bearings, distances, and references in parentheses for:
a. Latest record map in disagreement with survey
b. Any deed data in disagreement with survey

11. Lines intersecting curves identified by bearing and whether (radial) or (not- radial)

12. Easements:
a. Identified as to private or proposed, width and purpose b. Side lines shown as light dash lines
c. Recorded easements identified by document number and date of recordation d. Fully dimensioned to include sufficient ties to locate e. Drainage easements should include the note: “Drainage Easements will be kept clear of all obstructions. No buildings or walls should be placed within easement limits. Temporary improvements are subject to removal at the owner’s expense.”

13. Previously vacated streets or easements shown as light dash lines with recorded vacation data

14. Additional notes shown on map:
a. To clarify survey or explain discrepancies
b. To reference non-recorded information such as City ties, road surveys, State Highway maps, etc.
c. Improvement Certificate

15. Legend:
a. All abbreviations used on map defined
b. Monumentation symbols

16. Monumentation
a. Monuments per legend or fully described as to type, size, disc and engineer’s or surveyor’s registration number
b. Labeled as “No Record” or referenced to record map
c. If controlling location not of record: “No Record – Accepted Hereon As (describe callout location)”
d. Monuments tied into survey by bearing and distance, or “Used For Line Only”. No floating monuments.

17. Inundation/seismic lines shown and identified

18. Ensure that Parcel map complies with:
a. General Plan
b. Zoning requirements
c. Tentative parcel map
d. All conditions imposed for parcel map approval
D. SEPARATE DEEDS, EASEMENTS: DRAFT

1. Prepared, signed and submitted

2. Recording fees submitted

3. Approved by City Council

4. Recorded with County Recorder
DRAFT

SUBDIVISION MAPS
Tentative Maps
The tentative subdivision map is made for the purpose of depicting the overall development contemplated. While not precise in detail, such as pavement structural section, it is specific in those items which can be predetermined such as street dimensions and right-of-way. Upon approval by the City, the tentative subdivision map constitutes an agreement between the developer and the City relative to approximate subdivision design to include its grading, zoning, and public improvements. All subsequent work by the developer and his engineer is based on the understanding reached at the tentative map stage. The tentative map should be as complete and specific as reasonably possible.

The tentative map is filed with the Planning Department and reviewed by both the Planning Commission and the City Council. The Commission acts in the capacity of an advisory body to the Council.

The following checklist provides an outline of the information required on the tentative map. All fees specified by the current fee schedule shall be paid at the time of filing a tentative map.

Checklist for Tentative Maps
A. GENERAL

1. Fees deposited

2. Reproducible and copies submitted per Submittal Sheet in Section I

3. Drawn on linen, polyester base film, or vellum with black waterproof drawing ink or pencil. Lettering or type to be a minimum of 1/8 inch in height

4. All sheets shall be 18” x 26” (minimum) to 36” x 60” (maximum) with one-inch margins

5. Associated maps, Reports, Statements and Exhibits
a. Preliminary Title Report (2 copies)
b. Preliminary Soils Report (2 copies)
c. Geological Report (1 copy), if required*
d. Scenic Highways Proposal (1 copy), if required*
e. Development Standards (1 copy), if required*
f. Affirmative Fair Marketing Plan (1 copy) for developments of 50 or more lots/units* g. Preliminary hydrology study
h. Condominium conversions:
1) Landscape concept plan (1 copy), also see (a) below DRAFT 2) Building elevations (1 copy), also see (a) and (b) below 3) Site plan (1 copy), also see (a) and (b) below
4) Floor plans (1 copy), also see (b) below
5) Statement on utilities and meters (1 copy)
6) CC&Rs (1 copy)
7) Stamped self-addressed envelope of each tenant (3 sets) 8) Evidence of notification of intent to convert given to tenants 60 days prior to filing of tentative map
*Not required for condominium conversions
Plus one colored copy
Plus one copy reduced to 8-1/2” x 11” or other approved reduction B. MARGINAL INFORMATION

1. Title: “Tentative Map for (subdivision name)” (Use Unit numbers when applicable)

2. Legal description sufficient to define boundaries – division of or consolidation of property

3. Tax Assessor’s Parcel Number(s)

4. Owner’s name, address, telephone number and signature

5. Subdivider’s name, address, telephone number

6. Civil engineer’s name, address, telephone number and registration or license number

7. Source of water supply

8. Method of sewage disposal

9. Gross area (acres or square feet)

10. Total number of lots

11. Total number of each type of lot (Residential, Open Space, etc.)

12. Area devoted to each proposed use

13. Minimum, Maximum and Average lot size

14. Present and Proposed Zoning

15. Present and Proposed Use(s)

16. Date of preparation and number and dates of any revision DRAFT

17. Drainage and Flood Control Measures

18. Vicinity map with north arrow and scale indicated
C. MAP INFORMATION

1. North arrow with graphic scale shown (1” = 100’ minimum)

2. Boundaries
a. Fully dimensioned (approximations)
b. Proposed as solid line, existing as dashed lines
c. City – County boundaries identified
d. Adjacent lands owned, leased, or under option by the subdivider shown e. References to Adjacent Recorded maps by Name, Type and Number

3. The following “existing” information shall be shown within the parcel(s) boundaries and within at least 100 feet of the boundaries thereof:
a. Contours: Maximum Two (2) foot intervals to extend 100 feet beyond Subdivision boundaries and to include total ownership
b. Highways, streets, roads – names, grades, widths (all private roads shall be designated and labeled as such)
c. Sidewalks, pavement, curbs and gutters, street light, driveways d. Utilities:
1) Sewer lines – location, size, type, manholes with invert and rim elevations shown
2) Water lines – location, size, type
3) Gas lines – location, size
4) Electrical, telephone, and cable TV lines – location, size, type, poles, overhead or underground
a. Water Courses – widths, direction of flows
b. Buildings/structures – location or relocation with respect to lot lines, size, and shape (to scale)
c. Trees – groves, orchards, and trees of trunk diameter 4” or more DRAFT d. Easements – locations, purpose, size, public or private e. Drainage Improvements – locations, size and type
f. Inundation line for the design storm

4. The following “proposed” information shall be shown within the tentative tract boundaries:
a. Highways, streets, roads – names, grades, widths (all private roads shall be designated and labeled as such) along with typical cross section of each street. All curve data, cul-de-sac radii, and connections to existing streets shall be included b. Sidewalks, pavement, curbs and gutters, street light, driveways, bicycle paths, riding and hiking trails, and pedestrian way (as applicable) c. Sewers – location, size, type, manholes numbered, invert and rim elevations shown and access to all manholes
d. Drainage improvements – location, type and size
e. Removal or relocation of existing buildings and location of any proposed buildings f. Removal of existing trees of trunk diameter 4” or larger g. Grading – degree of slope, benches, retaining walls, brown ditches, pad elevations including Off-Site (slope rights must be obtained from the effected property owner) h. Easements – locations, purpose, size, public or private Final Subdivision Maps
Final subdivision maps are processed by the Engineering Department which is responsible for distribution to other departments. Final maps are not reviewed by the Planning Commission. Time limitations for submissions and processing are contained in the Subdivision Map Act.

A. The items below shall be submitted along with the Final Map. The final subdivision map shall not be considered until all documents and plans supporting the subdivision have been submitted and the required fees have been paid. These documents include (but are not limited to) the following:

1. Proof of Ownership (Title Report, dated within 60 days of map approval)

2. Copies of deeds, deed restrictions, and easements

3. Traverse and closure sheets

4. Hydraulic and hydrology computations

5. Soils Report DRAFT

6. Grading Plans (if required)

7. Design data and/or calculations of special structures

8. Engineer’s Estimate based on City’s cost rates

9. Improvement Plans (if required)

10. Other items as specified by City Council in approval of tentative map

11. Reference Maps. Copy of Approved Tentative Map and Conditions of Approval.

B. Additional submissions required prior to Council consideration. At least twenty-one (21) days in advance of the date scheduled for Council consideration of the final map, all required fees and assessments shall be paid and the following documents shall be filed by the subdivider with the City Engineer. All such documents shall be reviewed and approved by the City Engineer, fully executed and complete in all respects, at the time of filing.

1. Improvement Agreement(s), City signatures not required

2. Bonds or request for delayed bonding procedure

3. Easements for all off-site improvements

4. Any other required deeds and/or easements

5. Signatures required prior to Council consideration – Title Sheet. At least twenty-one (21) days in advance of the date scheduled for Council consideration, the title sheet shall be fully executed except for certificates by the City Clerk, City Engineer, and County Recorder.

The following checklist provides an outline of the information required on the subdivision map. All fees specified by the current fee schedule shall be paid at the time of filing a subdivision map.

Checklist for Final Subdivision Maps
A. GENERAL

1. Map Check deposited

2. Reproducible and copies submitted per Submittal Sheet in Section I

3. Supporting documents submitted:
a. Proof of Ownership
b. Traverse sheets

4. Improvement and grading plans submitted

5. Drafting requirements – all sheets DRAFT
a. Size: 18” x 26”
b. Drawn with black waterproof drawing ink
c. Drawn on polyester base film. All lettering or type to be a minimum of 1/8 inch in height
d. 1” margin with medium-heavy marginal line
e. “Tract (or Parcel as applicable) Map No. _____” at top of sheet f. “Sheet _____ of _____ sheets” inside upper right hand margin g. “Reversion to Acreage” or “Amended,” if applicable
h. Unit number, if applicable
B. TITLE SHEET – CERTIFICATES (SHEET 1)

1. Legal description

2. Number of lots. Each type and total

3. Gross acreage

4. Certificates, as appropriate
a. The certificate for those signers requiring embossing seals such as the City Clerk b. The description of what is offered for dedication or as easements in the Owner’s Certificate shall agree with what is accepted (or rejected) in the ‘City Clerk’s Certificate
c. All signatures must be signed in black waterproof ink and dated within authorized time periods
C. PROCEDURE OF SURVEY AND INDEX SHEET

1. Marginal information
a. Vicinity map with north arrow and scale indicated
b. Civil engineer or land surveyor’s certificate with signature and seal c. Other certificates which would not fit on Sheet 1
d. Legend with all symbols identified
e. Basis of Bearings
f. General Notes: DRAFT
1) Total number of lots
2) Gross area in square feet or acres

2. Procedure of Survey
a. Scale: 1” = 200’ or as required
b. North arrow shown
c. Legend:
1) Sheet coverage/Index
2) Identify sheet numbers
3) Show subdivision, City-County boundaries, etc.
d. All monuments identified
e. All lots shown and numbered
f. All streets shown and identified
g. Record maps, section, ¼ sections identified
h. References to legal description fully identified
i. Bearings, distances, radii, and deltas shown for subdivision boundaries and ties j. Record bearings, distances and references shown in parenthesis for:
1) Latest record map in disagreement with survey, and
2) Any deed data in disagreement with survey
k. Tied to California Coordinate System, Zone VI, if pertinent D. MAP SHEETS

1. Scale: 1” = 100’ (minimum) with graphical scale shown, or as required to show all details

2. North arrow

3. Subdivision boundary – heavy solid line approximately 1/16 inch wide with coincident blue boundary on reverse side

4. Each lot numbered

5. Each block numbered or lettered DRAFT

6. City-County boundaries shown and identified

7. Adjacent lot or block lines shown in dashed lines

8. Existing streets – names, widths, side lines shown as solid lines

9. Recorded maps identified by map name, number and with lots and blocks shown in “phantom letters”

10. Adjacent lot or block lines shown in dashed lines

11. Sections, ¼ sections, or portions thereof identified in “phantom letters”

12. Record bearings, distances and reference in parenthesis for:
a. Latest record map in disagreement with survey
b. Any deed data in disagreement with survey

13. Lines intersecting curves identified by bearing and whether (radial) or (not- radial)

14. Easements:
a. Identified as to private or proposed, width and purpose b. Side lines shown as light dashed lines
c. Recorded easements identified by document number and date of recordation

15. Previously vacated streets or easements shown as light dashed lines with recorded vacation data

16. Inundation/seismic lines shown and identified

17. Tree planting and maintenance easements shown on dedicated streets

18. Areas “Not A Part of Subdivision” clearly delineated

19. Lettered lots:
a. Lots reserved for parks and open space
b. Lots reserved for utility facilities

20. Abutter’s rights of access relinquished shown as required

21. Mathematical data:
a. Traverses include exterior boundaries, each parcel and streets and easements b. All bearings, distances, radii, and deltas of traverses shown on map DRAFT c. Traverses close (1’ = 10,000 of perimeter)
d. Sum of parts of any line or curve must equal total length e. Area calculations furnished, where required

22. All abbreviations used on map defined in Legend

23. Monumentation:
a. Monuments per legend or fully described as to type, size, disc and engineer’s or surveyor’s number
b. Labeled as “No Record” or referenced to record map
c. If location not of record: “No Record – Accepted Hereon as (describe callout location)”
d. Monuments tied into survey by bearing and distance, or “Used for Line Only.” No floating monuments.

24. Additional notes shown on map
a. To clarify survey or explain discrepancies
b. To reference non-recorded information such as City ties, road surveys, state highway maps, etc.

25. Map complies with:
a. General Plan
b. Zoning requirements
c. Tentative Map
d. All conditions imposed for tentative map approval

26. Separate deeds, easements:
a. Prepared, signed and submitted
b. Recording fees submitted
c. Approved by City Council
d. Recorded with County Recorder DRAFT

SECTION III GRADING PLANS
General
All grading improvements shall be done in accordance with the City of Lake Elsinore Grading Ordinance No. 636, Ordinance No. 801, Ordinance No. 882, Ordinance No. 1271, and the standards outlined within this section of the Design Manual.

Note: Grading Ordinances referenced Uniform Building Code (U.B.C.) which since have been replaced with the latest edition of the California Building Code (C.B.C.) and International Building Code (I.B.C.).

Plans submitted for checking shall be complete sets and include all supporting documentation and calculations to enable a thorough review to be done. All plans and calculations shall be stamped and signed by a registered engineer. Incomplete submittals will be returned to the engineer unchecked.

Documentation shall include all necessary easement documents; offsite letters of acceptance and copies of adjoining tract plans wherever necessary to ensure compatibility. Calculations shall include hydrology (existing and proposed) along with hydraulic calculation showing the adequacy of proposed drainage facilities to safely and effectively control runoff.

A complete set of erosion control plans shall be submitted showing all necessary devices needed to control erosion of the graded site during construction.

Plan Preparation
In order to obtain uniformity and allow easier review of the plan, the following criteria shall apply to all plans submitted:

1. The maximum plan size shall be 24” x 36”, ink on mylar and minimum scale 1” = 40’.

All lettering shall be 1/8” minimum.

2. Use County Benchmarks, give elevations, location, benchmark number and adjustment date.

3. Show property address.

4. Indicate the Tentative Tract or Parcel Map file numbers and Site Plan numbers.

Indicate site address. Indicate purpose of grading in title block (e.g., rough, precise).

5. Show vicinity map or other data adequately indicating the site location.

6. Show name, address and telephone number of owner, design engineer (or architect), soils engineer and geologist.

7. Show key map indicating sheet coverage.

8. Show yardage of cut, fill, over excavation and backfill, export and import on plan.

9. Add “Engineer’s Notice” to title sheet. (Refer to Appendix) DRAFT

10. Show construction notes and quantities for on-site development.

11. Add “Soil Engineer’s Certificate” to title sheet. (Refer to Appendix)

12. A Registered Civil Engineer must sign each sheet of plans and indicate a state license number, prior to submittal. Unsigned plans will not be accepted for plan checking.

13. Show and label property lines of the property on which the work is to be performed.

14. Show North arrow, scale, legend and symbols.

15. Show precise location of all existing buildings, structures, trees, cesspools, septic tank and wells on the property where the work is to be performed. Also show the location of any buildings or structures on the land of adjacent property owners that are within fifteen (15) feet.

16. Indicate all existing and proposed easements for drainage devices, roadways and utilities.

17. Show accurate contours (minimum 5’ intervals) or spot elevations indicating the topography of the existing ground. Sufficient contours or spot elevations must be shown fifteen (15) feet minimum beyond the property line of the site being graded to indicate existing drainage patterns.

18. Show finish grades by contours and spot elevations indicating proposed drainage patterns and grading. Show finish grade elevations at corners of all structures, B.C., E.C., BVC, EVC and grade breaks. For precise grading plans, show pad and finished floor elevations.

19. Show daylight lines of all cuts and fills. Make them continuous and obvious.

20. Indicate where excess dirt (cut or import) is to be placed.

21. Provide berms at the tops of all slopes. Show detail (minimum 12 inches high and 4 feet wide). No sheet flow will be allowed over slopes greater than 5 to 1.

22. Show all applicable Standard Grading and Paving Notes on the plans.

23. Show building or structure setbacks as per approved site plan.

24. Provide complete hydrology and hydraulic report as required. Refer to Section IV for storm drainage requirements.

25. Show complete details of all drainage structures.

26. Show details of typical lot drainage.

27. Show location and complete details of de-silting basins.

28. Show top and toe of all cut and fill slopes. DRAFT

29. Show details of typical slope.

30. Show details of typical slope benching for fill placement.

31. Show sub-drainage systems on plans.

32. Indicate City Grading Permit Number on first sheet of grading plans.

33. Provide right of entry for any grading on adjacent properties. Permission must be in letter form signed and notarized by adjacent property owner.

34. Show quantity estimate of all items to be constructed per the grading plan and requiring inspection, i.e., drainage devices, retaining walls, etc.

35. All existing drainage courses on the project site must continue to function, especially during storm conditions. Protective measures and temporary drainage provisions must be used to protect adjoining properties during grading operations.

36. The WDID number will be shown in the bottom right corner of the title sheet and a copy of the letter shall be provided.

37. If storm drain system is required, those plans will be referenced and if necessary, the following note shall be added to the title sheet:
“The storm drains shown hereon must be built concurrently with grading operations. The storm drain details are
shown on the plans. The storm drains
shown thereon should be considered as part of these plans.”

38. Pay particular attention to setback requirements as outlined in the C.B.C., Section J108.

39. Certificate of approval of the City of Lake Elsinore Engineer shall appear on all sheets in the following form:
“These plans have been reviewed for compliance with
the appropriate conditions of development and/or city
and state laws, and a permit may be issued.”
City Engineer RCE# Expiration Date
Soil Report
A soil engineering report shall be prepared for each grading project by a licensed soils engineer.

The soil engineering report shall include data regarding the nature, distribution and strength of existing soils, conclusions and recommendations for grading procedures and design criteria for corrective measures when necessary, and opinions and recommendations covering adequacy of sites to be developed by the proposed grading.

The report should include compaction recommendations regarding fills, base materials beneath DRAFT pavements, sidewalks, and in trenches. The report should also provide a recommendation of all the required pavement sections.

Should the project require cast-in-place pipe, the report must address design issues associated with this type of pipe.

DRAFT
Design Criteria
Drainage

1. Minimum gradients for residential sites:

Dirt, grass, etc. ............................................................. 1.0% Fine graded residential lot – dirt ................................... 2.0% sheet flow away from building pad for minimum
of three (3) feet
Asphalt concrete .......................................................... 1.0% Concrete ...................................................................... 0.5% Concrete gutter in paved area ..................................... 1.0% Hillside single family residential
subdivision rear yard .................................................... 2.0% Rough graded hillside lots............................................ 2.0% Terrace drains .............................................................. 6.0% Interceptor drains ......................................................... 2.0%

2. Minimum gradients for flat land industrial sites:

Earth at rough grade stage .......................................... 0.5% Earth fine grade ........................................................... 1.0% Asphalt pavement (sheet flow) .................................... 1.0% Concrete drain in earth area ........................................ 0.5% Concrete gutter in paved area ..................................... 0.5% Maximum gradient for sheet flow ................................. 20.0% Maximum gradient for concentrated
water on developed lots ............................................... 4.0%

3. Design to carry water to nearest practical street, storm drain or natural watercourse.

Concentrated flows will not be allowed over curbs.

4. All concentrated flows shall be contained within a concrete drainage device.

5. Provide velocity reducers at storm drain outlets. (Refer to City Standard Plan No. 305 for Rip Rap Energy Dissipater.)

6. Provide cut-off walls at inlet end of paved drains. DRAFT

7. Design and show locations of interceptor drains.

8. Drainage shall not flow over the top edge of any slope.

9. For residential lots, swales shall be three (3) feet minimum horizontal distance from pad.

10. Drainage of reciprocal side yard lots shall not cross over fence lines.

Slopes
Provide setbacks outlined in Grading Code and shown on approved site plan. Note permit area boundary and C.B.C. setbacks. Cut and fill slopes to be no greater than 2 horizontal and 1 vertical.

Drainage shall be directed away from the faces of cut and fill slopes or into approved drainage structures. The faces of cut and fill slopes shall also be manufactured to control against erosion.

This control may consist of stepping or other surface protection, as approved by the City Engineer.

The protection for the slopes shall be installed within fifteen (15) days after completion of the rough grading.

Provide terrace drains and down drains for cut and fill slopes as outlined in the Grading Code.

Drains shall be constructed of three (3) inch minimum thickness concrete reinforced with 6” x 6” #10 welded wire mesh (W.W.M) or approved equal.

The surface of all cut slopes more than seven (7) feet in height, except those cut slopes adequately stabilized from erosion by stepping or other physical surface protection per item (2) above, and fill slopes more than three (3) feet in height shall be permanently protected against damage by erosion by planting with grass or ground-cover plants. It is required to install such vegetation upon completion of the rough grading in conjunction with the installation of temporary soil stabilization measures as specified above. Final approval of work shall be made after growth is established on the slopes. Slopes exceeding fifteen (15) feet in vertical height shall (as a minimum), also be planted with a seed and/or young plant mix containing grass, ground-cover plants, shrubs and/or trees that permanently protects the slope from erosion. Native and other plants selected, and planting methods used shall be suitable for the soil and climatic conditions of the site. Rationale for determination of seeding or planting rates and density and species selection shall be provided.

Slopes required to be planted shall be provided with an approved system of irrigation, designed to cover all portions of the slope, and plans therefore shall be submitted and approved prior to installation. A functional test of the system shall be required. All irrigation systems where required shall be designed on an individual lot basis unless commonly maintained in an approved manner.

Recommendations in the soils report and the City Grading Ordinance shall be incorporated into the design of any slope.

The following standard “Grading Notes” (as applicable) shall be placed on the plans:

GRADING NOTES

1. All work shall be done in accordance with the City of Lake Elsinore Municipal Code, Chapter 15.72 and applicable standards and specifications and the latest edition of the California Building Code (C.B.C.), Section J108. DRAFT

2. A permit shall be obtained from the Engineering Department, City of Lake Elsinore, prior to any operations.

3. The developer and/or the contractor shall notify all utility companies and U.S.A. ALERT (1-800-422-4133) forty-eight (48) hours prior to grading.

4. The contractor shall notify the City Engineering Department at least twenty-four (24) hours in advance of beginning grading operations.

5. Dust shall be controlled by watering or other methods approved by the City Engineer.

6. Cut slopes shall be no steeper than 2 horizontal to 1 vertical, unless otherwise approved, and shall be shown on the plan.

7. Fill slopes shall be no steeper than 2 horizontal to 1 vertical, unless otherwise approved, shall be shown on plan, and shall not have less than 90% relative compaction out to the finished surface.

8. Fills shall be compacted throughout to 90% density as determined by the modified three (3) layer A.S.T.M. D-1557-70 test method.

9. Fill areas shall be cleaned of all vegetation and debris, scarified, and inspected by the grading inspector and approved soils testing agency prior to the placing of fill.

10. All fill material shall be clean earth. No fill shall be placed until preparation of ground is approved by the soils engineer.

11. Finish grade shall be sloped away from all exterior walls at not less than ½” per foot for a minimum of three (3) feet, then 1% (minimum) to flow line of earth swale.

12. Minimum building pad and drainage swale slope shall be 1% if cut or fill slope is less than ten feet (10’), and 2% if cut or fill is greater than ten feet (10’). Drainage swales shall be a minimum of 0.5’ deep and constructed a minimum of two feet (2’) from the top of cut or fill slopes.

13. Provide 4’ wide by 1’ high berm or equivalent along the top of all fill slopes over 5’ high

14. Provide a brow ditch, designed to handle one hundred (100) year storm flows along the top of cut slopes.

15. No obstruction of flood plains or natural water courses shall be permitted.

16. A soils engineer shall be retained by the developer, to supervise grading and provide a final soils report which includes foundation requirements (subdivisions) and expansive characteristics of the soil.

17. Grading certification by the developer’s civil engineer and a final DRAFT compaction report by a soils engineer shall be submitted to the building and engineering departments prior to issuance of building permits.

18. The soils engineering investigation dated ____________ prepared by (engineer consultant) and the engineering geologic investigation dated ____________ prepared by (geologic consultant), shall be considered a part of this grading plan and shall be complied with.

19. A registered civil engineer or licensed land surveyor shall submit certification of building pad elevation. Where specific elevations are required, the elevation (with respect to mean sea level) shall be given. If an elevation with respect to adjacent ground surface is required, the actual distance above the adjacent ground shall be given.

20. All property corners shall be clearly delineated in the field prior to commencement of any construction/grading.

21. Stability calculations with a safety factor of at least 1.5 shall be submitted by a soils engineer to the Building and Engineering Departments for cut and fill slopes over thirty feet (30’) in vertical height.

22. A final compaction report will be required for all fills greater than one (1) foot.

23. If steep sloping terrain occurs upon which fill is to be placed, it must be cleared, keyed and benched into firm natural soil for full support.

Preparation shall be approved by a registered soils engineer prior to placement of fill material. Slopes greater than 5:1 are required to be keyed and benched.

24. The soils engineer should inspect the construction in the following stages:
a. Upon completion of clearing and during excavation and before backfill of alluvial, colluvial and terraced areas and any substructures. b. During all rough grading and operations including pre-compaction, benching and filling operations.
c. During installation of buttress and canyon sub-drains and filter material.
d. When any unusual grading conditions are encountered during construction.

25. Erosion Control: All graded slopes equal to or greater than 3 feet in vertical height shall be planted with rosea ice plant or another approved drought tolerant ground cover, at twelve inches (12”) on center. Slopes over fifteen feet (15’) in vertical height, in addition to ground cover, shall be planted with approved trees, shrubs or combination thereof. Shrubs shall be planted at ten feet (10’) on center; trees at twenty feet (20’) on center; combinations, fifteen feet (15’) on center. Slopes over three feet (3’) in vertical height shall have permanent irrigation systems with backflow prevention devices per C.B.C. DRAFT

26. Approved protective measures and temporary drainage provisions must be used to protect adjoining properties during the grading project.

27. Approved erosion preventive devices shall be provided and maintained during the rainy season and shall be in place at the end of each day’s work.

28. All work shall conform to the City and State construction safety orders.

29. The location and protection of all utilities is the responsibility of the permittee.

30. An approved set of grading plans shall be on the job site at all time.

31. Sanitary facilities shall be maintained on the site from beginning to completion of grading operation.

32. All slopes shall be planted, and irrigation facilities shall be provided for all slopes in excess of three (3) feet vertical height within ninety (90) days after completion of rough grading and shall be in accordance with City of Lake Elsinore Grading Ordinance No. 882 prior to the approval of final inspection.

33. Any contractor performing work on this project shall familiarize himself with the site and be solely responsible for any damage to existing facilities resulting directly or indirectly from his operations, whether or not such facilities are shown on these plans.

34. The design engineer shall provide a minimum of one (1) blue top per finished pad, prior to rough grade approval.

35. Approximate date of:

Beginning operation:

Completion:

36. No rock or other irreducible material with a maximum dimension greater than three inches (3”) will be placed in fills within roadbed areas or three feet (3’) of finish grades, unless the location, materials, and disposal methods are specifically approved by the soils engineer.

37. The engineer must set grade stakes for all drainage devices and obtain inspection before approval.

38. Grading plans will not be approved until all retaining walls are approved by the Building Department.

39. This site has obtained a National Pollution Prevention Elimination System (NPDES) permit to regulate municipal and industrial storm water discharges.

NPDES WDID # DATE PERMIT ISSUED:

40. Drainage easements will be kept clear of all obstructions. No buildings or DRAFT walls shall be placed within easement limits. Temporary improvements are subject to removal at the owner’s expense.

DRAFT
Erosion Control Notes
All erosion control plans shall be in accordance with City of Lake Elsinore Ordinance Nos.1237, 772, 529, 1004, construction site Best Management Practices (BMP’s) and standards outlined within the Lake Elsinore Design Manual. No grading permit shall be issued without an erosion control plan approved by the City Engineer. The erosion control plan shall include details of protective measures, including desilting basins or other temporary drainage or control measures, or both, as may be necessary to protect the water quality of receiving water bodies or to protect adjoining public and private property from damage from erosion, flooding or the deposition of mud or debris which may originate from the site or result from such grading operations. .

The following Erosion Control and NPDES notes as worded with blanks filled in, shall be placed on the plans:

1. All erosion control plans shall be in accordance with City of Lake Elsinore Ordinance Nos. 529, 772, 1237, 1004, construction site Best Management Practices (BMP’s), and standards outlined within the Lake Elsinore Design Manual.

2. The developer/contractor is responsible for any discharges by subcontractors.

3. In case of emergency, call (responsible person) at
(24-hour phone number).

4. Devices to reduce erosion damage shall not be placed, moved or modified without the approval of the Qualified SWPPP Developer, City Engineer, or in an emergency, by the person responsible for grading operations.

5. Areas that are cleared and graded shall be limited to only the portion of the site that is necessary for construction. The construction site shall be managed to minimize the exposure time of disturbed soil areas through phasing and scheduling of grading and the use of temporary and permanent soil stabilization.

6. Once disturbed, graded slopes exceeding a 3:1 ratio and/or ten (10) feet in height (temporary or permanent) shall be stabilized if they will not be worked within 7 days. During the storm season, all slopes shall be stabilized 24 hours prior to a predicted storm event. Construction sites shall be revegetated as early as feasible after soil disturbance and within 7-days of completion.

7. Fill slopes at the tract perimeter must drain away from the top of the slope at the conclusion of each working day.

8. The contractor shall be responsible and have signs posted on the site to warn against public trespassing into areas where water is impounded.

9. Dust shall be controlled by watering or other methods approved by the City Engineer.

10. Placement of devices to reduce erosion damage within the development shall be shown on the approved plan. DRAFT

11. Desilting facilities at all drainage inlets for the graded site shall be designed for a twenty-five (25) year, six (6) hour storm intensity. They must be detailed on the plans. Design and specific recommendations shall be submitted for the following:
a. Desilting basin volume based on gradient and nature of soils. b. The extent of all graded areas and identification of any temporary soil stabilization measures.
c. Size of desilting basin outlet pipe and overflow.
d. Dike requirements. Show minimum wall width, slope of walls, percent compaction, etc.
e. Outlet conditions from the desilting basin shall not exceed downstream limitations, with the exception of overflow, which is to be designed to provide capacity of 1.5 times the maximum design flow.

12. Necessary materials shall be available on-site and at convenient locations to facilitate rapid construction of temporary devices or to repair any damaged erosion control measures when a 50% chance or greater of rain within a 48-hour period is forecast for Lake Elsinore by the National Oceanic and Atmospheric Agency (NOAA).

13. BMPs shall be maintained and inspected daily to minimize and/or prevent the entrainment of soil in runoff from disturbed soil areas on Construction Sites. All removable protective erosion control devices shown shall be in place at the end of each working day when the four (4) day rain probability forecast exceeds forty percent (40%).

14. After a rainstorm, all project generated silt and debris shall be removed from check berms, onsite public drains and pipes, drains and pipes of adjacent properties and desilting basins and the basins pumped dry. Any graded slope BMP’s damaged during a rainstorm shall also be immediately repaired. Failure to provide effective maintenance may result in penalties.

15. Discharging of contaminated soil via surface erosion is prohibited.

16. Construction access points shall be stabilized with a combination of rock and shaker plates year-round to prevent track-out. Routine street sweeping shall be performed on all paved streets where tracking is observed. Vacuum sweepers shall be used when street sweeping becomes ineffective.

NPDES / Storm Water Pollution Notes

1. For projects that require coverage under the General Construction Permit, the property owner is responsible for ensuring that a Qualified SWPPP Practitioner (QSP) and Qualified SWPPP Developer (QSD) implement and maintain the SWPPP-approved, pre-qualified BMP’s from the California Storm water Quality Association (CASQA) handbook / website for construction to retain sediments and pollutants of concern from areas disturbed onsite to the maximum extent practicable during ANY phase of DRAFT construction operations. For all other projects, the property owner is responsible for ensuring that BMPs for construction are implemented to retain sediments and pollutants of concern from areas disturbed onsite to the maximum extent practicable. The erosion control measures include those shown on this plan as well as any additional erosion control measures dictated by field conditions to prevent erosion and/or the introduction of pollutants into existing public streets and/or onto adjacent properties during ANY phase of construction.

2. For projects that require coverage under the General Construction Permit, the Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan (SWPPP) shall be kept on-site and made available upon request of a representative of the Regional Water Quality Control Board (RWQCB) - Santa Ana Region and/or the City of Lake Elsinore.

3. Construction sites shall be maintained in such a condition that an anticipated storm does not carry wastes or pollutants off the site.

Discharges of material other than storm water (non-storm water) are prohibited except as authorized by an individual NPDES permit under the statewide General Permit – Construction Activity.

4. Potential pollutants include but are not limited to: solid or liquid chemical spills; wastes from paints, stains, sealants, solvents, detergents, glues, lime, pesticides, herbicides, fertilizers, wood preservatives, and asbestos fibers, paint flakes or stucco fragments; fuels, oils lubricants, and hydraulic, radiator or battery fluids; concrete and related cutting or curing residues; floatable wastes; wastes from engine/equipment steam cleaning or chemical degreasing; wastes from street cleaning; and superchlorinated potable water from line flushing and testing. During construction, disposal of such materials should occur in a specified and controlled temporary area on-site physically separated from potential storm water runoff, with ultimate disposal in accordance with local, state and federal requirements.

5. Runoff from equipment and vehicle washing shall be contained at construction site and must not be discharged to receiving waters or the local storm drain system.

6. Appropriate BMPs for construction-related materials, wastes, spills or residues shall be implemented to eliminate or reduce transport from the site to streets, drainage facilities, or adjoining properties by wind or runoff.

7. Material storage and staging areas shall be established. Fuel tank, portable toilets, liquids, gels and powders shall have secondary containment and be stored away from all private / public storm water conveyance systems, sidewalks, rights-of-ways and flow lines.

8. All portable mixers shall have plastic liners underneath with gravel bags placed on the down-hill side of the liners to contain discharges.

9. Controlled street washing will only be allowed prior to the application of asphalt seal coats and only when all pertinent drainage inlets are protected. DRAFT

10. All construction contractors and subcontractor personnel are to be made aware of the required BMPs and good housekeeping measures for the project site and any associated construction staging areas.

11. Discharging contaminated groundwater produced by dewatering groundwater that has infiltrated into the construction site is prohibited.

Discharging non- contaminated groundwater produced by dewatering activities may require a National Pollutant Discharge Elimination System (NPDES) permit from the Regional Water Quality Control Board.

12. Storm water runoff shall not be directed over any slopes without permanent down drains installed. Erosion and sediment controls including maintenance are required on all exposed slopes until sufficient permanent landscaping has been established. 100% slope protection must be in place prior to the issuance of the final certificate of occupancy.

13. Vegetation clearing and brushing activities shall not be initiated during the wet season on any sites which are not adequately protected with desilting basins or other temporary drainage or control measures.

14. Stockpiles of soil shall be properly secured with BMPs to eliminate or reduce sediment transport from the site to streets, drainage facilities or adjacent properties.

15. Stockpiles of soil shall be properly contained to eliminate or reduce sediment transport from the site to streets, drainage facilities or adjacent properties via runoff, vehicle tracking or wind. Inactive for a period of 14 days or more shall be covered; active stockpiles shall be covered prior to a forecasted rain.

16. For project requiring coverage under the Construction General Permit, special attention shall be given to preparation and installation of the Rain Event Action Plan (REAP) as required based on site Risk Level or as mandated by the Santa Ana Regional Board NPDES Permit, General Permit – Construction Activities.

17. At the end of each day of construction activity, all construction debris and waste materials shall be collected and properly disposed of in covered trash or covered recycle bins.

18. This site has obtained a National Pollution Prevention Elimination System (NPDES) permit to regulate municipal and industrial storm water discharges.

NPDES WDID # ___________________ DATE WDID ISSUED:

19. The undersigned civil engineer, a qualified QSP and/or QSD will review placement of erosion control and insure that work is in accordance with the approved plans.
_________________________________________________________ (Signature) (RCE No.) (Exp) (Date) DRAFT
DRAFT

TYPICAL SANDBAG DETAILS
DRAFT
DRAFT
DRAFT

TABLE A

SPACING OF ROWS OF SANDBAGS
Slope of Street Paved Street Unpaved Street
10% or more 25 ft 25 ft 3 courses
18 in. high min.

9.9% to 8% 50 ft 35 ft 3 courses
18 in. high min.

7.9% to 6% 75 ft 50 ft 1 ft high min.

5.9% to 4% 100 ft 74 ft 1 ft high min.

3.9% or less 100 ft 100 ft 1 ft high min.

DRAFT

DEBRIS BASIN DETAIL
DRAFT
DRAFT

DEBRIS BASIN RISER DETAIL
DRAFT
DRAFT
Checklist for Grading Plans
A. GENERAL

1. Fees

2. Blue line prints submitted

3. Supporting data/calculations submitted
a. Soils report(s)
b. Drainage calculations
c. Structural calculations
d. Geology report(s), if applicable
e. Seismic report(s), if applicable
f. Landscape plan
g. Irrigation plan
h. Application for Land Development Permit
i. Letters of permission/easements
j. Engineer’s estimate

4. Drafting requirements (each sheet):
a. Prepare on 24” x 36” mylar sheets
b. Sheet format – See Sheet A-1 of Appendix
c. Drawn with black waterproof drawing ink
d. All lettering to be a minimum of 1/8” in height
e. Sheets numbered consecutively with total number of sheets indicated f. Civil engineer’s signature and registration number on each sheet g. Title block on each sheet to contain:
1) Title: Grading Plan
2) Designation of subdivision, if applicable
3) Location or extent of grading
h. Benchmark description DRAFT
B. COVER SHEET

1. Vicinity map with north arrow and scale indicated

2. Key map
a. North arrow
b. Scale: 1” = 200’
c. Shows general plan of subdivision with subdivision boundary, streets and lots identified
d. Show each adjacent subdivisions and connecting streets e. Show each sheet coverage
f. Legend identifies all symbols used
g. Drainage facilities
h. Direction of drainage flow

3. Work to be done (general notes, notification notes, grading/landscaping notes) and Soils Engineer’s Certificate

4. Street cross-sections:
a. Each street represented
b. Dimensions – right-of-way, sidewalks, medians, easements, etc. c. Rough grade line shown with width and depth of grading d. Side slopes (2:1 minimum cut, 2:1 minimum fill)

5. Legend identifies all symbols used

6. Details shown as necessary

7. Approvals by other agencies, as applicable
a. WDID number
b. SWPPP reference

8. Amounts of excavation, fill, cut, waste, import in cubic yards.

9. Show typical lot drainage. (Precise Grading Only.)

10. Certification of approval of the City of Lake Elsinore Engineer, shall appear on all sheets in the following form: DRAFT
“These plans have been reviewed for compliance with the appropriate conditions of development and/or City and State laws, and a permit can be issued.”
___________________________________________
City Engineer RCE # Expiration Date
C. GRADING SHEETS

1. Boundary lines shown:
a. City-County boundaries
b. Subdivision boundaries
c. Right-of-way lines
d. Lot lines dimensioned
e. Lot lines of adjacent properties
f. Utility easements
g. Tree planting and maintenance easements

2. Contours (extend at least fifty feet (50’) beyond limits of grading) a. Existing contours shown
b. Finish grade contours shown

3. Lots
a. Numbered
b. Building pads shown with pad elevations
c. Parking areas shown
d. Sufficient elevations flagged to show slope of lots and portions of lots e. Driveway slopes (precise grade)
f. Centerline station and width of driveway

4. Grading
a. Slopes:
1) Cut slopes – 2:1 maximum DRAFT
2) Fill slopes – 2:1 maximum (shaded)
3) Slope ratios shown
4) Daylight line(s) shown
5) Off-site grading shown with reference to authority (letters of permission, etc.) b. Setbacks (per C.B.C. requirements)

5. Drainage:
a. Existing drainage facilities shown
b. Future drainage facilities (not a part of grading)
c. Drainage facilities to be built with grading plans, show:
1) Location
2) Type, size, gauge (strength)
3) Details as necessary
4) Elevations, grades, direction of flow
5) Easements
6) Streets, show:

A) Names and dimensions
B) Direction of street drainage
C) Percent of slope
D) Elevations at intersections

6. Typical Sections
a. Brow ditches
b. Berms or swale at top of slopes
c. Terrace drains when H>30’ should be 6’ wide and 5% minimum slope

7. Storm Drains
a. Show size and locations of all pipes and inlets.
b. Reference plan set (if not part of grading plans) where storm drain information can be found. Refer to Plan Preparation note 37 in this section. DRAFT D. LANDSCAPE/SLOPE PLANTING AND IRRIGATION PLANS

1. Landscaping plans
a. Prepared by State licensed landscape architect or professional landscape designer b. Show location, size and quantities of all plantings
c. Give botanical and common names
d. Specific soil amendments and fertilizer requirements per 1,000 s.f. e. Type, amount and spacing of living ground cover
f. Tree staking details:
1) 2 redwood stakes (2” x 2” x 8’) per tree
2) 3 ties per tree
g. Tree planting details:
1) Tree hold to be two (2) times the diameter of container 2) Backfill one (1) part soil amendment to two (2) parts existing soil 3) Tree planted 1”-2” higher in ground than in container 4) Bands around all trees and shrubs
5) Fifteen (15) gallon (minimum) trees in parkways
6) Five (5) gallon (minimum) shrubs adjacent to streets

2. Irrigation plans to include:
a. Meter location
b. Points of connection
c. Size and type of atmospheric vacuum breaker (6” above highest irrigation line) d. Size and location of valves
e. Location of automatic control station, if applicable f. Irrigation lines:
1) Size, location, type of pipe
2) Pressure line under AC pavement: PVC schedule: 40 or equal 3) Minimum pressure line depth = 18” DRAFT
4) Minimum irrigation line depth = 12”
5) Static water pressure indicated
6) Irrigation heads identified by type, manufacturer, model, psi, gpm DRAFT

SECTION IV IMPROVEMENT PLANS
General
All improvements are to be constructed in accordance with the Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction, special provisions and the appropriate standard plan or other approved agency standard drawings.

Each sheet of the improvement plans submitted for approval shall be signed and sealed by a Registered Civil Engineer. Plans submitted for checking shall be complete in all phases of design. Incomplete plans will not be accepted for checking purposes.

Any named travel way shall be a street. If developers desire a street to have a name, it must be constructed to City standards.

Private streets are discouraged and will only be allowed when approved in advance by the Planning Commission and the City Engineer. Private streets shall be constructed to City standards for private streets.

Sewer Improvements
All sewer lines within the City of Lake Elsinore are the responsibility of the Elsinore Valley Municipal Water District and all plans should be consistent with their standards and specifications. All sewer improvements shall be submitted through the Elsinore Valley Municipal Water District for plan check and approval. Plans should be approved by the City Engineer prior to issuance of encroachment permit.

Water Improvements
All water lines within the City of Lake Elsinore are the responsibility of either the Elsinore Valley Municipal Water District or the Elsinore Water District and all plans should be consistent with their standards and specifications. All water improvements shall be submitted through the District providing service to the proposed site for plan check and approval. Plans shall be approved by the City Engineer prior to issuance of encroachment per DRAFTmit.

Plan Preparation
In order to obtain uniformity and allow easier review of plans, the following criteria shall apply to all plans submitted.

A. All sheets must be mylar, 24” x 36” overall size, with a ½” margin on all sides except that the left margin to be 1-1/2”. Pre-printed sheets are available through local blueprint companies.

B. All sheets must be numbered consecutively, “Sheet of ,” in the lower right corner.

C. All plans shall be drawn to a scale of 1” = 40’ or 1” = 20’.

D. All lettering shall be 1/8 inch minimum.

E. North arrows shall point to the top or left of the sheet, if possible.

F. All stationing shall refer to the centerline of the street unless otherwise indicated on the plan and shall read from left to right, and shall increase from south to north or west to east.

No negative stationing will be allowed.

1. Right end of one sheet joins the left end of the next.

2. Stationing has preference over north arrow.

3. All streets shall have continuous stationing.

Title Sheet – The first sheet shall be a Title Sheet and include:

A. Location map showing the following:

1. Project location

2. Major cross streets

3. City limit lines if contiguous to tract

4. North arrow

5. Scale
B. Index map showing the following:

1. Street configuration within tract

2. Lot configurations

3. Tract boundaries

4. Street names

5. Index of sheets DRAFT

6. City limit lines, if contiguous to tract

7. North arrow

8. Scale

9. Street lights

10. Sewer, water and storm drain improvements (existing and proposed) C. Basis of bearings – shall be the same as the tract map.

D. Benchmark – number description, date (year of adjustment), and elevation to three (3) decimal places.

E. Engineering firm name, address, telephone number, date of plan preparation, signature and number of Registered Civil Engineer.

F. Title block containing tract number and tentative tract number, if applicable; street name and limits of improvements.

G. Certification of approval of the City of Lake Elsinore Engineer shall appear on all sheets in the following form:
“These plans have been reviewed for compliance with
the appropriate conditions of development and/or City
and State laws, and a permit can be issued.”
City Engineer RCE # Expiration Date
H. Developer name, address and telephone number.

I. Soils Engineer or Engineering Geologist name, address, telephone number, and date of report.

J. Acceptance block for signature and date for all other agencies, as necessary.

K. Revision block with revision number, date, initials of design engineer, description of plan change, and spaces for City approval and date.

L. Plan legend and symbols.

M. The following standard “General Notes” shall be placed on the plans:

GENERAL NOTES

1. Note to Contractors: The existence and location of any underground utility pipes or structures shown on these plans were obtained by a search of available records. Approval of these plans by the City of Lake Elsinore does not constitute a representation as to the accuracy DRAFT or completeness of the location, nor the existence or non-existence of any underground utility, pipe or structure within the limits of the project.

The Contractor is required to take all due precautionary measures for the protection of all utilities, pipes or structures, whether shown on these plans or not. Any utility(ies) damaged during the performance of the work shall be repaired or replaced to the satisfaction of the governing agency by the Contractor, at his expense.

2. All work shall conform to City Codes, Standard Specifications for Public Works (Latest Edition), and Standard Drawing of the City of Lake Elsinore. It is the Contractor’s responsibility to be familiar with these standards and codes at all times.

3. The Contractor shall notify the City Engineering Inspector, forty-eight (48) hours prior to beginning any work. Call for inspection at (951) 674- 3124, between the hours of 9:00 am and 4:00 pm, Monday through Thursday.

4. Contractor shall maintain traffic control in accordance with Caltrans Traffic Manual and Watch Manual at all times during construction, as approved by the City Engineer or his representative. Failure to do so shall require immediate work stoppage.

5. It shall be the Contractor’s responsibility to have a dependable representative at the job site, at all times during construction.

6. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to arrange for the necessary relocation of any utilities. The contractor shall notify all utility companies involved at least forty-eight (48) hours prior to beginning work. The Contractor shall also contact Underground Service Alert (U.S.A.) at 1-800- 422-4133, at least forty-eight (48) hours prior to beginning work.

7. The Contractor shall be responsible for the clearing of the proposed work area and relocation and cost of all existing utilities. Subdivider must inform the City of Lake Elsinore of construction schedule, prior to beginning construction.

8. All underground facilities and laterals including but not limited to sewer, water, telephone, electricity, gas and drainage facilities, shall be in place prior to paving the street section.

9. All street sections are tentative. Additional soil tests will be taken after rough grading, to determine the exact section required. Section thicknesses shown are for bonding purposes only.

10. All existing underground utilities and structures must be potholed, and elevations verified prior to construction. The engineer of record shall be notified of any necessary revisions to the approved plans. The revisions shall be in the form of “AS BUILT” plans submitted to the City Engineer for approval prior to the final acceptance of the project.

11. All existing monumentation disturbed or destroyed during construction DRAFT shall be replaced to City standards, as approved by the City Engineer.

Centerline ties are to be furnished to the City Engineer upon completion of the project and before acceptance is granted.

12. An Encroachment Permit shall be required for all construction work done within Public Rights-of-way. Before issuance of said permit, the Contractor/Developer must provide the City Engineer with Certificate of Insurance and required bonding for public improvements. The encroachment permit must be present at the job site during the total time of the project construction along with an approved set of improvement plans.

13. If an Encroachment Permit is required through the District No. 8 office of Caltrans, please make reference to this fact in the “General Notes” section of the improvement plans.

Detail Sheet – The second sheet shall be the detail sheet and shall include:

A. Typical sections showing:

1. Each geometric street variation. A minimum street section is 4” AC over 6” AB.

2. Existing pavement to be joined or removed.

3. Paving, curb and gutter to be constructed, and details which join to existing pavement.

4. All necessary geometric dimensions including but not limited to:
a. Sidewalk width and location.
b. Centerline to curb face, including pavement crossfall. c. Centerline to right-of-way.
d. Level line relationship between centerline (crown) and top of curb with vertical dimension
B. Interim conditions

1. Structural section: thickness dimensions should be omitted until recommendations of the soils report are approved.

2. References to appropriate agency standard drawings.

C. Overall construction notes.

D. Construction details not included in approved agency standard drawings.

E. Sheet title block including items (E), (F), and (G) as listed on page 60.

Plan and Profile Sheets DRAFT
A. Profile shall be the top half of the sheet and include:

1. Centerline profile.

2. Existing ground profiles at centerline and right-of-way.

3. Top of curb profiles including elevations at ¼ deltas for curb return construction.

4. All rates of grade. Negative grades shall be indicated.

5. Elevation at grade breaks, at street intersections, and as necessary to provide vertical control.

6. Stationing, increasing from left to right.

7. Scale (horizontal and vertical).

8. Vertical curve data including tangent rates of grade, length of vertical curve, P.I.V.C. elevation, stations and elevations at maximum intervals of 25 feet and at points of control.

9. Identification of all storm drain lines.

10. Sewer profile.

11. All utility line crossings and sub-structures which could interfere with road or other underground construction.

B. Plan view shall include:

1. North arrow and scale.

2. Existing improvements shown dashed.

3. Improvements to be constructed, including all joins.

4. Street names.

5. Centerline stationing at all intersections.

6. Stationing shall match stationing established by earlier plans.

7. Stationing shall be marked on all construction centerlines and aligned with profile.

8. Centerline bearings and distances for all streets.

9. All proposed and existing utilities.

10. Tract number, boundary and lot lines for each adjacent parcel.

11. Applicable construction notes on each sheet.

12. Match lines clearly shown and referenced. DRAFT

13. Curve data for all curves.

14. Identification of all storm drain lines.

DRAFT
Street Design Criteria

1. General
The guidelines, criteria, and standards listed in Table B should be considered to be the minimum design standards for street improvements. Minimum horizontal curves are per Caltrans sight distance requirements.
a. Vertical curve design requirements are:
1) Wherever the grade break exceeds 0.5%
2) Vertical curves shall have the following minimum lengths i. Local Street – 50 feet
ii. Collectors – 100 feet
iii. Major Arterials – 200 feet
Exceptions can be considered if dictated by adverse topographic or environmental conditions. Exceptions shall be approved by the City Engineer.

2. Miscellaneous Design Criteria
a. When a raised median with landscaping is required, the design will indicate all proposed median openings and turning pockets and shall also be approved by the Traffic Engineer.
b. General criteria for lengths of left turn pockets:
1) Estimate the peak hour left turn movements.
2) Design pockets shall provide for a minimum of twenty feet (20’) length for each car desiring to turn left during peak hour or the minimum length shall be three hundred feet (300’) for major or urban arterial roads, two hundred fifty feet (250’) of secondary or collector streets, and one hundred fifty feet (150’) for all local streets. 3) If left turn movements are unknown or cannot be accurately predicted, the following guidelines may be used: (1) Pocket lengths should be increased if there is known to be greater than “average” truck traffic; (2) Turning volumes exceeding fifteen (15) cars per cycle should be accommodated by multiple left turn lanes; (3) Physical obstructions in the roadway should be designated with turning radius to accommodate larger vehicles.
4) Pavement widening and tapers will be required as determined by the Traffic Engineer.

These may occur when the tract development does not require ultimate improvements to an adjacent arterial, but the traffic generated by the tract could cause significant congestion on the arterial. In these cases, pavement widening may be required for acceleration or deceleration or for left turn lanes. DRAFT For narrowing the travel lanes, the minimum transition rate should be 40 to 1. For widening the pavement, the transition should be approximately 10 to 1. Any proposed pavement widening and tapers should be reviewed by the Traffic Engineer.
c. Permanent barricades will be used whenever a street dead ends without a cul-de-sac.

3. General criteria for the location of access points.
a. Refer to Intersection Intervals of City Standard Plan No. 100A of Roadway Design Requirements.
b. The tentative map review should show all existing and proposed access within the tract limits and in some cases an area access plan may be required by the Traffic Engineer. c. Access points should be selected at points with the best possible sight distance and all access points shall provide adequate sight distance.
d. If it is determined that a signal will be necessary to service the development, the location to be signalized shall be at least ¼ mile from adjacent signals. The Traffic Engineer should review and approve the signal location. e. Adjacent intersections along the same arterial shall be spaced sufficiently apart to provide for left turn pockets for both streets. This usually requires a minimum of 660 feet.
f. Extreme care is needed in locating driveways to avoid possible left turn conflicts where no raised medians exist.
g. Adjacent intersections along the arterial, but on opposite sides and offset in a direction in which left turns will not be in conflict, should be avoided. h. Standard cul-de-sacs are required for all permanent dead-end streets and may be required for temporary dead-end streets if future development seems remote. The maximum lengths of cul-de-sacs shall not exceed 660 feet. i. Private Streets.
1) Definition:
(a) Private streets are those streets which are privately owned and maintained and are not offered for dedication to the City. They are allowed only if adequate justification is provided.
(b) Design standards for private streets are considered to be the same as public streets regarding volume capacities and geometric design features and shall be designed to the same criteria. The absence of such standards will prohibit future dedication to the City for ownership or maintenance.
j. Driveways.
1) Driveways which exceed centerline measurement of thirty feet (30’) in length measured from the location of the face of curb, shall be provided ahead of each DRAFT garage, a parking space shall extend a minimum of twenty feet (20’) out from the face of the garage and shall be at least the width for the garage opening with a minimum of ten feet (10’), shall have longitudinal and transverse slope gradients not exceeding plus or minus five percent (5% +/-) and shall be designed to prevent surface waters from draining into garage.
2) Driveways which do not exceed thirty feet (30’) in length measured along the centerline shall have a maximum gradient of eight percent (8%) for the portion of the driveway located within twenty feet (20’) of the garage entrance; 3) Maximum longitudinal driveway gradients shall be fifteen percent (15%); minimum crown or cross slope shall be one percent (1%); and maximum crown or cross slope shall be five percent (5%).
4) Vertical transitions shall prevent contact of any portion of the car with surface of driveway by use of the following criteria:
(a) Vertical transition shall be made with not less than four feet parabolic curve. (b) When the driveway exceeds ten percent (10%), the vertical transition shall be an eight foot (8’) parabolic curve.

DRAFT

TABLE B

CITY OF LAKE

ELSINORE STREET

DESIGN CRITERIA
Design Criteria Urban
Arterial
Major
Arterial
Secondary
Arterial
Collector
Streets
Estimated Ultimate ADT 50,000 – 60,000 32,000 – 42,000 20,000 – 32,000 10,000 – 15,000 Design Speed ** 65 mph 60 mph 55 mph 45 mph
Right-of-Way *120 ft *100 ft 90 ft 68 ft
Curb-to-Curb Distance
* 96 ft
14 ft median
(raised)
* 80 ft
14 ft
median
(raised)
70 ft
14 ft median
48 ft
Minimum Traffic Index 10 10 10 7-9
Minimum Structural
Section (inches)
6 AC
12 AB
6 AC
12 AB
6 AC
12 AB
4 AC
6 AB
Stopping Sight Distance** 660 ft 580 ft 500 ft 360 ft
Corner Sight Distance** 715 ft 660 ft 605 ft 495 ft
Minimum Horizontal
Radius** 2000 ft 2000 ft 1600 ft 850 ft
Maximum Grade 9% 9% 9% 12%
Minimum Grade 1.0% 1.0% 1.0% 1.0%
Minimum Tangent
between reversing
curves
300 ft 220 ft 200 ft 160 ft
* where double left turn lanes are required, an additional ten feet (10’) of right-of-way and roadway width will be required.
** flat terrain DRAFT

FUNCTIONAL CLASSIFICATIONS AND STANDARDS
DRAFT
DRAFT
DRAFT
DRAFT
Storm Drainage
Drainage design requirements shall be in accordance with the Riverside County Hydrology Manual, the Riverside County Flood Control and Water Conservation District Design Manual and Standard Drawings, and this Design Manual. All hydrologic and hydraulic calculations shall be submitted along with proper documentation as noted.

All storm drains greater than 36" shall be reviewed for acceptance and maintenance by Riverside County Flood Control and Water Conservation District. Contact them for more information on the process.

Although the storm drainage improvements are typically included with the street improvement plan submittal, it is often necessary to construct the drainage improvement plans concurrently with the grading. In such a case, hydrology, hydraulics and the storm drainage improvement plans will be submitted along with the grading plans for review.

Hydrology
Criteria utilized for the hydrology study shall be as stated in the Hydrology Manual published by the Riverside County Flood Control District, current edition. Frequency of design shall be as stated in the Hydrology Manual or as specified by the Engineering Department.

The hydrology map, grading improvement plans, and improvement plans shall agree as to the grades, drainage areas, and other information found on those plans.

1. Hydrology Map
a. The hydrology map shall be on a topographic map of sufficient scale to show drainage patterns and quantities of runoff.
b. The site must be shown on the hydrology map including on-site and off-site topography to the entire tributary drainage area.
c. Show all Q’s (with the time of concentration) flowing in the streets. Designate Q10 and Q25. If one side of a street carries more Q than the other side, show it. d. Show all cross-over Q’s and flow splits where they occur. e. Show all street flow confluences and their calculations. f. Show all Q’s approaching, entering and carried over from catch basins. g. Identify all catch basins by numbers or letter.
h. Show lengths of all catch basins.
i. Identify all critical street flow locations.
j. Show the locations where street capacity and momentum calculations were made in Item “i” above.
k. Show and verify with legible contours or other adequate means all Q’s entering the DRAFT project. If previous studies were used, reference them and submit copies. l. Show all Q’s leaving the project. Include their time of concentration. m. Show north arrow and scale.
n. Show names or some other designation for all streets in the project vicinity. o. Show tract numbers of all properties (as applicable). p. Show name and telephone number of the Engineer who prepared and signed the hydrology study.
q. Show and identify all storm drains (use same designations as on improvement plans and show the Master Plan of Drainage facility number, if applicable), their sizes, line No.’s, line designation, Q’s and times of concentration. Distinguish between Q10 and Q100.
r. If the project contains more than one soil group (A, B, C or D), delineate each group. s. The drainage areas shall close and the acreage shall be shown. Areas should close at all points of confluence and at pickup points.
t. All off-site drainage areas must be shown with a reasonable analysis of the interim and ultimate Q’s from those tributary areas. Include the necessary supporting calculations or reference previously accepted studies and submit copies. u. Initial areas should be limited to 10 acres with a maximum flow path of 1,000 feet.

2. Hydrology calculations – General formula to be used is Q=CIA. a. Time of travel.
(1) Overland – use valley chart or representative sample section of natural channel. (2) Streets – Refer to street capacity and inlet design aids manual. Use Q est./S on chart to find A. Use A in Q est./A to find V. Use V in L (Vx60) to find t. (T=L/Vx60). (3) Pipes – for pipes flowing full, use Q/A to find V. For pipes flowing open, calculate A and V. Use V in L/(Vx60) to find t.
(4) Travel times at points of confluence can be adjusted in accordance with the Riverside County Flood Control District Hydrology Manual. (5) Street hydraulics shall be provided in the hydrology study. b. Rainfall intensity – obtain from Riverside County Flood Control District Hydrology Manual.
c. Coefficient of runoff – obtain from Riverside County Flood Control District Manual, plate No. D-5. DRAFT
d. Check typical critical sections for flow splits, i.e., where flow exceeds crown. Use the street capacity charts per Drainage Design Criteria and Aides. e. Check “W” width of ponding on arterial for possible flooding of the required “dry lane.” f. Street sections should not transverse or be super elevated away from catch basins.

Warping of street sections can either increase or reduce the capacity of the pickup and in some cases may create a ride-ability problem, particularly at “T” intersection. g. Check the Qs in pipes (option – tc may be adjusted at points of confluence or pickup after entering basins).

NOTE: Q100 must be used until the sump condition is relieved by a downstream catch basin providing an alternate path for the water.

Hydraulics
Criteria utilized for the hydraulic study shall be as stated in this Manual.

1. The use of underground storm drain systems shall be required:
a. When flooding or street overflow will cause serious damage, b. When future upstream development will cause drainage problems, c. If less than one – twelve-foot (12’) travel lane in each direction is dry on arterial highways.
d. To eliminate the need for cross gutters,
e. To eliminate nuisance water in residential areas (surface flow maximum – 1,000 linear feet),
f. When median drainage is required,
g. To insure building protection from 100-year frequency design flows. Finish floor to be one (1) foot above top of curb elevation.

2. The use of grate type catch basins is discouraged on public and private streets. They should only be considered on streets with slopes greater than 5%. To be used, they must receive prior approval.

3. The use of parkway culverts is discouraged. To be used, they must receive prior approval.

The design shall incorporate adequate slope and maintenance access.

Hydraulic Calculations

1. Identify all calculations by referring to the storm drain line number and its location.

2. Begin all hydraulic grade line calculations at the downstream end of a system and proceed upstream to the catch basin or other inlet facility. DRAFT

3. Calculations must proceed from point to point in a logical, easy to follow, analysis. Start with a controlling water surface which has been verified and add losses in a systematic manner as they accrue along the pipeline. Sum the losses and provide the hydraulic grade line and energy grade line elevations at all critical points.

4. The minimum free board in catch basins shall be 0.5 feet below the flowline at the catch basin opening.

5. When using Thompson’s Y equation for junction losses, write your equation first and then insert the variables. Numbers alone will not suffice. The minimum loss in a basin is

1.2V2
/2g. Check Thompson’s Y for catch basins in a series.

6. At all junctions, show a detail including angles between the mainline storm drain and incoming laterals.

7. All trash racks or grate calculations must account for 50% debris clogging.

8. When required to bulk flows to account for burned areas, assume a 5-year growth.

Catch Basin Calculations

1. On calculation sheets, identify each catch basin by number or letter and give its location.

2. Show all required information including type of curb, the half width street section, crossfall, slope, etc. (The half width street location is the distance from crown line to front face of curb.)

3. Using Riverside County Design Charts, check for continuous grade catch basins and local sumps where secondary flow exists. Also, check for sump catch basins where true sump exists (no secondary outlet).

4. Continuous grade catch basins at intersections shall be designed to intercept a minimum of 85% of the flow.

5. Check for true maximum ponding elevation (not necessarily at the basin top of curb). Street grades may allow flow to escape at lower elevations.

6. Permanent debris basins should:
a. Have a 6’ high chain link fence
b. Provide calculations showing how the basin empties within 24 hours c. Provide an emergency route for overflows
d. Show volumes that include water and debris together
Plan Preparation
A. Storm Drains DRAFT

1. Show the hydraulic grade line plot on originals. Show all water surface elevations and the top of curb elevations at catch basins. Stationing shall be based on all storm drain centerlines.

2. Regarding “1” above, show all hydraulic elements, including Q’s, Vn, slopes, pipe sizes, F.L. elevations and pertinent stationing. Show TC elevation at CB centerline.

B. Catch Basins

1. Show sizes including “L” and “V”.

2. Show type.

3. Show centerline street stationing at catch basin centerline.

4. Provide details of any local depressions.

Design Criteria
A. Pipes

1. D-loads shall be in conformance with the Los Angeles County Flood Control Manual.

2. A bedding detail is required for all types of pipe.

3. A minimum pipe size of 18 inches shall be used for all public storm drains and private storm drains within streets.

4. Use a factor of n=0.013 for R.C.P. and 0.015 for cast-in-place pipe. Cast-in-place pipe is not permitted longitudinally in arterial highways.

5. Concrete collars shall be used as required per Riverside County Flood Control District Standard Drawing no. M803.

6. A minimum radius of 22-1/2 feet shall be used for any horizontal bend and the need for beveled end pipes should be called out.

7. Slope anchors shall be constructed at 7 feet vertical intervals on all slopes of 5 to 1 or steeper.

8. Thick wall R.C.P. with 1-1/2 inch minimum cover inside shall be used when the flow velocity exceeds 20 feet per second.

B. Cast-In-Place Pipe

1. Cast-In-Place concrete pipe (48” and larger) shall only be used where shown on the drawings and approved by the agency responsible for the maintenance of the project as an alternate construction.

2. A geotechnical investigation report shall be prepared and transmitted to the approving agency at the time the drawings are initially submitted for review. The report shall be DRAFT prepared by a licensed civil or geotechnical engineer registered in the State of California, and shall address, but not necessarily be limited to the following issues:
a) Trench wall stability. A trench stability analysis shall be prepared. Sloughing and overall trench stability as it pertains to the construction if CIPP shall be addressed. b) Existence of groundwater. If groundwater is present, the report shall specify appropriate mitigation measures.
c) Existence of expansive soils. CIPP shall not be used if expansive soils are present.
d) Corrosion potential. A chemical analysis of the soil samples shall be made to determine sulfate concentrations. A recommendation with respect to cement “Type” shall be made.
e) Overall feasibility of constructing CIPP

3. For structural design purposes, the pipe shall be designed to flow no more than just full unless structural calculations are submitted showing that the pipe can safely sustain the proposed hydrostatic head.

4. Design flow velocities greater than 20 ft/sec. will not be allowed unless an exception is granted by the Engineer.

5. A minimum 6 sack per cubic yard design mix shall be used and the compressive strength of the concrete (fc) at 28 days shall be at least 4000 psi; the modulus of rupture shall be at least 550 psi. For velocities greater than 10 ft/sec. but not greater than 20 ft/sec. the compressive strength shall be 5000 psi. Compressive strengths shall be noted on the drawings.

6. Pipe wall thickness for flows having velocities equal to or less than 10 ft/sec. shall comply with the requirements as set forth in the Standard Specifications. For velocities greater than 10 ft/sec. but not more than 20 ft/sec. a 140-degree segment of invert shall be thickened 2 inches in wall thickness as “sacrificial concrete”. Increases in standard wall thickness shall be noted on the drawings.

7. The minimum finished cover over the pipe shall be three (3) feet.

8. The minimum pipe slope shall be 0.005.

9. Cast-in-place concrete pipe, which is to be maintained by the County or District, shall not be placed except in the presence of the Engineer.

10. When CIPP is specified as an alternative to RCP, a note shall be added to the construction drawings stating that Transition Structure No. 3 shall replace Junction Structure No. 2 when CIPP is used. No changes need be made for Junction Structures No. 4.

11. Cast-in-Place pipe shall not have curve radii less than shown below:

PIPE SIZE RADIUS DRAFT
24 in 45 ft
36 in 45 ft
42 in 45 ft
48 in 60 ft
54 in 60 ft
60 in 60 ft
66 in 60 ft
72 in 60 ft
78 in 90 ft
84 in 120 ft
96 in 150 ft
120 in 160 ft

12. Construction of the C.I.P.P. shall conform to the provisions of ACI Standard 346-70 and Title No. 66-22. The trench to accept C.I.P.P. shall be dug in undisturbed soil and continuous inspection will be required. An in-place loading test may be required at the discretion of the City Engineer, prior to the acceptance of any C.I.P.P. storm drain.

Such test shall be in conformance with Section 9.4 of the above referenced ACI Standard 346-70 and performed solely at the expense of the contractor.

13. The following Cast-In-Place notes shall be added to the title sheet of the plans:
a) Construction materials and method shall conform to the latest edition of the Standard Specification for Public Works Construction, the City’s Special Provisions and these plans.
b) Cast-in-Place concrete pipe shall not be used unless it is shown as an alternate on the drawings approved by the City Engineer.
c) Concrete mix designs shall be submitted by the contractor for approval prior to start of construction.
d) Trenching and backfilling shall be performed only in the presence of the soils engineer.
e) The minimum cover over the pipe shall be three (3) feet, measured from the top of the pipe.
f) Backfilling of the pipe shall not be done until the concrete has developed 80 percent of its design strength. No traffic shall be permitted on top of the pipe until the concrete has attained its design strength.
g) Water densification methods for backfilling the pipe will not be permitted.

Mechanical compaction will be required. An 8-inch lift of loose backfill “shading” over the pipe will be permitted 24 hours after initial placement, provided the forms are still in place at the time of shading.
h) A minimum 6 sack per cubic yard design mix shall be used and the compressive strength of the concrete (fc) at 28 days shall be at least 4000 psi; the modulus of rupture shall be at least 550 psi. For velocities greater than 10 ft/sec, but not greater than 20 ft/sec, the compressive strength shall be 5000 psi, and a 140-degree DRAFT segment of the invert shall be thickened by 2 additional inches; for velocities greater than 20 ft/sec, the 140 degree segment of the invert shall be thickened by an additional 4 inches. Compressive strengths shall be noted on the drawings. i) The consistency of the concrete shall be such as to allow it to be worked into place without segregation. The concrete for the cast-in-place concrete pipe shall have a slump of 2” plus or minus 1”.
j) Fly ash, meeting ASTM C 618, may be used to substitute for cement (up to 15 percent of cement by weight). When fly ash is used, water reducing agents meeting ASTM Designation C 494 will be permitted in amounts recommended by the supplier and approved by the City Engineer.
k) At the end of all pours and the end of each working day, the Contractor shall install No. 4 dowels, 24 inches long, 12-inch centers around circumference of cast-inplace pipe. l) The maximum earth cover shall be 20 feet from the top of pipe. m) Cast-in-place concrete pipe, which is to be maintained by the County or City, shall not be placed except in the presence of the appropriate agency inspector. The inspection for the CIPP smaller than 39” in diameter shall be performed by video camera and core just prior to the final acceptance of the system. n) Type V cement shall be used if the sulfate content in the soil is greater than 2,000 ppm.
o) Continuous inspection and testing if CIPP placement is required. p) Contractor shall allow inspector into pipe while under construction and rod for wall thickness at a minimum of 25 cubic yards of the pour.

C. Open P.C.C. Lined Channels

1. Require prior approval from City Engineer.

2. Structural calculations will be required.

3. Structural details shall be shown on the plans.

4. Are not allowed in the street right-of-way.

D. Manholes

1. Manholes are required at the following locations:
a) Beginning or ending of curves.
b) Pipe size changes.
c) Angle points and as required at junctions.
d) Maximum 500 feet intervals (300 feet maximum for pipe less than 24-inch DRAFT diameter).
e) As required for maintenance.

2. Manholes shall be restricted to, in order of preference:
a) Parking lane.
b) Parkway.
c) Center of travel lane nearest right curb.
d) Center of travel lane to the left of the travel lane nearest right curb.

E. Easements

1. Public drainage devices shall be centered within an easement.

2. Easements parallel to lot lines are preferred to be on one lot only.

3. Surface structures shall not surcharge storm drain facilities.

F. Abandonment of Underground Facilities

1. If existing culverts, pipes or other facilities are abandoned or removed, provisions must be made for drainage.

2. If facilities are abandoned, it will be necessary to either back fill with sand or cement slurry and seal the ends with brick and mortar or crush in place. These necessary requirements shall comply with state laws and municipal codes.

G. Surface Drainage Transitions

1. If it is necessary to grade to drain, the grade on the ditch shall be shown on the plan.

2. The length of ditch construction shall be shown on the plan.

3. A letter of consent will be required where grading or drainage involves adjacent private property.

4. Keep mud and debris out of drainage by grading around improvements.

5. Provide AC swales or aprons to protect improvements.

6. The need for grading 50 feet to 100 feet upstream from the proposed improvements must be checked.

7. Ensure ponding does not occur upstream.

8. Ensure water quality and erosion control. DRAFT
Street Lighting
General
All street lights will be owned by the City of Lake Elsinore unless designated otherwise by separate agreement. Street light locations shall be submitted through the City for approval.

Street lighting design shall conform and follow City of Lake Elsinore Street Light Manual – Design Criteria and Standards, and City Standard Plan Numbers 501 to 509.

The following standard “General Notes” shall be placed on the plans:

GENERAL NOTES

1. Note to Contractors: The existence and location of any underground utility pipes or structures shown on these plans were obtained by a search of available records. Approval of these plans by the City of Lake Elsinore does not constitute a representation as to the accuracy or completeness of the location, nor the existence or non-existence of any underground utility, pipe or structure within the limits of the project. The Contractor is required to take all due precautionary measures for the protection of all utilities, pipes or structures, whether shown on these plans or not. Any utility(ies) damaged during the performance of the work shall be repaired or replaced to the satisfaction of the governing agency by the Contractor, at his expense.

2. All work shall conform to the most current requirement of City of Lake Elsinore’s current improvement standards and specification and as indicated in this manual. It is the Contractor’s responsibility to be familiar with these standards and codes at all times.

3. The Contractor shall notify the City Engineering Inspector, forty-eight (48) hours prior to beginning any work. Call for inspection at (951) 674-3124, between the hours of 9:00 am and 4:00 pm, Monday through Thursday.

4. Contractor shall maintain traffic control in accordance with Caltrans Traffic Manual and Watch Manual at all times during construction, as approved by the City Engineer or his representative. Failure to do so shall require immediate work stoppage.

5. It shall be the Contractor’s responsibility to have a dependable representative at the job site, at all times during construction.

6. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to arrange for the necessary relocation of any utilities. The contractor shall notify all utility companies involved, at least forty-eight (48) hours prior to beginning work. The Contractor shall also contact Underground Service Alert (U.S.A.) at 1-800- 422-4133, at least forty-eight (48) hours prior to beginning work.

7. The Contractor shall be responsible for the clearing of the proposed work area and relocation and cost of all existing utilities. DRAFT

8. An Encroachment Permit shall be required for all construction work done within Public Rights-of-way. Before issuance of said permit, the Contractor/Developer must provide the City Engineer with Certificate of Insurance and required bonding for public improvements. The encroachment permit must be present at the job site during the total time of the project construction along with an approved set of improvement plans.

9. If an Encroachment Permit is required through the District No. 8 office of Caltrans, please make reference to this fact in the “General Notes” section of the improvement plans.

10. The Service point is subject to revision by final SCE plans, it shall be the developer’s responsibility to provide the proper service to the street lights shown on this plan.

11. The developer shall be responsible for providing conduit and conductors from the street lights to approved service point furnished by SCE.

12. It shall be the responsibility of the developer or contractor to apply for an encroachment permit for work performed within the City right-of-way.

SCE Service planner ___________, Work order number ____________ Energy charges paid by _________ (Developer, LMD, OTHER).

DRAFT

SECTION V TRAFFIC PLANS
Signing and Striping
In order to obtain uniformity and allow easier review of plans, the following criteria shall apply to all plans submitted.

A. All plans shall be prepared on 24”x36” mylars with a ½” margin on all sides except the left side which will be 1 ½”.

B. All plans shall be 1”=40’ scale or 1”=20’.

C. North arrows should point to the top or right of sheet if possible.

D. All sheets shall be numbered consecutively, “Sheet of ,” in the lower right of the plan.

E. All lettering shall be 1/8” minimum height.

F. Plan shall include engineering firm name, address, telephone number, date plans prepared, signature, number and expiration date of Registered Civil or Traffic Engineer.

G. All stationing shall refer to the centerline of street unless otherwise noted and shall read from left to right.

H. All plans shall include the City of Lake Elsinore signing and striping general notes.

Construction notes and a legend shall also be included.

I. All curbs, raised medians, edge of pavement, driveways, alleys, sidewalks, access ramps and right-of-way shall be shown and labeled.

J. All existing regulatory, warning, guide and any special signs shall be shown. This includes parking prohibitions signs, advance street name signs, bus stop signs etc. All existing sign locations shall be field verified.

K. All existing striping, pavement markings and curb markings shall be shown and labeled, including bike lanes, parking layouts, and crosswalks and limit lines. All existing striping shall be shown as a thin line and all proposed striping as a thick solid line. The locations and types of existing striping and pavement markings shall be field verified.

L. Jurisdictional boundaries, street names, centerlines and stations shall be shown.

M. Match lines shall be clearly shown and referenced on the plan.

N. The following standard “General Notes” shall be placed on the plans:

GENERAL NOTES

1. All lines and markings shall conform to the California Manual on Traffic Control Devices (CA DRAFT MUTCD) and Caltrans Standard Plans and Specifications (latest editions).

2. Lane widths shall be measured between center lines of each adjacent single or double stripe or top of curb, as appropriate.

3. The Contractor shall notify underground service alert, (800) 422-4133, and all concerned utility companies at least two working days in advance of excavation.

4. All traffic stripes, pavement markings, and signs shall be reflectorized and in standard sizes.

All striping and marking details shall match Caltrans standard plans details. Stencils for pavement marking shall match Caltrans standard plans. All signs shall have prismatic reflective sheeting conforming to ASTM D4956 for Type IX and XI.

5. The Contractor shall remove all conflicting stripes, pavement markings, and raised pavement markers in accordance with the plans and as directed by the engineer. Word or symbol pavement markings shall be removed by sandblasting a rectangular area covering the whole marking. Grinding shall only be done upon approval by the City Engineer.

6. All crosswalks shall have 10 feet between the 12-inch white or yellow stripes.

7. All double yellow stripes shall have 3-inch painted black line separating the yellow stripes.

8. The Contractor shall apply traffic lines, and pavement markings including crosswalks, limit lines, stop bars, and detail 40 lines using thermoplastic material.

9. The Contractor shall furnish and install raised pavement markers (RPMS) within seven working days of roadway striping. All existing RPMS within the project area shall be replaced in kind or removed in accordance with the plans, or as directed by the Engineer. Remnant adhesive material from removed RPMS shall be removed.

10. The Contractor shall install standard size panel on 2" square perforated steel tube post with two-piece anchor and sleeve, fastened with 3 /8" rivets with stainless steel washers, unless otherwise noted. The exact location of all signs shall be determined in the field by the Engineer.

11. The Contractor shall remove signs in accordance with the plans and as directed by the Engineer. All removed signs shall be salvaged to the City Yard unless otherwise directed by the Engineer.

12. The Contractor shall layout (cat-track) the proposed signing, striping, and markings in accordance with the plans within three days of final paving. Contact the City Engineering Inspector at ( 951) 674-3124 to obtain approval of layout prior to actual installation.

13. The Contractor shall coordinate all signing and striping works through the Engineer prior to opening new roadways and/or existing roadways to new signing and striping in accordance with the plans.

14. The Contractor shall install blue reflective pavement markers across from all fire hydrants per CA MUTCD.

DRAFT
Traffic Control
In order to obtain uniformity and allow easier review of plans, the following criteria shall apply to all plans submitted.

A. All plans shall be prepared on 24”x36” overall size with a ½” margin on all sides except the left side which shall be 1 ½”.

B. All plans shall be drawn to a scale of 1”=40’ scale.

C. North arrows should point to the top or left of the sheet.

D. All sheets shall be numbered consecutively, “Sheet of ,” in the lower right of the plan.

E. All lettering shall be 1/8” minimum height.

F. Plan shall include engineering firm name, address, telephone number, date plans prepared, signature, and number of Registered Civil or Traffic Engineer.

G. All stationing shall be based upon record centerline information and refer to centerline of street unless otherwise noted and shall read from left to right.

H. All plans shall include the City of Lake Elsinore traffic control general notes, Construction notes and a legend shall also be included.

I. All existing regulatory, warning, guide and any special signs shall be shown. This includes parking prohibition signs, advance street name signs, bus stop signs etc. All existing sign locations shall be field verified. Signs to be temporarily covered (bagged) or removed and reinstalled shall be identified.

J. All existing striping, pavement markings and curb markings shall be shown, including bike lanes, parking layouts, crosswalks and limit lines. The locations and types of existing striping and pavement markings shall be field verified.

K. All streets within the project limits shall be identified with proper street names to ensure proper orientation. A vicinity map and location map shall be included on the title sheet.

L. All traffic signals within the project area shall be identified on the plan. Construction related temporary traffic signal modifications shall be shown on a separate traffic signal plan, prepared according to the latest edition of the City of Lake Elsinore Traffic Signals design criteria located in City of Elsinore Plan Preparation and Design Manual.

M. Posted speed shall be shown at all approaches to the work area.

N. Road closures, trail closures, detours, bore and jack operations, weekend work and/or night work require prior written permission from the City. Lane dimensions shall be shown at 300-foot intervals and at each end of lane or pavement transitions, match lines and join locations. Also, show length of turn lanes, flares, reverse tapers.

O. Jurisdictional boundaries, street names, curb, driveways, centerlines and stations, alleys, raised medians shall be shown. DRAFT
P. A minimum of 500 feet of roadway with striping details beyond project limits (showing join points) shall be shown.

Q. All proposed sign locations shall be dimensioned.

R. The following standard “General Notes” shall be placed on the plans:

GENERAL NOTES

1. All traffic control devices shall conform to the latest editions of the California manual of uniform traffic control devices (CA MUTCD), the Caltrans Specification and Standard Plans, and the Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction.

2. The City reserves the right to observe these traffic control plans in use and make the necessary changes as field conditions warrant. Any changes shall supersede these plans and shall be done solely at the Contractor's expense.

3. It is the responsibility of the Contractor performing work on a public street to install and maintain traffic control devices as shown hereon, as well as any such additional devices as may be required to ensure the safe movement of traffic and pedestrians through or around the work area. All traffic control devices shall be kept in their proper position at all times, and shall be repaired, replaced, or cleaned as necessary to preserve their appearance and continuity.

4. The Contractor shall maintain all traffic control devices 24 hours per day and 7 days per week.

5. All tubular delineators shall be removed from view when not in use.

6. All traffic control devices shall be removed from view when not in use.

7. Recessed steel plates shall be maintained for open excavations during nonworking hours. “steel plates ahead” signs shall be provided at all times.

8. Work hours shall be restricted to between 8:30 a.m. to 3:30 p.m. unless approved otherwise.

9. Any pavement markings and striping damaged during construction shall be restored to the original condition and/or location at the end of each construction period for each stage.

10. Contractor shall remove or cover all conflicting signs including signs on the traffic signal mast arms.

11. The Contractor shall provide trained flaggers as deemed necessary by the Engineer.

12. All workers shall be equipped with an orange vest (or a reflective vest at night).

All flaggers shall also be equipped with a hard hat.

13. Access to driveways will be maintained at all times unless other arrangements DRAFT are made.

14. A minimum of twelve (12) foot travel lanes must be maintained unless otherwise approved by the department of public work s.

15. The Contractor shall notify nearby businesses and residences at least five working days in advance, in writing, regarding work to be done, hours of work, any closures, and any required detours.

16. The Contractor shall coordinate the relocation of the bus routes and bus stops with the riverside transit agency three weeks in advance of construction activity affecting bus stops.

17. Temporary “No Parking “signs are to be posted 24 hours prior to commencing work.

18. Any work that disturbs normal traffic signal operations shall be coordinated with the City Engineering Inspection, 48 hours prior to beginning construction.

19. Temporary video detection system shall be installed at the Contractor’s expense if vehicle loop detectors are to be damaged during the course of construction, video detection systems shall be removed by the contractor only after new loops are installed and verified operational by the City.

DRAFT
Traffic Signal
Traffic signal design shall conform and follow the City of Lake Elsinore Traffic Signal Specifications.

In order to obtain uniformity and allow easier review of plans, the following criteria shall apply to all plans submitted.

A. All plans shall be prepared on 24”x36” overall size with a ½” margin on all sides except the left side which shall be 1 ½”.

B. All signal plans shall be drawn to a scale of 1”=20’.

C. North arrows should point to the top or left of the sheet.

D. All sheets shall be numbered consecutively, “Sheet of ,” in the lower right of the plan.

E. All lettering shall be 1/8” minimum height.

F. Plan shall include engineering firm name, address, telephone number, date plans prepared, signature, and number of Registered Civil or Traffic Engineer.

G. All plans shall include the City of Lake Elsinore traffic signal general notes, Construction notes and a legend shall also be included.

H. All existing striping, pavement markings and curb markings shall be shown, including bike lanes, parking layouts, crosswalks and limit lines. The locations and types of existing striping and pavement markings shall be field verified.

I. All streets within the project limits shall be identified with proper street names to ensure proper orientation. A vicinity map and location map shall be included on the title sheet.

J. Traffic signal plans shall include new and existing curb and gutter, access ramps, right of way, maintenance easements showing all existing utilities, all traffic signal interconnect cable, and City boundary lines. All widths shall be clearly labeled and dimensioned to the centerline.

K. Squares shall be used to designate construction notes.

L. Triangles and clouding shall be used to indicate plan revisions.

M. All existing conditions shall be screened to appear lighter than the rest of the drawing.

N. Include signal pole schedule.

O. Include conductor schedule.

P. Include controller cabinet – solid state traffic actuated controller units and cabinets shall conform to the provisions in Section 86-3, “Controller Assemblies” of the State Standard Specifications and this Manual. DRAFT
Q. The preferred location for cabinet placement shall be on the far-side corner of the main arterial, in the direction of the primary flow of traffic. A minimum of 48 inches of concrete pad shall be provided at the front and rear of the signal cabinet and electrical service/BBS. The police panel side of the signal cabinet may abut the ROW providing there are no physical barriers preventing access to the panel. Where sufficient ROW exists, up to 24 inches of clearance shall be provided on the police panel side of the signal cabinet. Clearances shall be unobstructed by any above ground facilities. A retaining wall shall be installed where required. The Engineer must approve any variance from the preferred location.

R. Front side of traffic signal controller cabinet should open toward the intersection where possible. Electrical meter shall be facing the street.

S. Nearest practical Southern California Edison service vault and service handhole shall be shown on plan.

T. Utilize N.E.M.A. phasing conforming to the California MUTCD.

U. Symbols shown shall conform to State of California Standard Plans ES-1A and ES-1B.

V. Pole identification numbering shall increase clockwise around the intersection, with the No. 1 being the first pole away from the controller corner.

W. All traffic signal plans shall indicate required traffic signal pole locations as referenced from BCR, ECR, and curb face.

X. Conduit run identification numbering shall start at the conduit crossing farthest from the controller corner and increase sequentially toward the home run pull box on the controller corner. The final home run conduits shall have the highest identification numbers.

Y. Unless otherwise physically required, an exclusive/split phase shall not be used in the phase sequence.

Z. Traffic signal modifications requiring the installation of video detection cabling shall require all conductors to be removed from the conduit before pulling new cable. “Slipping” is not allowed.

AA. Traffic signal modifications requiring the installation of ADA compliant Push Button Assembly cabling will require all conductors to be removed from the conduit before pulling new cable. “Slipping” is not allowed.

BB. Traffic signal modifications shall match installed equipment by make and model. If the system cannot be matched, the entire system shall be replaced.

CC. Maximum allowable conduit fill is 26% for new installation and 40% for existing/ modified installations.

DD. Intersections approaches with a minimum of three through lanes or a distance greater than 36-feet from the lane line between the through and the left turn lanes to the far right most curb and gutter in the direction of travel will require two video detection cameras unless one camera is sufficient as determined by the Engineer. DRAFT EE. Advance detection shall be provided on streets where the approach speeds are 25 mph or greater. Separate loops shall be placed in each through lane. Advance loop setback requirements from intersections, based on approach speeds, are shown below. Radar detection zones may be used in place of advance loops.

Advance Detector Loop Setback
MUTCD Table 4D-101
Approach
Speed
(mph)
Setback (feet from limit
line)
25 105’
30 140’
35 185’
40 230’
45 285’
50 345’
55 405’
60 475’
FF. Prepare equipment schedule. Refer to State Traffic Manual, Figure 9-23 for examples of these schedules and as directed by the City Traffic Engineer.

GG. Emergency Vehicle Preempt
A complete, functioning 3M Opticom™ IR and GPS emergency vehicle preemption system, or approved equal, shall be furnished and installed as directed by the City Traffic Engineer.

The system shall be designed to prevent simultaneous preemption by two or more emergency vehicles on separate approaches to the intersection.

The optical detector shall be mounted on the indicated signal mast by drilling and tapping and a detail of this shall be placed on the plan.

HH. Existing and Proposed Utilities
All existing and proposed overhead and underground utilities shall be shown on the plans. The design engineer shall be responsible for acquiring the necessary utility maps and plans to properly show the utilities on the plans.

II. The following standard “General Notes” shall be placed on the plans:

GENERAL NOTES

1. All work, material, and equipment shall conform to the requirements of the California Dept. of Transportation, Standard Plans and Standard Specifications DRAFT (latest edition), The Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices (CA MUTCD) (latest edition), County of Riverside Standards and Specifications, and the special provisions for this project.

2. Utilities shown on these plans are correct and accurate to the extent of available records and knowledge. The Contractor, however, is required to ascertain the exact location of underground facilities prior to doing work that may damage such facilities or interfere with their service. The Contractor shall bear the total expense of repair or replacement of any underground facilities damaged by his operation. Phone underground service alert (USA) a minimum 48 hours in advance.

3. The Contractor shall obtain all necessary permits and notify all utility companies and underground service alert a minimum of 48 hours prior to the start of construction. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to coordinate all phases of construction with the various utility companies involved.

4. All traffic signal equipment shall be furnished and installed by the Contractor unless otherwise specified.

5. All new red, yellow, and green signal indications, ped indications, and I.I.S.N.S. shall be a light emitting diode (LED). Signal lenses shall be 12" with metal housing, visors, and louvered backplates with 2” yellow retroreflective borders.

6. The location of signal poles shown on the plan is approximate. The exact location shall be determined in the field by the Engineer.

7. Street name signs shall be retroreflective, white letters on the blue background with City logo and "City of Lake Elsinore" below street name.

8. Pedestrian signal faces shall be type "A" pedestrian countdown head with LED uniform incandescent look countdown module.

9. Pedestrian push buttons shall be 2" dia. (min.) ADA compliant, vibratory/audible, APS buttons with international symbol sign plate per Caltrans sign specifications R62D. Accessible pedestrian signal (POLARA APS) system shall be installed per California MUTCD Sections 4E.09, 4E.10, 4E.11 and 4E.12.

10. All new conduit shall be 3" PVC unless otherwise shown.

11. Contractor shall place conduit by jacking or drilling unless otherwise approved by City engineer or his representative.

12. All traffic signal detection, signing, pavement markings, and striping shall be completed prior to traffic signal activation.

13. Conductor schedule is furnished as an installation guideline only. It shall be the Contractor's responsibility to provide the correct conductors required for the intended operation.

14. All wiring and equipment shall be marked (tagged) within the controller cabinet DRAFT for phase identification.

15. Underground signal light conductors shall not be spliced.

16. See Caltrans Std. Plan ES-1A and ES-1B for the symbol abbreviation legend.

17. All salvaged equipment not reused shall be delivered to the City of Lake Elsinore yard.

18. Video detection cameras shall be mounted on signal mast arms with six-foot extension poles with astro brackets. Final location shall be determined in the field by the Engineer. Units with radar capabilities shall be mounted on the mast arm per manufacturer specifications.

19. Signal interconnect pullbox spacing shall be 500' apart maximum.

DRAFT

SECTION VI MISCELLANEOUS ITEMS
Revisions to Approved Plans
Revisions to approved improvement plans are subject to approval by the City Engineer and shall only be made by an engineer from the firm that prepared the original plan. When another engineering firm has a need to make revisions on the plan, permission must be obtained in writing from the original engineering firm.

The engineering firm needs to contact the City for bluelines of approved plans. Proposed revisions should be drawn by hand in red pencil on bluelines of the approved plan(s). Two sets of these bluelines are then to be submitted to the Engineering Department for review and approval. Once the blueline has been reviewed and approval is given, a copy of the original may be checked out of the Engineering Department and changed by the Engineer.

Revisions shall be called out with a delta number wherever they occur on the plan. The revision box on the title sheet and the revision box on the sheet where the revision appears should show the delta number and revision description. Upon approval, the City Engineer will sign and date in the revision box on the title sheet.

DRAFT
Appendix
DRAFT
SOILS ENGINEER’S CERTIFICATE:

THESE GRADING PLANS HVE BEEN REVIEWED BY THE UNDERSIGNED

AND FOUND TO BE IN CONFORMANCE WITH THE RECOMMENDATIONS

AND SPECIFICATIONS OUTLINED IN THE SOILS AND GEOLOGICAL RECONNAISSANCE REPORT PREPARED FOR THIS DEVELOPMENT.
____________________________________________________
(Signature) (RCE NO.) (Date)
____________________________________________________
(Signature) (RCE NO.) (Date)
Soils Certificate for Grading Plans DRAFT
ENGINEER’S NOTICE

1. CONTRACTOR AGREES THAT HE SHALL ASSUME SOLE AND

COMPLETE RESPONSIBILITY FOR JOB SITE CONDITIONS DURING THE

COURSE OF CONSTRUCTION, INCLUDING SAFETY OF ALL PERSONS AND PROPERTY. THIS REQUIREMENT SHALL APPLY CONTINUOUSLY AND NOT BE LIMITED TO NORMAL WORKING HOURS. THE

CONTRACTOR SHALL DEFEND, INDEMNIFY AND HOLD THE OWNER

AND ENGINEER HARLESS FROM ANY AND AL LIABILITY, REAL OR

ALLEGED, IN CONNECTION WITH THE PERFORMANCE OF WORK ON

THIS PROJECT EXCEPTING FOR LIABILITY ARISING FROM THE SOLE NEGLIGENCE OF THE OWNER OR ENGINEER.

2. ALL UNDERGROUND UTILITIES OR STRUCTURES, REPORTED OR

FOUND ON PUBLIC RECORDS, ARE INDICATED WITH THEIR
APPROXIMATE LOCATION AND EXTENT. THE OWNER, BY ACCEPTING

THESE PLANS OR PROCEEDING WITH THE IMPROVEMENTS HEREON,

AGREES TO ASSUME LIABILITY AND HOLD THE ENGINEERE

HARMLESS FOR ANY DAMAGES RESULTING FROM THE EXISTNECE OF

UNDERGROUND UTILITIES OR STRUCTURES NOT REPORTED OR

INDICATED ON PUBLIC RECORDS, OR THOSE CONSTRUCTED AT
VARIANCE WITH REPORTED OR RECORD LOCATIONS. THE

CONTRACTOR IS REQUIRED TO TAKE DUE PRECAUTIONARY

MEASURES TO PROTECT THE UTILITIES OR STRUCTURES SHOWN
AND ANY OTHER FOUND AT THE STIE. IT SHALL BE THE
CONTRACTOR’S RESPONSIBILITY TO NOTIFY THE OWNERS OF ALL UTILITIES OR STRUCTURES CONCERNED BEFORE STARTING WORK.

3. THE ENGINEER PREPARING THESE PLANS WILL NOT BE

RESPONSIBLE FOR, OR LIABLE FOR UNAUTHORIZED CHANGES TO
OR USES OF THESE PLANS. ALL CHANGES TO THESE PLANS MUST BE

IN WRITING AND MUST BE APPROVED BY THE PREPARER OF THESE PLANS.

4. QUANTITIES SHOWN HEREON ARE PROVIDED FOR BONDING
PURPOSES ONLY. CONTRACTORS SHALL BE RESPONSIBLE FOR

VERIFYING ALL THE QUANTITIES PRIOR TO BIDDING FOR
CONSTRUCTION.

Engineers Notice for Grading
Plans DRAFT

STREET LIGHT MANUAL

DESIGN CRITERIA

AND STANDARDS

ENGINEERING DEPARTMENT
_________________ ___________
Remon Habib Date
City Engineer DRAFT
2 TABLE OF CONTENT
Introduction --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4 Street lights Requires -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 5 Street lights NOT Required ------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 5 Temporary Lighting ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 5 Wireless Telecommunication Facilities (WTF) ------------------------------------------------------ 6 Utility Company Authorization --------------------------------------------------------------------------- 7 City of Lake Elsinore Authorization -------------------------------------------------------------------- 8 Developer’s Responsibility ------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 9 Developer’s Checklist ----------------------------------------------------------------------------- 10 Pedestrian Pathways and Parking Lot Lighting------------------------------------------------------ 11 Street light Design Guidelines --------------------------------------------------------------------------- 11 Industry Standards -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 11 Design Deviations --------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 12 Street light Location and Spacings ------------------------------------------------------------ 12 Poles -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 12-13 Poles Identifications ------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 13 Poles Foundation ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 13 Mast Arms ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 14 City Approved Luminaires ----------------------------------------------------------------------- 14-15 Luminaires Specifications------------------------------------------------------------------------ 15 Optical Distribution Method & Configuration -------------------------------------- 15 Luminaire Housing ----------------------------------------------------------------------- 15-16 Driver & Driver Specifications --------------------------------------------------------- 16-17 Illuminance Lighting Level Methods ---------------------------------------------------------- 17-20 Decorative Lights ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 20-21 Solar Lights ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 21-24 Pull Boxes ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 24-25 Conduits -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 25 Conductors ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 26 Splicing ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 27 Fuse and Fuse Holders ------------------------------------------------------------------------- 27 Photoelectrical Control Unit -------------------------------------------------------------------- 27 Connection to Service Point -------------------------------------------------------------------- 28 Service Cabinet ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 28 Street light Plan Submittals ------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 29 Plan Preparation and Requirement -------------------------------------------------------------------- 29-31 General Notes ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 31-32 Street light Authorization, Construction and Acceptance Processes -------------------------- 33 Street Light Design Process -------------------------------------------------------------------- 33-34 Street Light Construction Process-------------------------------------------------------------- 34 3 Street Light Acceptance Process---------------------------------------------------------------- 35 Street light Construction ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 36 Quality Assurance -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 36 Delivery, Storage, and Handling--------------------------------------------------------------- 36 Pre-Installation ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 36 Installation and Inspections -------------------------------------------------------------------- 37 Acceptance and Energizing -------------------------------------------------------------------- 37-38 As-Built and Warranties ------------------------------------------------------------------------- 38-39 Standard Drawings ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 40 Std. No. 501 (Street light Placement – Intersections) ------------------------------------ 41 Std. No. 502 (Street light Placement – T-Intersection., Cul-de-Sac & Elbows) ---- 42 Std. No. 503 (Street light Placement – Minor, Local & Collector Streets) ----------- 43 Std. No. 504 (Street light Placement – Secondary & Major Streets) ----------------- 44 Std. No. 505 (Street light Placement – Urban Arterial) ---------------------------------- 45 Std. No. 506 (Street light Pole, Pole ID, Mast Arm & Luminaire) --------------------- 46 Std. No. 507 (Street light Foundation Details) --------------------------------------------- 47 Std. No. 508 (Pull Box and Conduit Installation) -------------------------------------------- 48 Std. No. 509 (Service Cabinet) ---------------------------------------------------------------- 49 Forms and Applications------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 50 Street light Authorization Form ---------------------------------------------------------------- 51 Street light Acceptance Form ------------------------------------------------------------------ 52 Street light Transfer of Utility Service Form ------------------------------------------------ 53 SCE SLA (Street light Authorization) -------------------------------------------------------- 54 SCE CSD272 (Contract for Electrical Service) ------------------------------------------- 55 SCE C 503 (Notice of Lamp Changes) ----------------------------------------------------- 56 4 INTRODUCTION
This Street Light Manual for the City of Lake Elsinore has been prepared to establish guidelines for City standards and criterions for the design and installation of all new or relocated street lights located within the City right of way and boundaries. This document shall be used for all street lights on public streets in the City of Lake Elsinore. Deviations from these standards shall require specific approval of the City Engineer.

This Street Light Manual provides for forms, standard drawings, checklists and processes to create a streamline process and a guideline on what to expect from planning to construction and final acceptance of public street lights by the City of Lake Elsinore. This document is not intended or designed as, nor does it establish, a legal standard for lighting. The standards and criterions within this manual do not preclude the use of higher standards.

Note: The term developer in this document is inclusive term and includes, but is not limited to developers, engineers, contractors and/or subcontractors concerning services and responsibilities addressed throughout this manual.

Title 24 of California Code of Regulation institutes a statewide lighting zone system. However, Title 24 alone does not restrict residential lighting or street lights. Riverside County is one of the first governing bodies to restrict outdoor lighting to preserve the dark night sky and to adhere to the American Medical Association (AMA) recommendations on Light-emitting diode (LED). This Street Light Manual will show compliance with dark night sky zones and AMA recommendations.
5 STREET LIGHTS REQUIRED
Street lights shall be required for all lots and parcels being developed or constructed. In addition, street lights may be required for lots and parcels containing existing structures which are being improved or altered, depending on the nature and extent of work.

STREET LIGHTS NOT REQUIRED
Developers shall be required to obtain a written approval from City Engineer prior to designing for the below scenarios where street lights are not required.

Street lights may not be required for single family residential subdivisions having an average lot street frontage of more than 125 feet, and will not be required to install a street light system along the streets, but shall as a minimum, be required to install street lights at all intersections, cul-de-sacs, and other locations deemed by the City Engineer to be essential. (e.g. pedestrian tunnel, pedestrians over-crossing, bridges, curves, etc.)
Street lights shall not be required for planned developments, residential, commercial, and industrial developments where the internal streets are not offered for dedication, a street lighting system will not be required for the internal non-dedicated streets, but shall be provided by the developer on the external public street frontage.

TEMPORARY LIGHTING:

Alternate roadway lighting shall be provided during construction and the temporary street lighting system must be in operation prior to removing the existing street lighting system. If a project is constructed in phases the developer may need to complete a temporary lighting plan. This must meet the current lighting standards.

Temporary lighting systems are required for all public rights-of-way (roadways, sidewalks, walkways, underpasses, overpasses, detour roads, etc.) where existing street lighting systems are being replaced or new street lighting systems are being constructed. The second condition refers to areas with no existing lighting before construction begins – Utilitarian lighting is not considered a lighting system.
- The temporary street lighting system shall be in operation prior to removing the existing street lighting system or constructing the new street lighting system. - The temporary street lighting system shall provide an average illumination and uniformity ratio (ave./min.). See Illumination Lighting Level method of this manual for minimum lighting values. - The Contractor shall make arrangements with power utility company for service or shall provide an alternate power supply.
- The temporary street lighting system must be in operation from dusk to dawn. - The contractor is responsible for restoring street lights out of service within 24 hours. - The contractor shall be responsible (including all related costs) for the installation, operation, maintenance, removal, and liability of the temporary street lighting system (equipment). 6 WIRELESS TELECOMMUNICATION FACILITIES (WTF)
City of Lake Elsinore Municipal Code (LEMC) Chapter 17.415.140 established in order to enhance the ability of wireless communications service providers to effectively and efficiently provide new wireless communications services in the City; encourage the design and placement of wireless communications facilities in a way that minimizes their impact to the visual character, health, economic vitality and biological resources of the City; encourage and maximize the use of existing and approved wireless communications facilities, buildings and other structures while taking into account the use of concealment technology in order to reduce the number of facilities needed to serve businesses and residents in the City; ensure continuous maintenance of new and existing wireless communications facilities; and ensure the timely removal of any unused or outdated wireless communications facilities.

The City preferences for wireless telecommunication facilities to be located on City-owned street light poles within the Public Right-of-Way. Any proposed WTF installed on a street light poles will comply with all the Federal, State and City’s requirements and standards.

When the street light is being installed for the purposes of telecommunication use, all telecommunication equipment electrical power shall be separated from street light connections.

Separate circuits will be provided and any necessary pull box will be installed, to provide a point of connection.

Electrical connections will be metered separately from Public Street Lights. Wireless telecommunication facilities must utilize SCE wireless metering. If SCE wireless metering is not feasible, metering must be contained within available equipment enclosures.

Only one wireless installation will be allowed per street light pole, however, more than one carrier may be allowed to share the equipment of a neutral host provided. Priority to install on public street light poles will be given on a “first-come first-served basis”.

Public street light poles not in compliance with the City’s standards must be upgraded prior to the installation of the wireless telecommunications facility.

Signage on the pole base shall comply with all relevant provisions of ANSI C95.2, and must identify the owner of the attached equipment, equipment, equipment ID, and provide a 24 hour contact number to its network operations and center, and such telephone number shall be able to reach a live person who can exert transmitter power-down control over this site as required by the FCC. 7 UTILITY COMPANY AUTHORIZATION
Southern California Edison (SCE) is the electrical service provider in the City of Lake Elsinore. There are three (3) types of rate schedules or plans that SCE and City of Lake Elsinore will accept. These 3 rate schedules will establish design and construction, funding, ownership and operation and maintenance responsibilities. The developer should become familiar with the SCE schedules in order to expedite approval of plans. The developer must work with the City and get prior approval before moving forward with any of the three SCE rate schedules below.

Schedule LS-1 – This rate applies to un-metered street, highway, and public parking lot lighting that is owned, operated, and maintained by SCE. The City does not encourage this rate schedule for street lights that are within the public right of way or easement.

Schedule LS-2 – This rate applies to un-metered street, highway, road, and public parking lot lighting that City will own, operate, and maintain. Applicant may elect this schedule with prior approval from the City for both new and relocated street lights.

Schedule LS-3 – This rate applies to metered street, highway, road, and public parking lot lighting that City will own, operate, and maintain. Applicant may elect this schedule with prior approval from the City for both new and relocated street lights.

The Southern California Edition (SCE) rates and tables are available online, it shall be the responsibility of the developer to ensure the most current SCE applications and requirements are completed and complied with.

New street lights installation in the City maintained roadways may require the developers to install a meter street light electrical service. The use of metered vs. flat rate electrical billing shall be determined by the Developer’s Engineer in consultation with SCE prior to submittal to the City.

A written notice from the serving utility company, stating that line clearance and service have been checked and are adequate, shall be submitted to the City Engineer for all developments requiring street lighting.
8 CITY OF LAKE ELSINORE AUTHORIZATION
Developer shall review the “Street Light Authorization, Design, Construction and Acceptance Process” of this manual for complete street light authorization process. The City has acquired almost all of its street lights from SCE and are currently, maintained and operated by the City or its contractors. All the street lights that were purchased from SCE are in the SCE Schedule LS-2, that is these lights are all un-metered street lights. Since most of the current City street lights are under the SCE Schedule LS-2 system, the City prefers all new street lights be design for LS-2 systems if possible and practical for the proposed development.

The City understands that SCE Schedule LS-2 may be not be practical for certain developments or utility provider, as such, Street light Authorization Form was developed to ensure the street light designs and SCE LS Schedule is determined early in the design phase to avoid any unnecessary design changes as the project progresses.

Street light Authorization Form via City Engineer approval will initially determine if the project is required to provide for street lights, further, it will determine which SCE Schedule LS-1, LS-2 or LS-3 are appropriate for each specific development.

Once the street lights SCE Schedules are approved for the proposed development, the developer shall comply with the requirements and processes as described in the “Street Light Authorization, Design, Construction and Acceptance” section of this manual.

It is important to note, there are at minimum three stakeholders in the design and construction of the street lights. It is recommended and highly advisable for all developers to have a separate or coordinated discussion with both the City and SCE at the initial stages of design. Starting the discussion with both agencies is highly recommended to ensure the projects move forward with all parties having equivalent understanding and expectations. 9 DEVELOPER’S RESPONSIBILITY
This document is subject to updates; therefore, developers and other interested parties contemplating any action or construction governed by this manual should ensure they are using the most recent revisions.

In addition to this manual, all applicable industry standards and rules and regulations of federal, state, and local governmental agencies are in effect. This manual should not be construed to change or modify the intent of other applicable codes or standards by any other governmental or utility agency serving the project area. Any and all questions regarding “areas of conflict” shall be decided in favor of the more stringent of the various rules and regulations in conflict.

All deviations and modifications from this manual must be approved by the City Engineer. No work may proceed which deviates from the requirements of this manual without written authorization from the City Engineer.

Existing street lights which must be relocated or repositioned as a result of the construction of new streets or driveways into a development shall be the responsibility of the developer.

Where a development abuts a collector street, primary residential street, or minor residential street, assume that street lights will be installed on alternate side of the street, and where the property on the opposite side of the street has developed without street lights, the City Engineer may require the developer to install additional street lights on the frontage of the development to maintain proper street light spacing.

A new service can with a step-down transformer, required as a result of the modification, replacement or relocation of an existing utility service pedestal shall be the responsibility of the developer. The developer shall also be responsible to ensure that power shall remain to existing street lights during the period of any such modification, replacement or relocation of an existing utility service pedestal.

It shall be the responsibility of the developer to ensure that the power shall remain to the existing street light system until the new street light system is completed and functioning correctly.

See below “Developer’s Checklist”, certain items shown in the list may not be required of the developer depending on the City approved SCE LS Schedule. Developer is advised to retain copies of all relevant and applicable items shown below to expedite the transfer of street lights for ownership, maintenance and operations post construction. 10 Developer’s Checklist
Checklist – City of Lake Elsinore
____ Obtain copy of City of Lake Elsinore Street light Manual ____ Retain professional engineer of appropriate discipline ____ Acquire Street light Authorization Form Approval
____ Acquire SCE approval
____ Developer prepares street light plans for City review and approval ____ Developer acquire Services Point Address from City Building Department ____ Developer Submit SCE approved design to City
____ Approved plans submitted for distribution to stakeholders ____ Developer complies with and meets all the project conditions required prior to construction ____ Developer obtains construction permits
____ Developer calls for inspections
____ Developer installs street lights
____ City authorizes SCE to energize lighting
____ Contractor warranty material and workmanship provided to City ____ Developer complies with and meets all the project conditions required post construction ____ Developer requests for transfer of street light ownership, operation and maintenance to City ____ City accepts new street lights and transfers utility billing to City Note: The items shown above is not a complete list of items that may be required for all projects.

Certain projects depending on the type SCE LS Schedule may require more or less items as the project progresses. See “Street light Authorization, Design, Construction and Acceptance Processes” section of this manual for more information.
11 PEDESTRIAN PATHWAYS, TRAILS AND PARKING LOT LIGHTING The City of Lake Elsinore has not standardized lighting for Pedestrian Pathways, Trails, Parking Lots and other areas requiring lighting where standard lighting is not practical due to spacing and height irregularities. Per direction by the City Engineer, the minimum lighting for such areas shall be govern by the Illuminance Lighting Level Methods section of this manual. Developer will be required to provide City the complete system design, layout and photometric plan. Other system components such as pole types and pole foundation, LED luminaries and photoelectrical control unit, pull boxes, services cabinets and etc. may also require by City and when applicable and shall comply with the requirements of this manual.

STREET LIGHT DESIGN GUIDELINES
Street lighting shall be designed in conformance with this manual, the current edition of the Greenbook and “American National Standard Practice for Roadway Lighting” of the American Standards Institute. Data and calculations supporting the satisfaction of the above requirements shall be submitted for review, or the predetermined design standards included herein shall apply.

Industry Standards
LED street light luminaires shall meet the applicable requirements of the following industry standards:
- ANSI/NEMA/ANSLG C78.377-2011-Specifications for the Chromaticity of Solid-State Lighting (SSL) Products
- IES LM-79-08 – Approved Method: Electrical and Photometric Measurements of Solid-State Lighting Products.
- IESNA LM-80-08 – Approved Method measuring Lumen Maintenance of LED chips/Fixture Manufacturer must provide extrapolation for Lumen Maintenance derived from In-Situ testing upon request.
- IEEE C62.42.2-2002-IEEE Recommended Practice on Characterization of Surges in LowVoltage (1000V and less) AC Power Circuits. - IESNA TM-15-11 & Addendum A (replaces TM-15-07 and TM-15-07 Addendum A) – Luminaire Classification System for Outdoor Luminaire; Backlight, Uplight, and Glare (BUG) Ratings.
- ANSI/UL 1598-Poles & luminaires; UL
- ANSI/UL 8750: Additional requirements for LED luminaires as well as drivers and LED arrays Test data that establishes compliance with the requirements of ANSI/UL 1598 and the other industry standards listed above shall be provided upon request.
12 Design Deviations
New or relocated street lights located within City R/W or City easement are required to include light emitting diode (LED) luminaires and shall be constructed per City Standards, Per Plan, and field inspected and approved prior to requesting energizing or acceptance. Deviations from these specifications shall be requested from the City Engineer for Approval prior to commencement of work.

Street light Location and Spacings
See Standard Drawings 501 to 505 for Typical Street Light Location and Spacings.

Street lights shall be located as follows:
- vertical curves (crest and sag locations)
- Intersections – Intersections shall have at least one street light. Intersection street light locations and the number require shall conform to the Standard Drawing 501 and 502. - If the project is conditioned for a signals and there is an existing street light at the intersection the plan has to call for its removal.
- Cul-de-Sacs and Stub-End Streets – All cul-de-sacs and stub-end streets exceeding 125 feet in length, measured from the street light location at the intersection to the right-of-way line at the end of the cul-de-sac or street, shall have a street light within the bulb, or in the case of a stub-end street, at the end of street barricade. Location shall conform to the Standard Drawings 502.
- Spacing – Maximum street light spacing, measured along the street centerline, shall conform to Standard Drawings 503 to 505, except on arterial streets with a 1,000-foot or smaller radius horizontal curve, in which case the maximum spacing is 170 feet. The actual constructed street type and right-of-way width shall be the controlling factor for determination of street light spacing rather than the street classifications (arterial, collector, etc.). - Street light locations shall be adjusted to miss driveways, existing utility poles, and other obstructions by at least five feet.

Poles
See Standard Drawing 506.

When telecom facilities are to be placed on a pole, the pole to be used will comply with the corresponding “telecom” pole standard as indicated by location adjacent to functional classification.

All poles shall be provided with a clear, factory applied Amershield Anti-Graffiti coating.

For Minor, Local and Collector streets where the Right of Way is between 50’ to 68’ Use - Ameron 1C123 POLE
13 For Residential Cul-de-Sacs and Stub End Street
Use - Ameron 1C123 POLE
For Secondary and Major where the Right of Way is between 90’ to 100’ Use – Ameron 1C125 POLE
For Urban Arterial where the Right of Way is between 120’ to 142’ Use - Ameron 1C128 POLE
(Note: Use 8’ arms on poles located adjacent to the sidewalk on residential, collector and arterial streets)
Concrete poles shall be tapered, centrifugally cast and pre‐stressed. Poles shall be black and white marble aggregate or natural exposed aggregate. Pole shape and color shall be uniform for any one project. Replacement poles shall match existing.

Hand hole cover plates shall be aluminum and securing bolts shall be stainless steel tamper‐proof bolts of the type installed with a pent‐head wrench. Anti‐seize shall be used.

The ultimate strength of a pole shall be calculated in accordance with the latest revision of American Concrete Institute (A.C.I.) standard 318. Under working loads (including wind loading, as specified in the latest edition of AASHTO standards), the pole must not be stressed beyond the cracking strength. The pole and mast arm must be capable of handling the EPA and weight of the luminaire.

Poles Identifications
Pole Identification Tags must be provided for all City owned street lights. The Pole Identifications are City specific; it is further specific to the five-voting district with the City of Lake Elsinore. See Standard Drawing 506 for details. These Pole Tag shall be mounted by the Contractor and at the time of transfer to the City for ownership.

Poles Foundation
See Standard Drawing 507
For nonstandard street lights the foundation shall be cast-in-place Portland Cement Concrete, the Concrete shall be 560-C-3250. Unless otherwise shown on the drawing, all street lights to be relocated shall be provided with new foundations and anchor bolts of the proper type and size.

Foundations for street light poles shall be designed for one-hundred-mile-per-hour (100-mph) winds 14 with gusts to one hundred-thirty-miles-per-hour (130 mph) in conformance with requirements of the AASHTO design criteria.

Mast Arm
See Standard Drawing 506
Mast arms shall be minimum two‐inch (2”) I.P.S. galvanized steel or aluminum and shall be self‐ supporting without braces, scrolls or rods. Mounting shall be perpendicular to the street centerline unless otherwise directed by the City Engineer. They shall have a minimum of six inches (6”) of horizontal straight section at the end of the arm to mount to a I.P.S. slip fitter type luminaire mount.

Mast arms shall be eight feet (8’) long for all luminaires unless otherwise specified in the plans and shall be capable of handling the EPA and weight of the luminaire. Steel arms shall conform to ASTM A 120. Aluminum arms shall be corrosion resistant alloys such as Aluminum Association wrought alloys 6061 or 6062 or cast alloys 319 or 356.

All exposed hardware shall be stainless steel. All protected hardware not visible after installation shall be cast aluminum and / or stainless steel, hot‐dipped galvanized. Anti‐seize shall be used.

City Approved Luminaires
See Standard Drawing 506.

Fixtures shall be LED, dimmable, and one of the following or as approved by City Engineer:

For Residential Cul-de-Sacs and Stub End Street
Use – GE Evolve Catalog #: ERL1-0-03-D5-27-A-GRAY-L
For Minor, Local and Collector streets where the Right of Way is between 50’ to 68’ Use – GE Evolve Catalog #: ERL1-0-05-B5-30-A-GRAY-L
For Secondary and Major where the Right of Way is between 90’ to 100’ Use – GE Evolve Catalog #: ERL1-0-09-C5-30-A-GRAY-L
For Urban Arterial where the Right of Way is between 120’ to 142’ Use – GE Evolve Catalog #: ERL1-0-09-B5-30-A-GRAY-L
For Intersection Safety Lights
Use – GE Evolve Catalog #: ERL1-0-13-D5-40-A-GRAY-L
15 Light Emitting Diode Luminaires – All new street light installations shall utilize Light Emitting Diode (LED) luminaires. The luminaire wattages shown on Standard Drawings 506 and above are nominal wattages; system wattages, which include the electronic driver.

Each LED luminaire shall have the manufacturer’s name, trademark, model number, serial number, date of manufacture (month-year), and lot number as identification permanently marked inside each unit and the outside of each packaging box. The operation characteristics such as rated voltage and rated power in watts and Volt-Ampere shall be permanently marked inside each LED luminaire unit.

General description of LED Street light – Standard fixture utilizes terminal block for power input suitable for #6 - #14 AWG wire operates at 700mA. Drive current is not field switchable. A three-pole terminal block capable of accepting #14 to #10 AWG shall be mounted to the housing inside the electrical compartment. Luminaire shall be provided with capability for optional backlight control.

Complete assembly weight shall not exceed 45lbs. Fixture is designed to mount on a schedule 40, 2” nominal pipe size (NPS) horizontal tenon (minimum 8” in length) and is adjustable +/-5 degrees to allow for fixture leveling (includes two axis T-level to aid in this process). Fixture, including the LEDs, drivers and electrical components, shall carry a limited ten-year warranty and housing paint and finish shall carry a ten-year warranty.

Luminaires Specifications
Optical Distribution Method & Configuration
Optical configurations shall meet the following criteria:

1. Close contact refractors to be employed for optical distribution.

2. Refractors are to be polymeric material rated 5VA, f1 rating

3. Lumen maintenance at 50,000 hours of life to be no less than 88% of initial lumen output

4. Shall have 95% survival rate at 50,000 hours

5. Integral 10K surge suppressor for diode and entire system protection Luminaire Housing
Luminaire housing shall be furnished with an optical assembly, be powder-coated silver, include a level bubble to facilitate installation, allow for tool-less entry and shall include an integral twist-lock type receptacle for photoelectric cell control in accordance with the latest EEI-NEMA standards which is adjustable with respect to north and prewired to the terminal board. Photocell control shall be for a 7-pin receptacle per ANSI C136.41.

Luminaire external housing shall have a minimum rating of IP66 as specified in IEC 60529, with the ability to shed water from inside the housing (i.e. weep holes). 16 The LED luminaire shall be designed for horizontal mounting. The LED assembly shall have a slip‐ fitted mounting bracket capable of attaching to a two‐inch (2”) pipe without the need for special mounting parts. They shall be installed in a horizontal position with leveling and clamping to the mast arm pipe accomplished by tightening mounting bolts, which are externally or internally accessible.

Bolts shall be minimum 5/8” x2” size and stainless steel.

Luminaire circuitry shall include quick connect / disconnects to allow easy separation and removal of driver and power door. Grounding requirements: ANSI/UL Standards and NFPA 70.

The luminaire power unit assembly shall consist of an integral driver, capacitor, 10K surge suppressor, and heavy‐duty terminal block. The power unit assembly shall be mounted on a separate component of the luminaire to facilitate replacement.

The luminaire optical chamber shall have a minimum rating of IP66 as specified in IEC 60529.

The luminaire housing cooling system shall consist of a passive heat sink with no fans, pumps, or liquids and shall be designed and constructed to accept a standard plug type, locking, three‐pole, three‐wire, street light photocontrol. The fixture and finish endurance tested to withstand 5,000 hours of elevated ambient salt fog conditions as defined in ASTM Standard B 117.

All fasteners shall be stainless steel and all polycarbonate components shall be UV stabilized.

An easily‐viewable nameplate shall be permanently affixed to the inside of each luminaire housing.

The nameplate shall contain the following information: manufacturer’s name manufacturer’s catalog number, date of manufacture (month and year), plant location, input power consumption, driver output current, IEC IP Rating, correlated color temperature (CCT), IES light distribution type, IESNA TM‐15 BUG ratings, and serial number. Utility approved luminescent name plate with light source and wattage shall be permanently affixed on the exterior of the Luminaire to be visible from the ground.

The driver assembly shall be enclosed in a separate compartment from the optical assembly. The entire fixture shall be “wet listed” with the optical assembly compartment being rated at IP66. The LED Luminaire shall be constructed to provide the required light distribution with the lower edge of the Luminaire housing below the entire light source close contact refractors. The Luminaire must be Dark Sky Compliant with U0 bug rating.

Driver & Driver Specifications
Driver: Light Emitting Diode (LED) drivers shall be component‐type consisting of precision wound coils and welded magnetic steel laminations assembled together and impregnated with baked‐on, insulating, weatherproof varnish; and metal‐cased, hermetically‐sealed capacitor, suitable for use on 17 multiple distribution circuits with 60Hz, 120 or 240-Volt rating. The operating sound pressure noise level shall not exceed the ambient noise level by more than five (5) decibels at 30‐feet when measured by a sound level meter conforming to the American Standards for Sound Level Meters.

Where the ambient noise level is less, a minimum of 40 decibels shall be assumed.

Power supply / driver shall be field replaceable by means quick‐disconnect connectors and easy access mounting hardware. Power supply / driver shall be wet‐listed in the US and Canada, UL, ROHS compliant, meet Caltrans 611 vibration testing and GR‐63‐CORE section 4.4.1/5.4.2 earthquake zone 4.

Driver Specifications: Electronic; voltage range = universal 120 – 277 v +/‐ 10%; frequency = 50/60 Hz; power factor > 90% @ full load; THD < 20% @ full load; output ripple < 10%; output shall be isolated; case temperature rated for 6‐40 to 60C; fully encased and potted; overheat protection, self‐ limited short circuit protection, and overload protected – minimum integral 10k surge protection tested in accordance with IEEE C62.41 and ANSI standard 62.41.2; Driver Life Rating not less than 100,000 hours.

Illuminance Lighting Level Methods
Illuminance lighting level methods maybe used in certain cases for Street lights with prior approval from the City Engineer. The design values for Illuminance from AASHTO Roadway Lighting Design Guide shall be used for non-street lights and pedestrian areas such as sidewalks, pathway, bikeways and parking lots. Note: Parking Lot illuminance design values shall meet values similar to the value in the table for pedestrian ways.

Illuminance is a measurement of the amount of light that hits the pavement or pathway surface.

Illuminance is measured in foot-candles. Illuminance layouts may be designed with lighting design software or with illuminance templates. The illuminance at any point will be the sum of illuminance from one or several contributing sources.

The level and uniformity of illuminance along a typical roadway, pedestrian paths, sidewalks, parks and parking lot depends on several factors, including the lumen output or the lights source, luminaire distribution, mounting height, luminaire position, pavement reflectance, and pole spacing and arrangement. The same average level can be obtained by different installation arrangement, such as a few high-output light sources or a greater number of low-output sources.

The proper light loss factor (LLF) should be used in all lighting calculations. LLF is depreciation factor applied to the calculated initial average illuminance. The recommended lighting levels for continuous lighting are in the table below. These values are based on Table 3-5a from the AASHTO Roadway Lighting Design Guide.
18 The table below contains the recommended illuminance value for continuous lighting of roadways based on roadway type and general land use for the City of Lake Elsinore.

Illuminance Design Values
Roadway and Walkway
Classification
Area
Classifications/
General Land
Use
Average Maintained
Illuminance (Eavg)
Minimum
Illuminance
(Emin)
Illuminance
Uniformity Ratio
(Eavg/Emin)
(foot-candles) (min) (foot -
candles) avg/min (max)
Interstate and other freeways
Commercial 0.6 to 1.1 0.2 3:1 or 4:1
Intermediate 0.6 to 0.9 0.2 3:1 or 4:1
Residential 0.6 to 0.8 0.2 3:1 or 4:1
Urban Arterial
Commercial 1.6 3:01
Intermediate 1.2 As 3:01
Residential 0.8 uniformity 3:01
Secondary and Major
Commercial 1.4 ratio allows 4:01
Intermediate 1 4:01
Residential 0.7 4:01
Collector
Commercial 1.1 4:01
Intermediate 0.8 4:01
Residential 0.6 4:01
Local, Residential
Commercial 0.8 6:01
Intermediate 0.7 6:01
Residential 0.4 6:01
Alleys
Commercial 0.6 6:01
Intermediate 0.4 6:01
Residential 0.3 6:01
Sidewalks, Parking Lots
Commercial 1.3 3:01
Intermediate 0.8 4:01
Residential 0.4 6:01
Pedestrian Path, Bike Ways
and Parking Lots All 2 3:01
Illumination for Intersections - The recommended lighting levels for intersections of continuously lit roadway are in the table below. They are based on the functional classifications the intersecting roadways and level of pedestrian use. The values are taken from Table in ANSI/IES RP-8-14, Roadway lighting.

The functional classifications of roadways are based on the Institute of Transportation Engineers (ITE) Guidelines for Residential Subdivision Street Design:
19 Major - over 3,500 average daily traffic (ADT)
Collector - 1,500 to 3,500 ADT
Local - 100 to 1,500 ADT
Illumination for Intersections
Functional Classification
Average Maintained Illumination at Pavement
by Pedestrian Area Classification in fc Uniformity Eavg/Emin High Medium Low
Major/Major 3.4 2.6 1.8 3
Major/Collector 2.9 2.2 1.5 3
Major/Local 2.6 2 1.3 3
Collector/Collector 2.4 1.8 1.5 4
Collector/Local 2.1 1.6 1 4
Local/Local 1.8 1.4 0.8 6
Safety Lighting - Safety lighting includes lighting rural and urban interchanges, railroad crossings, pedestrian conflict areas, and other points of nighttime hazard.

Lighting of Isolated Interactions and Interchanges - The recommended lighting levels for isolated intersections are shown in the table below. These values are based Table 9 from ANSI/IES RP-8-14, Roadway Lighting. For roadway intersections and interchanges the road classifications with highest light level should be used. Roadway classifications in this table are defined the same as in the Illuminance Design Values table displayed earlier in this section.

Illumination of Isolated Intersections
Road Classification Average Illuminance (fc) Uniformity Ratio (Eavg/Emin) Arterial 0.9 3
Collector 0.6 4
Local 0.4 6
Pedestrian Area – Lighting for pedestrian areas should be designed using both horizontal and vertical illuminance. Horizontal illuminance levels help the pedestrian to see the walkway. Vertical 20 illuminance level helps the pedestrian to see and recognize other pedestrians in the walkway. The below contains the recommended value for pedestrian areas. The table is based on Tables 4, 5, 6, and 7 from ANSI/IES RP-8-14, Roadway Lighting.

Illumination for Pedestrian Areas
Maintained Illuminance Values for Walkways
Area Classification Description E avg (fc) EV min (fc) E avg/Emin* High Pedestrian
Conflict Areas
Mixed Vehicle and Pedestrian 2 1 4
Pedestrian Only 1 0.5 4
Medium Pedestrian
Conflict Areas Pedestrian Areas 0.5 0.2 4
Low Pedestrian
Conflict Areas
Rural/Semi-Rural Areas 0.2 0.06 10
Low Density Residential (2 or
fewer dwelling units per acre) 0.3 0.08 6
Medium Density Residential (2.1
to 6.0 dwelling units per acre) 0.4 0.1 4
Pedestrian Portion of
Pedestrian/Vehicular
Underpasses
Day 10 5 4
Night 4 2 3
Decorative Lights
The City Engineer may approve the use of Decorative poles and luminaires if warranted by the character of the surrounding neighborhood.

Decorative street lights of a post-top design with luminaires having a vertically mounted non cut-off light source will be discouraged. Street light luminaires of a full-cut off design mounted on a mast arm are preferred.

1. The developer shall submit design calculations for the pole spacing, including photometric calculations and plots from an appropriate computer program.

2. Decorative street light luminaires shall be fitted with house-side shields, if necessary, to prevent glare and light trespass on adjacent residential properties.

3. The materials and specifications used in the manufacture of the Decorative street lights must be approved by the City Engineer. Street light components manufactured of Aluminum alloys containing Silicon or Copper will not be permitted. Powder-coat finishes that cannot be refreshed by cleaning and painting in the field at a future date will not be permitted. A certification from the manufacturer that the above criteria are met may be required by the City Engineer prior to approval.

4. Decorative street light poles and decorative bases having a paint or powder-coat finish must be galvanized inside and out, then painted equipment must be factory finished and delivered 21 wrapped in a protective layer that will prevent damage to the paint or powder-coat finish during shipping and handling.

5. Decorative street light equipment having a paint or powder-coat finish must be raised at least nine-inches above finished grade on a concrete pedestal. The developer shall supply street light foundation and pedestal details for approval by the City Engineer.

6. Installation details and equipment specifications for Decorative street lights, including the equipment manufacturer’s name, model and paint numbers, shall be included on the street light plan sheets. The information shall include details for the foundation and pedestal construction and a note indicating the requirement for spare as detailed above.

Solar Lights
Solar powered LED street lights have brought very promising opportunities for applications in street lighting with recent advances in LED and Battery technology. It is feasible in the future that the City will adopt standalone solar photovoltaic street lighting system for new and retro-fitted street lights.

Since many manufacturers have come up with various luminaire styles, color temperature, wattages and other parameters, the City will accept Solar Street lights, Solar Parking Lot Lights and Solar Pathway Lighting on case by case basis and with prior approval from City Engineer.

Solar powered street light benefits include:
- No Line voltage, trenching, or metering;
- No power outages;
- Able to employ new battery backup for cloudy or rainy days - No single point of failure
- Possible federal and state and utility incentives
- Reduced emissions from electricity production
- Contains daylight sensors or hour preset, no running or maintenance cost - Safe 12 Volt/24volt circuit with little to no risk of electric shock.

Solar power street light on the other hand become inoperable should low-sun conditions persist beyond the storage capacity of the street light batteries. Due to the continued advances both in the LED and Batteries to power the Solar Luminaires, City will not adopt and make Solar street lights mainstream standards until Solar street lights are more reliable, efficient and standardized.

A basic solar powered LED street light system component are:
- Solar Panel
- LED Luminaire
- Battery
- Controller
- Pole and Foundation
22 Developers proposing Solar Lighting shall provide the following component information to City of Lake Elsinore prior to approving solar lighting for applicable projects, in addition, photometric plan will be required.

Solar Panel
Manufacturer Name
Brand/Model
PV module Type
Rating Power
Maximum Power Voltage
Maximum Power Current
Open Circuit Voltage
Short Circuit Current
Frame
Size
Weight
Test Temperature
Junction Box
Warranty
LED Luminaires
Manufacturer Name
Brand/Model
LED Type
Luminaire input Voltage
Power consumption
Lumen Output
Color temperature
IES lighting type
Material
Lens
Operation temperature
CRI
Warranty
Battery
23 Manufacturer Name
Brand/Model
Battery Type
Operating Voltage
Battery Efficiency
Battery Life Cycle
Capacity
Max. discharge current
Operating temperature range
Self-discharge
Dimensions
Weight
Warranty
The following minimum information must be included on the label of the battery and label of battery must be fixed firmly on screen printed on the battery casing:

1. Brand and name of manufacturer

2. Model and type

3. Rated capacity in Ampere-hours

4. Nominal Voltage
Controller
Manufacturer Name
Brand/Model
System Voltage
Max. charge/load current
Adjustment range:

Evening/morning hours
Night/day detection
Type of Protection
Pole and Foundation
Height
Diameter
Thickness
Material
Finishing
24 The Pole foundation design shall be per pole manufacturer specifications, or at minimum per City Standard No. 507. The foundation design and details must be signed by a Professional Civil or Structural Engineer licensed in the state of California. The foundation shall be cast-in-place Portland Cement Concrete, the Concrete shall be 560-C-3250. Unless otherwise shown on the drawing, all street lights to be relocated shall be provided with new foundations and anchor bolts of the proper type and size. Foundations for street light poles shall be designed for one-hundred-mile-per-hour (100-mph) winds with gusts to one hundred-thirty-miles-per-hour (130 mph) in conformance with requirements of the AASHTO design criteria.

Solar Light General Notes:

1. All necessary Spare parts/Tools have to be provided by the contractor.

2. The complete set of materials shall be warranted by the contractor against any installation defects for a minimum period of 1 years from the date of installation.

3. After completion of the proposed work, clearances of all temporary works/ materials shall be the sole responsibility of the contractor and this shall be removed immediate after the requirement of such temporary work is completed.

4. The contractor will conduct on-site training of the City or it’s contractor staff regarding the assembly, start-up, operation, maintenance and repairs of the materials.

Pull Boxes
See Standard Drawing 508
Pull Boxes shall be per Caltrans Standard ES-8, Pull Box No. 3-1/2. All pull boxes, including the size and type, shall be shown and identified on the street light plans. Pull boxes shall be installed at all locations as follows:
- Located within five feet (5’) of each street light
- Where more than two conduit runs intersect
- where conduit runs are more than 200 feet long
- Located at the end of the conduit run
- at critical angle points
- and at such locations ordered by City Engineer
The pull box that feeds into SCE service point shall be a #5 pull box and be within 5’ of the service pedestal.

The bottom of the pull box shall rest firmly on a six-inch (6”) thick bed of three-quarter-inch (3/4”) crushed rock extending six inches (6”) beyond the outside edges of the box. Pull boxes shall be installed within the sidewalk, if possible, behind sidewalk or five feet (5’) behind the face of curb or dike and, where practical, shall be installed with the short side parallel to the curb and near the street 25 light. They shall not be installed in any part of a driveway or other traveled way. Pull box covers shall be inscribed “STREET LIGHTING” and shall be secured with bolts, cap screws or studs and nuts made of brass, stainless steel or non-corroding materials. Pull boxes shall be tamper resistant and utilize a special key tool for opening. Anti‐seize shall be used.

Conduits:

All conduit runs, including the size and type shall be shown and identified in the plans. see City of Lake Elsinore Standard Drawing 508 as a guideline for typical conduit layouts.

For a system designed using the 3-wire system, only 2 circuits (one set of 3 wires) shall be allowed in any conduit. Circuits based on the 2-wire system and the 3-wire system shall be mixed in any conduit. All circuits may, however, be mixed in the same conduit from the service enclosure to the first pull box.

The Design may include more than two circuits in a conduit if the conductors for each circuit (2 wire) or set of circuit (3-wire) are identified by conductor insulation which is a solid color or a basic color with a permanent colored striped. The identification stripe shall be continuous over the entire length of the conductor.

New development shall install minimum 2-inch conduit, or larger as required, with one No. 10 AWG stranded pull wire from the last light on each end of the system to the adjacent property line, where the adjacent property has no existing street lighting system. - Conduit shall be two-inch (2”) UL approved heavy wall polyvinyl chloride (PVC) pipe, Schedule

80. - Larger conduit may be used, at the contractor’s expense, provided the larger size is used for the entire run between pull boxes. Reducing coupling will not be allowed. - Conduit shall be encased in a minimum of three inches (3”) of sand on all sides. - Conduit will have a minimum of 3” clearance horizontally from trench wall. - Conduit shall be laid to a depth of not less than thirty inches (30”) unless placed under sidewalk in which case only eighteen inches (18”) shall be required - Location tape shall be installed above the sand layer along the length of the conduit trench - The minimum sweep radii shall be twenty-four inches (24”). - Conduit runs shall have a maximum length of 200 feet
Conduit laid in open trench shall not be covered nor shall trench or inspection hole be backfilled until accepted by the City Engineer or his designated representative. 26 Conductors:

All conductors, including quantity and size, shall be identified in the plans. Unless otherwise specified, conductors shall be stranded copper, sized in accordance with these standards and the National Electrical Code.

All conductors shall be stranded copper, XHHW‐2, #8 AWG minimum. Maximum wire size shall be #6 AWG. Neither aluminum nor direct‐burial cable shall be accepted. All street light system shall be provided with 240V metered service.

Wire shall conform to the applicable portion of ASTM B3 and B8. Wire connectors shall be approved by the City Engineer or his designated representative and shall bear the UL seal of approval. The installation procedure, connector size and crimping tools shall conform to the manufacturer’s recommendations. Wire from the base of the pole to the luminaire shall be #10. For 120‐volt installations (if approved by city engineer), the wires shall be black and white, with black being the hot wire and fused. For 240‐volt installations, one hot wire shall be black and the other shall be red.

Both hot wires shall be fused. Any ground wires shall be green and connected to a clamp attached to an anchor bolt.

Service runs parallel to the street shall be installed under the sidewalk where new sidewalk is being constructed or directly behind the existing sidewalk. Street light circuits shall alternate from light to light. Voltage drop shall not exceed five percent (5%). 27 Splicing:

Splices shall be permitted in pull boxes and lighting standard bases ONLY. All splices shall be waterproof with penatrox (or approved equal) and shall be used with butt splice and shrink tubing.

Fuses and Fuse-Holders
Fuses: Fuses shall be slow blow 13/32” x 1 ½” in‐line type in 5-amp size (unless specified otherwise by the City). The fuse shall be installed in the hot leg of the lighting conductor. The circuit shall be fused in the base of the pole and not in the pull box. 240‐volt installations require each leg to be fused using a double fuse holder and two fuses of appropriate size. Fuses shall be Bussmann Series type FNQ or approved equal.

Fuseholders: Fuse holders shall be completely waterproof, shall grip the fuse in the load side section when opened, and be able to take a 13/32” x 1 ½” fuse, with crimp‐type tubular terminals of a proper size for the cable in the particular light. Heat shrink both crimp ends. Fuse holders shall be Bussmann Series type HEB or HEX with insulating boots or approved equal.

Photoelectrical Control Unit
Photo Cell and Receptacle – All Lighting Emitting Diode (LED) luminaires shall have a photocell receptacle. On multiple service systems where a photocell is not utilized on every individual luminaire, a rain tight shorting cap shall be installed on the unused receptacle.

Fisher-Pierce # TRS-2 105-305 VAC LED control or approved equal.

The photoelectric unit shall consist of a photoelectric cell in a weatherproof housing which plugs into an EEI-NEMA twist-lock receptacle integral with the luminaire and shall be installed with the clear UV stabilized photocell window facing north. The control unit shall contain a uniformly coated cadmium sulfide photoelectric cell suitable for operation with 120 or 240-volt line supply with surge protection to prevent damage and made to fail in the “ON” position. The unit shall have a HID load rating of 1,800 VA with a Tungsten load rating of 1,000 watts. The unit shall have time delay capabilities.

The response level of the unit to changing light levels shall remain stable throughout the life of the unit (5,000 operations). The “turn-on” level shall be nominal 1 foot-candle and the “turn-on: turn-off” ratio shall be 1.5.
28 Connection to Service Point
Contractor shall contact SCE for a service point. SCE will identify what service is available and where it is located. In rare cases, a new street light can be connected to an existing street light circuit, but not without written permission from the City Engineer. New voltage drop calculations shall be required to verify that existing circuit can handle additional load.

The service point shall be in the City’s right‐of‐way; otherwise, the City will require an easement to the service point.

Service Cabinet:

See Standard Drawing 509 for service cabinet information. All service cabinets shall be single meter service cabinets. City may require dual meter service with unmetered section at discretion of city engineer.

Service cabinets shall also meet the following specifications:
- All cabinets shall be stainless steel Myers or approved equal. - Single meter service (Meyers Model USP16‐M2200‐112CTB or most applicable model number).
- Shall include a photoelectric socket and control unit with time delay capabilities. - Shall include factory installed photocell shield.
- Shall include test block switches.
- Shall be anodized aluminum or stainless steel.
- Shall include branch circuits per project design plans. 29 STREET LIGHT PLAN SUBMITTALS
In order to obtain uniformity and allow easier review of street light plans, the following criteria shall apply to all street light plans submitted. The Developer preparing plans and specifications for street lights shall adhere to the following design and plan preparation criteria:

The plans shall show and identify all adjacent subdivisions, existing and proposed utilities and driveways, street lights to be installed, all existing lights in the immediate vicinity of the project, all conduits and conductor runs, service points and addresses, trees within 20’ from street lights, and all applicable provisions and details specified in these standards or upon request by City Engineer.

Plan Preparation and Requirements:
- All sheets must by 24” x 36” overall size, with a ½” margin on all sides except that the left margin to be 1-1/2”. City CAD Title Blocks can be downloaded online via Engineering Department website.
- All plans shall be drawn to scale of 1” =40’ or 1” =20’. - North arrows shall point to the top of left of the sheet, if possible - Project boundaries, tract limits, Right of Way lines, Easement and Utility Poles (Proposed vs.

Existing must be clearly identifiable).
- All stationing shall refer to centerline of the street unless indicated on the plan and shall read from left to right, and shall increase from south to north or west to east. No negative station will be allowed.
- Dimensions to street lights from centerline, curb lines, and right of way lines - Lot lines and Lot Numbers
- Minimum lettering size is 0.10”
- Plans are to be signed and stamped by the applicant professional engineer. - Show existing street lights within the project limits, and 300’ beyond. Show “future” street lights in a reasonable placement format to demonstrate that this design will work both now, and when future development occurs. Label signalized intersections. - If any street light will be installed much later, they need to be shown and called out for assessment only.
- Avoid placing street lights on boundary lines, this can create problems for assessment and funding of the maintenance/energy charges if the street light is partially in one property line and partially in another.

Title Sheet shall include:
- Vicinity Map – showing project location, Major cross streets, City limits, North arrow and scale. - Index Map
- Abbreviations
- Plan legend and symbols
30 - Quantity Tables – No. of poles, type, height, No. of fixtures, type, wattage, lumens - General and Construction Notes
- Basis of bearing – shall be the same as the tract map - Benchmark – number description, date (year of adjustment), and elevation to three (3) decimal places.
- Developer name, address and telephone number
- Engineering firm name, address, telephone number, date of plan preparation, signature and number of the Registered Applicant Engineer.
- Declaration of Responsible Engineer in Charge
- Certificate of approval of the City of Lake Elsinore Engineer shall appear on all sheets in the following form:
“These plans have been reviewed for compliance with the appropriate conditions of development and/or City and State laws, and have been found acceptable.”
_________________________________________________
City Engineer RCE # Expiration Date
- Acceptance block for signature and date for all other agencies, as necessary. - Revision block with revision number, date, initial of design engineer, description of plan changes, and spaces for City approval and date.

Design and details shall include the following information:
- Design submittals not containing full electrical designs signed by applicable professional engineer or SCE will be rejected.
- If non-standard street lights and fixtures are proposed by developer, prior approval from City Engineer will be required. Non‐standard street lights will be required to provide structural pole foundation calculations, and photometric analysis along associated roadways. Design calculations shall be prepared by applicable professional engineer and shall be wet‐stamped. - The design plan sheets shall show and identify the complete street light system, including existing and proposed SCE point of services, all meter cabinets, fuses, conduit sizes, runs, wires and trench depths, pull boxes, street light poles and foundation, fixtures and other associated items to complete a street light system. Depending on the SCE LS-1, LS-2 or LS-3 design, developer may not be required to provide for some or most of the above items, certain items above are typically designed as part of the SCE design, and therefore will be not be required in the developer’s design.
- Depending on SCE LS design, developer’s design sheets will require information on each street light foundation, pole, fixture type, and information on street station, SCE service point (indicate serving voltage 240v), meter, cabinet and circuit information, 31 - Voltage Drop calculations for wire sizing are required for every circuit run which has more than (2) street lights and whenever the service from the service point is more to the last (furthest) street light exceeds 500’. Street light circuits shall alternate from street light to street light.

When laying conduits across a street, they shall be at right angles to the curb line.

General Notes

1. Note to Contractors: The existence and location of any underground utility pipes or structures shown on these plans were obtained by a search of available records. Approval of these plans by the City of Lake Elsinore does not constitute a representation as to the accuracy or completeness of the location, nor the existence or non-existence of any underground utility, pipe or structure within the limits of the project. The Contractor is required to take all due precautionary measures for the protection of all utilities, pipes or structures, whether shown on these plans or not. Any utility(ies) damaged during the performance of the work shall be repaired or replaced to the satisfaction of the governing agency by the Contractor, at his expense.

2. All work shall conform to the most current requirement of City of Lake Elsinore’s current improvement standards and specification and as indicated in this manual. It is the Contractor’s responsibility to be familiar with these standards and codes at all times.

3. The Contractor shall notify the City Public Works Inspector, forty-eight (48) hours prior to beginning any work. Call for inspection at (951) 674-3124, extension 247, between the hours of 9:00 am and 4:00 pm, Monday through Thursday.

4. Contractor shall maintain traffic control in accordance with Caltrans Traffic Manual and Watch Manual at all times during construction, as approved by the City Engineer or his representative. Failure to do so shall require immediate work stoppage.

5. It shall be the Contractor’s responsibility to have a dependable representative at the job site, at all times during construction.

6. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to arrange for the necessary relocation of any utilities. Contractor shall notify all utility companies involved, at least forty-eight (48) hours prior to beginning work. The Contractor shall also contact Underground Service Alert (U.S.A.) at 1- 800-422-4133, at least forty-eight (48) hours prior to beginning work.

7. The Contractor shall be responsible for the clearing of the proposed work area and relocation and cost of all existing utilities.

8. An Encroachment Permit shall be required for all construction work done within Public Rightsof-way. Before issuance of said permit, the Contractor/Developer must provide the City Engineer with Certificate of Insurance and required bonding for public improvements. The encroachment permit must be present at the job site during the total time of the project construction along with an approved set of improvement plans.

9. If an Encroachment Permit is required through the District No. 8 office of Caltrans, please make reference to this fact in the “General Notes” section of the improvement plans. 32 10.The Service point are subject to revision by final SCE plans, it shall be the developer’s responsibility to provide the proper service to the street lights shown on this plan

11.The developer shall be responsible for providing conduit and conductors from the street lights to approved service point furnished by SCE.

12.It shall be the responsibility of the developer or contractor to apply for an encroachment permit for work performed within City right-of-way.
- SCE Service planner _______________, Work order number ______________ - Energy charges paid by _____________ (Developer, LMD, OTHER).

Other Notices/Precedence
These specifications are not complete – it is a supplement to the latest edition of the Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction “Green Book” and the City of Lake Elsinore’s Standard Special Provision. In case of conflict with the Green Book or City of Lake Elsinore Standard Special Provisions, these specifications shall take precedence. 33 STREET LIGHT AUTHORIZATION, DESIGN, CONSTRUCTION

AND ACCEPTANCE PROCESSES
Note: Developer is encouraged to review the beginning of this manual to initially determine if the project is required to provide for street lights. Developer shall obtain authorization from City Engineer via Street light Authorization Form to determine whether the project is required or not required to provide for street lights.

If determined via this manual and Street light Authorization Form the project is required to provide for street lights, Developer will be required to utilize the below process and complete the necessary forms and applications.

Street light Design Process
- Developer completes and submits to Engineering Department Street Light Authorization Form. - City reviews and signs Street light Authorization Form, City determines project specific SCE Schedule type for electrical service LS-1, LS-2 or LS-3. - Engineering Department determines responsible party for design, construction, operation and maintenance and associated fees of the required street lights. - Upon City and Developer agreeing on SCE Schedule the following items will be required during design reviews.
- For LS-1
- Developer prepares street light plans for the street light locations only. These street light locations can be part of other plan submittals such as improvement plans, if Engineering Department allows.
- Developer submits street light/improvement plans to City for review and approval - Developer completes SCE Street light Authorization (SLA) Form for City review and approval.

Developer completes SCE CSD272, if no existing account is provided in the SLA form. - Developer submits the street light/improvement plans, signed SLA form and if required CSD272 to SCE for design and approval of LS-1. This will determine responsible entity for energy, maintenance and operation fees.
- Once street light plans and SCE designs are approved, Developer submits Mylars for the City Engineer signature, once the Mylar’s are signed, Developer will make copy for the signed Mylar’s and keep for record and potential As-Built changes. - For LS-2
- If existing street lights are being retro-fitted with new Fixtures, developer will prepare and complete SCE C503 form and submit to City for review and approval. Engineering Department will review for consistency in the LED Fixtures type and other required parameters. This will also initiate the SCE new charge rate.
34 - If new street lights are proposed, developer maybe required to gain prior approval for LS-2 design from SCE. Developer hires professional electrical engineer, and submits 90% street light plans.
- Following City comments, Developer submits 100% street light plans for approval - Developer submits to SCE the approved street light plan, and CSD272 form to initiate SCE design
- Once street light plans and SCE designs are approved, Developer submits Mylars for the City Engineer signature, once the Mylar’s are signed, Developer will make copy for the signed Mylar’s and keep for record and potential As-Built changes - For LS-3
- Developer submits 90% street light plans signed by a professional electrical engineer. - Concurrently, Developer requests for Meter Cabinet address from building department. - Following City comments, Developer submits 100% street light plans signed and stamped by professional electrical engineer.
- Developer submits approved street light plans, meter cabinet address, and CSD272 form to SCE to initiate LS-3 design. Note: the service point and address must be exactly the same in the SCE and Developer street light final design plans.
- Once street light plans and SCE designs are approved, Developer submits Mylars for the City Engineer signature, once the Mylar’s are signed, Developer will make copy for the signed Mylar’s and keep for record and potential As-Built changes.

Street light Construction Process
- Developer Applies for Encroachment Permit and submits 3 copies of the signed street light plans and the associated bond and inspection fees to Engineering Department. - Developer requests for Pre-Job meeting prior to construction with Engineering Inspector. - Once approved by Engineering Inspector, Developer requests for construction inspection on the street light foundation, conduits, pull boxes, and the associated pole, fixture type and other associated materials per approved street light plans. Meter Cabinet and associated material are inspected by City Building Department.
- Once Street lights are constructed, Developer requests for walk thru with Engineering Inspector to verify Completion of Street lights per approved street light plan. - Engineering Inspector approves the Street lights and requests for As-Built if changes were made to the approved street light plan, Developer signs and submit the As-Built to City for approval, City Engineer signs and approves the As-Built. 35 Street light Acceptance Process
- Developer submits Street Light Acceptance Form, and the associated required documents to Engineering Department for acceptance of street light improvements and requests for initiating associated bond releases.
- Engineering, Public Works, Building and Finance reviews and approves Street Light Acceptance Form. Once Street Light Acceptance Form is fully executed, City Council through regular meeting accepts public improvements, following Council Action Engineering initiate associated bond release.
- Developer Submits Street Light Transfer of Utility Service Form to initiates transfer of utility service to City, Developer submits the copy of signed SLA, CSD272, Billing account number and current SCE bill for the associated street lights.
- Engineering Department works with SCE and requests a transfer of utilities be initiated - SCE contacts the Developer and fills out turn off/turn on form - SCE transfers the Developer’s account to the City account for payment - City transfers street lights to City’s O&M contractor for Street lights - City and City O&M contractor updates street light maintenance inventory - City and City O&M contractor updates GIS and other associated maps and web applications - City updates fixed asset report for street lights
- City adds street light assets to the Special Tax Assessment for the subject properties - Upon one year of street lights/street improvements acceptance from City, Developer requests for remaining bond retentions to be released.
- Engineering Inspector approves bond retention release after confirming the street lights are in good standing.
36 STREET LIGHTS CONSTRUCTION
Quality Assurance:
- LED luminaire manufacturer shall provide a 10-year warranty on LED luminaires that includes LEDs, housing, drivers, and finish.
- LED luminaire manufacturer shall use IESNA LM-80 data to predict luminaire lifetime and shall demonstrate a suitable testing program incorporating high heat, high humidity and thermal shock test regimens to ensure system reliability and to substantiate lifetime claims. - Electrical and light technical properties shall be recorded for each LED luminaire during manufacture.
- This should include lumen output, CCT, and CRI at a minimum. Each luminaire shall utilize a unique serial numbering scheme. Technical properties must be made available for a minimum of 5 years after the date of manufacture.
- Luminaires shall be fully assembled and individually electrically tested prior to shipment.

Delivery, Storage, and Handling
- Deliver luminaires and components carefully to avoid breakage, bending and scoring finishes. - Do not install damaged equipment.
- Store luminaires and accessories in original cartons and in a clean, dry space; protect from weather and construction traffic.

Pre-Installation
- Contractor shall set up a pre‐construction meeting prior to ordering of any materials or any work taking place.
- Contactor shall provide material submittal drawings for city review and approval prior to ordering of any material.
- Obtain a City R/W permit for any work performed within a City R/W or City easement.

Attached to the R/W permit are the construction requirements applicable to all work performed within the City R/W.
- Call underground Service Alert at 800‐422‐4133 at least 48 hours before excavating. - Where a street light installation is being installed for the purposes of telecommunication use the following approvals must be obtained:
- Right-of-way Permit: For work in the public right of way - Building Permit: For foundation and Service Metering
- Administrative Wireless Telecommunication Facility Permit (Planning): For approval of facility. 37 Installation and Inspections
- Concrete and/or asphalt removal & replacement shall be per City of Lake Elsinore Standards or as directed by the City Engineer. A sidewalk extension may be required to meet ADA access requirements.
- Conduit depth shall be as described in the CONDUIT section. All trenches shall be compacted per the City of Lake Elsinore Standards or as directed by the City Engineer. - Street Lights shall be located per City approved plan or per City of Lake Elsinore Standard, and shall not be relocated without prior City approval. - Minimum Engineering Department Inspections Required:
• All work performed within a Public Right‐Of‐Way
• All conduit placement
• Prior to and during any concrete foundation placement • Pole installation
- Construction “As‐Built” drawings shall be submitted prior to final inspection - Engineering inspection is required for final wiring and splicing prior to energizing. - Pedestrian and vehicle traffic control and access shall be maintained per the Plans, Specifications, City Traffic Control Standards, CA MUTCD, and as otherwise required or directed by the City.
- Concrete and/or asphalt removal & replacement shall be per City of Lake Elsinore Excavation Ordinance as directed by the City. A sidewalk extension maybe required to meet ADA access requirements.

Acceptance and Energizing
- Upon completion of all street light construction, the Contractor (on public projects) or Developer (on private development projects) shall submit two (2) sets of professionally drafted street light “As-Built” plans on 11” x 17” size mylar sheets to the Engineering Department, - After “As‐Built” plans have been accepted by the City, the Contractor or Developer shall anticipate a minimum of five (5) working days for the City to contact SCE for street light energizing. Release of a Building Occupancy requires that street lights be energized. - As-Built Plans shall at minimum show the following information:
• Layout of curbs, gutter, sidewalks, driveways and other improvements, drawn to scale • Location of street lights, with dimensions from the nearest cross street intersection and between street lights
• Location of pull boxes dimensioned from the street lights, curbs or other features • Location of service point (power source) and SCE identification number • Location of conduit service runs dimensioned from face of curb, edge of pavement or back of sidewalk as applicable
• Size and type of wire used
38 • Size (wattage and voltage rating) and type (LED) of each lamp and number of lamps used
• Contractor’s name, address and telephone number
• Identifying project name and number
Incomplete Submittals Will Not Be Accepted
- For private development projects, the Developer shall submit a one-year Street light Energy fee for each new street light, paid when street light “As-Built” plans are submitted. The fees shall be paid in accordance with the most recent Fee Schedule. All installations shall be guaranteed for a period of one year from the date of acceptance by the City for maintenance.

As-Built and Warranties
Construction As-Built Drawing Requirements (Street light Installations) Two sets of “As-Built” drawings must be given to the Public Works Inspector before SCE will energize a light.

Maximum size of As-Built drawings shall be 11” x 17”.

Please provide the following information in addition to As-Built Drawings:

POLE
- Manufacture’s name
- Supplier’s name and contact information
- Material
- Height
- Mast Arm Length
- Footing Type

FIXTURE
- Manufacture’s name
- Supplier’s name and contact information
- Wattage and Voltage
- Fuse size and type
- Photocell manufacturer

DISTRIBUTION
- Conduit type and size
- Wire type and gauge
39 - Pull box manufacturer
- Service point I.D. number

AS-BUILT DRAWINGS MUST INDICATE
- North arrow
- Streets referenced to nearest cross street
- Pole locations, pull box locations, conduit runs, and service point location - Wattage/Lamp at each pole
- Pole’s physical location in relation to corners or cul-de-sac 40 STREET LIGHT

STANDARD DRAWINGS

CITY OF LAKE ELSINORE
STANDARD PLAN NO.

APPROVED BY:

CITY ENGINEER DATE
REVISION BY: APPROVED DATE

REMON HABIB DRAFT

CITY OF LAKE ELSINORE
STANDARD PLAN NO.

APPROVED BY:

CITY ENGINEER DATE
REVISION BY: APPROVED DATE

REMON HABIB DRAFT

CITY OF LAKE ELSINORE
STANDARD PLAN NO.

APPROVED BY:

CITY ENGINEER DATE
REVISION BY: APPROVED DATE

REMON HABIB DRAFT

CITY OF LAKE ELSINORE
STANDARD PLAN NO.

APPROVED BY:

CITY ENGINEER DATE
REVISION BY: APPROVED DATE

REMON HABIB DRAFT

CITY OF LAKE ELSINORE
STANDARD PLAN NO.

APPROVED BY:

CITY ENGINEER DATE
REVISION BY: APPROVED DATE

REMON HABIB DRAFT

CITY OF LAKE ELSINORE
STANDARD PLAN NO.

APPROVED BY:

CITY ENGINEER DATE
REVISION BY: APPROVED DATE

REMON HABIB
‐
‐ ‐
‐
DRAFT

CITY OF LAKE ELSINORE
STANDARD PLAN NO.

APPROVED BY:

CITY ENGINEER DATE
REVISION BY: APPROVED DATE

REMON HABIB DRAFT

CITY OF LAKE ELSINORE
STANDARD PLAN NO.

APPROVED BY:

CITY ENGINEER DATE
REVISION BY: APPROVED DATE

REMON HABIB DRAFT

CITY OF LAKE ELSINORE
STANDARD PLAN NO.

APPROVED BY:

CITY ENGINEER DATE
REVISION BY: APPROVED DATE

REMON HABIB
LINE
DRAFT
50 FORM
AND

APPLICATION
51 STREET LIGHT AUTHORIZATION FORM
Engineering Department
Date:

Developer’s Name:

Authorized Contact Person:

Mailing Address:

Phone No:

Email Address:

Project Name:

Project Location:

Tract/Ref No.

Number of Street lights Anticipated:

Project Description:
______Developer believes the above project is NOT required to provide for street lights ______Developer believes the project is required to provide for street lights per below SCE Schedule
_____LS-1 _____LS-2 _____LS-3
I, the undersigned, do verify that all information listed above is current and accurate.

Authorize Signature______________________________________ Date: __________

FOR OFFICE USE ONLY
______Developer is NOT required to provide for street lights ______Developer is required to provide for street lights per below SCE Schedule _____LS-1_____LS-2 _____LS-3
Received By: __________________________________________Date: __________ Approved BY: __________________________________________Date: __________ 52 STREET LIGHT ACCEPTANCE FORM
Engineering Department
Date:

Developer’s Name:

Authorized Contact Person:

Mailing Address:

Phone No:

Email Address:

Project Name:

Project Location:

Tract/Ref No.

Number of Street lights Constructed:

Developer must submit all the below documents to ensure acceptance of the street lights and release of bonds are completed in a speedy manner. If the below items cannot be provided, please provide explanation, use additional sheets if necessary.
- Copy of Signed Street Light Authorization Form
- Copy(s) of Signed As-Built plans
- Copy(s) of Bonds and Checks being requested for release. - Include copies of City receipts and signed bond copies - Copy(s) of SCE Street light Authorization (SLA)
- Copy(s) of SCE signed Contract for Electric Service (CSD272) - Cabinet and Metering Addresses
I, the undersigned, do verify that all information listed above is current and accurate.

Authorize Signature _______________________________________________ Date: __________

FOR OFFICE USE ONLY
Received By: _________________________________________________ Date: _________ Engineering Approved By: _____________________________________ _ Date: _________ Public Works Reviewed By: ______________________________________Date: _________ Building Reviewed By: __________________________________________Date: _________ Finance Reviewed By: ____________________________ ______________Date: _________ IT Reviewed By: ______________________________________________ Date: _________ 53 STREET LIGHT TRANSFER OF UTILITY SERVICE FORM
Engineering Department
Date:

Developer’s Name:

Authorized Contact Person:

Mailing Address:

Phone No:

Email Address:

Project Name:

Project Location:

Tract/Ref No.

Number of Street lights Constructed:

Developer must submit all the below documents to ensure transfer of utility service is completed in a speedy manner. If the below items cannot be provided, please provide explanation, use additional sheets if necessary.
- Copy of Signed Street Light Acceptance Form
- Copy(s) Current SCE Bills
- Copy(s) of Turn on/Turn off form from SCE
I, the undersigned, do verify that all information listed above is current and accurate.

Authorize Signature: _______________________________________Date: _________

FOR OFFICE USE ONLY
Received By: __________________________________________Date: __________ Approved BY: __________________________________________Date: __________ 54 DRAFT
55 DRAFT
56 DRAFT
1 SPECIAL PROVISIONS
AMENDMENTS TO THE “GREENBOOK”

STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS FOR PUBLIC WORKS CONSTRUCTION
PART 1 GENERAL PROVISIONS
The following SECTIONS supplement the STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS FOR PUBLIC WORKS CONSTRUCTION, (“Greenbook”), 2021 edition, regional supplements, and all current supplements, and supersede any conflicting requirements, (A “conflicting requirement” is one that cannot operate by law within the Special Provisions listed herein or both cannot be physically produced). Otherwise, these Special Provisions only supplement the Standard Specifications. If any of the sections or part of sections below contradict or are not in conformance with current California Codes and Regulations at the time of bidding, the Contractor will assume that the current California Codes and Regulations supersedes that item in these specifications. When there are two or more specifications for the same item or work the contractor shall bid the more expensive item or work specified unless the one specified item specifically states that it shall take precedent over other specified items for the same work.

SECTION 1 – GENERAL, TERMS, DEFINITIONS, ABBREVIATIONS, UNITS OF MEASURE; AND SYMBOLS
1-1 GENERAL
1-1.1 General
Add the following:

The work embraced herein shall be done in accordance with the Special Provisions herein which amend, modify, or supplement the Standard Specifications and Sections 1 through 800 of the Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction, (Greenbook) current edition and the Standard Specifications, (Greenbook) current edition.
1-2 TERMS AND DEFINITIONS
Add or replace the following:

Agency City of Lake Elsinore
City Council of the City of Lake Elsinore, constituting the awarding authority of the City
County County of Riverside
Engineer City Engineer of the City of Lake Elsinore or his authorized representative 1-3 ABBREIVATIONS
1-3.2 Common Usage DRAFT
2 Add the following:

Abbreviation Word or Words
B&P Business and Professions Code Section No.

CA California Administration Code Section No.

CBC California Building Code, Pacific Coast Building Officials Conference of the International Conference of Building Officials
CC Civil Code Section No.

CGC California Government Code Section No.

CVC California Vehicle Code Section No.

DBE Disadvantaged Business Enterprise
EDC Educational Code Section No.

LC Labor Code Section No.

PCC Public Contract Code Section No.

RFI Request for Information
1-3.3 Institutions
Add the following:

Abbreviation Word or Words
AAN American Association of Nurserymen
AGA American Gas Association
AI The Asphalt Institute
AIA American Institute of Architects
AIEE American Institute of Electrical Engineers
AISI American Iron & Steel Institute
APHA American Public Health Association
ASA American Standards Association (now ANSI)
ASCE American Society of Civil Engineers
ASHRAE American Society of Heating, Refrigerating, and Air Conditioning Engineers
CRSI Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute
CSD Community Services District of the City of Lake Elsinore EVMWD Elsinore Valley Municipal Water District
NBFU National Board of Fire Underwriters
OSA Office of State Architect
RCTC Riverside County Transportation Commission
WRCOG Western Riverside Council of Governments
PCA Portland Cement Association
RCFC & WCD Riverside County Flood Control and Water Conservation District
RDA Community Redevelopment Agency of the City of Lake
Elsinore
SSPC Steel Structures Painting Council
USASI or USAS United States of America Standards Institute (Now ANSI) WMWD Western Municipal Water District DRAFT
3 1-4 UNITS OF MEASURE
1-4.2 Units of Measure and Their Abbreviations
Add the following:

U.S. Customary Unit Equal To
1 Acre 43,560 S.F.
1-7 AWARD AND EXECUTION OF THE CONTRACT
1-7.1 General
Add the following:

Within 10-working days after the date of the AGENCY's Notice of Award, the Contractor shall execute and return the following contract documentsto the AGENCY:

Contract Agreement
Faithful Performance
Bond Labor and
Materials Bond
Public Liability and Property Damage Insurance
Certificate Workers' Compensation Insurance Certificate Failure to comply with the above will result in annulment of the award and forfeiture of the proposal guarantee.

The Contract Agreement shall not be considered binding upon the AGENCY until executed by the authorized AGENCY officials.

A corporation to which an award is made may be required, before the Contract Agreement is executed by the AGENCY, to furnish evidence of its corporate existence, of its right to enter into contracts in the State of California and that the officers signing the contract and bonds for the corporation have the authority to do so.
1-7.2 Contract Bonds
Add the following:

All bonds shall be submitted on the City’s bond forms included hereinbefore. Each bond shall be signed by both the Bidder and the Surety, with all signatures notarized and all acknowledgments attached thereto. The attorney-in-fact for a corporate Surety shall be registered as such in the State of California and file with each bond an original, notarized, corporately sealed, and effective dated Power of Attorney. Certified copies of the Power of Attorney are acceptable, providing they are contemporaneously signed, notarized, and corporately sealed. DRAFT 4 The cost of all bonds, including premiums and incidentals, shall be included in the Contract lump sum price paid for mobilization, and no additional compensation will be allowed. When the Contract does not include a Contract pay item for mobilization, all bond costs shall be considered to be included in and distributed proportionately through all of the Contract items of work. In the event any Contract pay items are deleted, or reduced in quantity or value, no payment will be made to the Contractor for the cost of any portion of the bonds.

The Faithful Performance Bond shall remain in force for a period of 1 year after the date of recordation of the Notice of Completion. The Material and Labor Bond shall not be for less than 100 percent of the contract price and shall remain in force until 75 days after the date of recordation of the Notice of Completion.

DRAFT
5 SECTION 2 – SCOPE OF THE WORK
2-1 WORK TO BE DONE
Add the following subsection:
2-1.1 Order of the Work
Order of work - Order of work shall conform to the Standard Specifications and these Special Provisions.

1. Call Dig Alert and perform potholing for existing underground utilities.

2. Prepare traffic control plans and obtain approval from the City. Install project signs 10 days prior to start of construction. Mobilize equipment and materials as necessary.

4. Notify property owners located within project limits.

5. Construct improvements as shown on plans.
2-2 PERMITS
In respect to work performed under the Contract, the first sentence to the first paragraph of Subsection 2-2, “Permits”, of the Standard Specifications shall be deemed revised to read as follows:

No work shall be started until the Contractor has obtained all necessary licenses and permits.

Therefore, the Contractor shall obtain and pay for all permits and give all notices necessary and incident to the due and lawful prosecution of the work and to the preservation of the public health and safety. The Contractor shall pay all cost incurred by the permit requirements. Fees will not be collected on those permits obtained from the City for City-owned projects. 2-2.1 Licenses
Subsection 2-2.1 is hereby added to Section 2 of the Standard Specifications as follows:

The Contractor and subcontractors shall obtain and incur all costs for licenses necessitated by his or her operations. Prior to starting any work, the Contractor and subcontractors shall be required to have a City of Lake Elsinore business license valid for at least the life of the Contract; subcontractors shall have business licenses valid for the time they are engaged in work under the Contract.
2-3 RIGHT OF ENTRY
Add the following:

At no time shall the Contractor encroach on Caltrans Right-of-Way without a proper encroachment permit from Caltrans.
2-4 COOPERATION AND COLLATERAL WORK
Add the following subsection:
2-4.1 Special Considerations
The Contractor will be required to closely coordinate all its work affecting private property in advance with the property owner. Any damage to this property due to the construction will be repaired and restored to the satisfaction of the owner. DRAFT 6 Property Owner Coordination – The Contractor shall inspect each property and make his own determination as to the extent of work required to remove existing fences or walls and grading adjacent to screen walls. The Contractor shall prepare a photo log of all existing on-site conditions at each property which shall be used as the basis for determining the adequacy of the Contractor’s on-site restoration work.

Special Note: By submitting a Bid, the Contractor acknowledges that he has visited each individual property and investigated the level of effort required to construct the required improvements, including but not limited to removal existing fences and walls.

Before any on-site work is initiated, the Contractor shall coordinate with each individual property owner to determine access requirements and verify the general scope of on-site restoration work required. Seventy-eight (48) hours advance notice shall be given to each property owner prior to initiating work. Interruption of access shall be minimized to the greatest degree possible and shall not exceed 6 hours.

The Engineer shall review the completion of all on-site restoration work with each property owner prior to final acceptance. Using the Contractor’s photo log of existing on-site improvements, the Engineer shall determine if restoration meets or exceeds the condition prior to construction. The Contractor shall be responsible to obtain the property owner’s acceptance of all on-site restoration work.

Utility Coordination – Construction will not require removals and relocation of existing utilities. 2-5 THE CONTRACTOR’S EQUIPMENT AND FACILITIES
2-5.1 General
In respect to work performed under the Contract, the first paragraph of Subsection 2-5.1, “General” of the Standard Specifications shall be deemed revised to read as follows:

Such equipment and facilities shall meet all requirements of applicable ordinances and laws.

In respect to work performed under the contract, the second paragraph of Subsection 2-

5.1, “General”, of the Standard Specifications shall be deemed revised to include asfollows:

The Contractor shall provide a hand washing facility. The Contractor shall comply with all applicable laws, ordinances, and regulations pertaining to public health and sanitation. 2-7 CHANGES INITIATED BY THE AGENCY
2-7.1 General
In respect to work performed under the Contract, Subsection 2-7.1, “General,” of the Standard Specifications shall be deemed revised to include the following:

The City reserves the right to make changes in the work or eliminate any contract (bid) item of work without impairing the validity of the Contract. Such changes shall be made in accordance with any of the following methods:DRAFT
7 A. By written modification of Contract (Supplemental Agreement or Contract Change Order) ordered by the City Council.

B. By written Contract Change Order, signed by the City Manager or City Engineer in the amounts specified by City Policy.

C. All Contract modifications shall be signed by the Contractor.

Changes in the work made pursuant to this section, “Changes in Work” and extensions of completion time made necessary by reason thereof, shall in no way release any Guarantee given by the Contractor of the Contract let hereunder. The Sureties in excluding the Bonds on the Contract made pursuant to the General Conditions shall be deemed to have expressly agreed to any change increasing the cost of the work and to any extension of time made by reason thereof. Such changes in the work shall not relieve or release the Sureties of Bonds executed for the work. Whenever a change is pending, the Contractor shall notify the City if it is necessary to halt other work in the area of the change that would be affected thereby, until such time as the change is authorized.

Any change to the Contract amount shall be in a lump sum mutually agreed to by the Contractor and the City, except that when, in the opinion of the City such basis is not feasible, the change to the Contract amount shall be determined as provided for in Subsection 2-8, “Extra Work,” of the Standard Specifications.

Each lump sum quotation from the Contractor shall be accompanied by sufficiently detailed estimates to permit verification of totals in accordance with Subsection 7-3, “PAYMENT,” of the Standard Specifications.

When the work is to be done on a cost-plus-percentage basis, the Contractor shall submit daily work reports as required by the City showing all labor, material and equipment costs incurred, and upon completion of the work, a Summary of Costs, including overhead and profit, and in accordance with Subsection 7-3, “Payment,” of the Standard Specifications.

The signature of the City’s inspector on the daily reports does not obligate the City to payment of any or all items of work listed on the City issued daily work reports, the inspector’s signature just acknowledges receipt of the City issued daily work report. The Engineer will review the daily report for the applicable items of work related to extra work. 2-8 EXTRA WORK
Add the following:

The Contractor shall not perform any extra work except upon written authorization from the Engineer.

Any change in work shall conform to the original drawings and Specifications insofar as they may apply without conflict to the conditionsinvolved in the change. 2-10 DISPUTEDWORK
In respect to work performed under the Contract, the first paragraph of Subsection 2-10, “Disputed Work” of the Standard Specification shall be deemed revised to read asfollows: DRAFT 8 If unable to reach agreement under any of the foregoing procedures, the City may direct the Contractor to proceed with the work. Payment shall be made for such work as is later determined by negotiation between the parties or as is fixed by a court of law. 2-11 FORMAT FOR CHANGES IN WORK
Subsection 2-11 is hereby added to Section 2 of the Standard Specifications as follows:
2-11.1 General
A Contract Change Order will be issued for all changes in the work unless a supplemental agreement is made between the City and Contractor. The Contract Change Orders will be made on a City form and will contain a summary of all costs as supplied by the Contractor or agreed to by the City and Contractor. The Contractor shall use City Contract Change Order report forms (as follows):
2-11.2 (a) Change Order Summary Report
2-11.2 (d) Material Cost Report
2-11.2 (b) Labor Cost Report
2-11.2 (e) Equipment Cost Report
2-11.2 (c) Labor Rates Report
2-11.2 (f) Special Forces/Services Cost Report
DRAFT
9 Date
CCO Proposal No. Contractor
Item No. Location
2-11.2 (a) CONTRACT CHANGE ORDER SUMMARY REPORT AMOUNT
General Contractor

1. Labor Cost:...............................................................................$

2. MaterialCost:......................................................................$

3. Equipment Cost:.......................................................................$

4. Special Forces/Services:...........................................................$ SubtotalContractorCost:....................................................$

5. Subcontractor/Sub-subcontractorName
a. Labor Cost................................................................$ b. Material Cost...........................................................$ c. Equipment Cost......................................................$ Subtotal Subcontractor/Sub-subcontractorCost................$

6. Subcontractor/Sub-subcontractorName
a. Labor Cost...............................................................$ b. Material Cost..........................................................$ c. Equipment Cost......................................................$ Subtotal Subcontractor/Sub-subcontractorCost................$ TOTAL CONTRACT CHANGE ORDER COSTS.........................$ DRAFT 10 Date
CCO Proposal No. Contractor or Subcontractor
Item No. Location
2-11.2 (b) LABOR COST REPORT

CLASSIFICATION AND NAME HOURS
HOURLY
RATE

EXTENDED

AMOUNTS
Classification: OT $ $
Name: REG $ $
Classification: OT $ $
Name: REG $ $
Classification: OT $ $
Name: REG $ $
Classification: OT $ $
Name: REG $ $
Classification: OT $ $
Name: REG $ $
Classification: OT $ $
Name: REG $ $
Classification: OT $ $
Name: REG $ $
Classification: OT $ $
Name: REG $ $
TOTAL LABOR $
Overhead/profit 33% ....................................................................................$ Total labor/overhead/profit ..........................................................................$ Subcontractor’s mark-up of totalsub-subcontractor
labor/overhead/profit (if applicable) 5%.................................................$ General contractor’s mark-up of totalsubcontractor
orsub-subcontractor labor/overhead/profit (if applicable) 5% ..............$ Total ...............................................................................................................$ DRAFT 11 Date
CCO Proposal No. Contractor or Subcontractor
Item No. Location
2-11.2 (c ) LABOR RATES REPORT
CLASSIFICATION:

TAXABLE BASE: AMOUNT
Base Hourly Pay $
Vacation $
TOTAL TAXABLE BASE $

TAXES &INSURANCE PERCENT AMOUNT
Social Security Tax $
State Unemployment Tax $
Federal Unemployment Tax $
Workmen’sCompensation $
Liability & Umbrella Insurance $
TOTAL TAXES & INSURANCE $

FRINGE BENEFITS AMOUNT
Pension $
Health & Welfare $
Training $
Other Fringe Benefits $
TOTAL FRINGE BENEFITS $
TOTAL LABOR RATE PER CLASSIFICATION $
DRAFT
12 Date
CCO Proposal No. Contractor or Subcontractor
Item No. Location
2-11.2 (d) MATERIAL COST REPORT

INVOICE
NO.

DESCRIPTION AMOUNT

1. Material $
Sales Tax (Prevailing Tax Rate) 8.75% $
Subtotal $

2. Material $
Sales Tax (Prevailing Tax Rate) 8.75% $
Subtotal $

3. Material $
Sales Tax (Prevailing Tax Rate) 8.75% $
Subtotal $
SUBTOTAL MATERIAL COST $
NOTE: An itemized list of materials, manufacturers, serial numbers, invoices and other pertinent date shall be submitted along with the material cost report.

Overhead/profit 15% ..............................................................................................$ Total material/overhead/profit ..............................................................................$ Subcontractor’s mark-up of totalsub-subcontractor
material/overhead/profit(if applicable) 5%........................................$ General contractor’s mark-up of totalsubcontractor
orsub-subcontractor material/overhead/profit (if applicable) 5%....$ Total .........................................................................................................................$ DRAFT 13 Date
CCO Proposal No. Contractor or Subcontractor
Item No. Location
2-11.2 (e) EQUIPMENT COST REPORT
EQUIPMENTNO.
(Description, Type, Size) HOURS
HOURLY
RATE

EXTENDED

AMOUNTS
SUBTOTAL EQUIPMENT COST $
Overhead/profit15%...................................................................................................$ Totalequipment/overhead/profit.................................................................................$ Subcontractor’s mark-up of totalsub-subcontractor
equipment/overhead/profit (if applicable) 5% .......................................... $ General contractor’s mark-up of totalsubcontractor
orsub-subcontractor equipment/overhead/profit (if applicable) 5%…….. $ Total ................................................................................................................................. $ DRAFT
14 Date
CCO Proposal No. Contractor or Subcontractor
Item No. Location
2-11.2 (f) SPECIAL FORCES/SERVICES COST REPORT

INVOICE
NO.

DESCRIPTION AMOUNT

1. $
$
Subtotal $

2. $
$
Subtotal $

3. $
$
Subtotal $
SUBTOTAL MATERIAL COST $
NOTE: An itemized list of materials, manufacturers, serial numbers, invoices and other pertinent date shall be submitted along with the special forces/services cost report.

Overhead/profit15%.............................................................................................$ Total Special Forces/ServicesOverhead/Profit DRAFT...................................................... $ 15 SECTION 3 – CONTROL OF THE WORK
3-1 ASSIGNMENT
Add the following subsection:
3-1.1 ContractorIndebtedness
Indebtedness incurred by or on behalf of the Contractor for any cause in connection with this work must be paid by the Contractor. The City of Lake Elsinore has no obligation for any indebtedness or claim other than payments under the terms of the Contract, and the Contractor shall not represent that he or she has any authority to create by such obligation on behalf of the City. The Contractor shall indemnify and hold harmless the City of Lake Elsinore, its officers, employees and agents from any loss, demand, damages, claims, or actions arising from or in connection with said indebtedness.
3-2 SELF PERFORMANCE
Add the following:

In respect to the work performed under the Contract, Subsection 3-2, “Self Performance,” of the Standard Specifications shall be deemed revised to include the following:

If the Bid submitted by the Contractor fails to meet at least fifty (50) percent of the amount of work required with its own forces, the Bid will be considered non- responsive and will be rejected with no further consideration. If after execution of the agreement the City discovers the Contractor is performing work amounting to less than fifty (50) percent of the Contracted amount, except for “Specialty Items,” the Contractor will be notified that he or she is in violation of the Contract and will have that portion subcontracted for which is less than fifty percent (50%) of the amount of work required to be performed by the Contractor deducted from payment to the Contractor. The deduction shall not exceed fifty (50) percent of the Contracted amount required to be performed by the Contractor. The Contractor will not be penalized by the City resulting from Contract Change Orders that increase subcontract items of work.

Subcontracts shall include Provisions that the Contract between the City and the Contractor is part of the subcontract, and that all terms and Provisions of said Contract are incorporated in the subcontract. Subcontracts shall also contain certification by the subcontractor that said subcontractor is experienced in and qualified to do, and knowledgeable about, the subcontracted work. Copies of subcontracts shall be available to the Engineer at the time any litigation against the City concerning the project is filed. 3-3 SUBCONTRACTORS
Add the following:

In respect to the work performed under the Contract, Subsection 3-3, “Subcontractors” of the Standard Specifications shall be deemed revised to include the following:
a. The Contractor shall be fully responsible to the City for the acts and omissions of subcontractors and of persons employed by them, as the Contractor is for the acts and omissions of persons directly employed upon their work. b. The Contractor shall be responsible for the coordination of the trades, subcontractors and material suppliers engaged upon their work. Neither the City nor any representative of the City will undertake to settle any difference DRAFT 16 between the Contractor and subcontractors or between subcontractors. 3-5 INSPECTION
In respect to work performed under the contract, Section 3-5, “Inspection,” of the Standard Specificationsshall be deemed revised to include the following:

Inspection of the work shall not relieve the Contractor of any of his obligations to fulfill the Contract. Defective work shall be made good and unsuitable materials may be rejected, notwithstanding that such defective work and materials have been previously approved by the Engineer or included in the quantities for progress payments. The inspector does not have authority to deviate from the plans and specifications, and to obligate the city financially.

If any such work is concealed or performed without the prior inspection notice, then the work shall be subject to such tests or exposure as may be necessary to prove to the Engineer that the materials used and the work done are in conformity with the plans and specifications or may be removed and installed again at the discretion of the City Engineer. All labor, equipment and materials necessary for exposing, testing or complete removal, and installation or replacement shall be furnished by the Contractor at its expense. The Contractor shall replace, at its own expense, any materials or work damaged by exposure or testing.

Cost of rework inspection incurred by the City will be deducted from the Contractor’s progress payments. Rework inspection cost is as follows:

1. Contractor’s failure to complete the Work within the Contract time stated in the Contract and any previously authorized extensionsthereof.

2. Extra inspectionsrequired for Contractor’s correction of defective work.

3. Overtime costsfor acceleration of work done for Contractor’s convenience.

4. All associated costsincluding travel.
3-6 THECONTRACTOR’SREPRESENTATIVE
In respect to work performed under the Contract Subsection 3-6, “The Contractor’s Representative,” of the Standard Specificationsshall be deemed to include the following:

The Contractor’s representative shall give to the engineer a daily list of all labor, equipment, and materials used on the project for that day.

The Contractor’s authorized representative shall be present at the site of the work at all times while work is actually in progress. Work by subcontractors will not be allowed in the absence of the contractor’s authorized representative, unless previous arrangements are agreed to by the Engineer. In the event a subcontractor attempts to perform work in the absence of the contractor’s authorized representative, a STOP WORK NOTICE will be issued to the subcontractor.

When work is not in progress and during periods when work is suspended, arrangements acceptable to the Engineer shall be made for any emergency work which may be required. DRAFT 17 3-7 CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
3-7.1 General
Add the following:

The Contractor shall maintain a control set of Plans and Specifications on the project site at all times. All final locations determined in the field and any deviations from the Plans and Specifications shall be marked in red on this control set to show the as-built conditions. Upon completion of all work, the Contractor shall return the control set to the Engineer. Final payment will not be made until this requirement is met.
3-7.2 Precedence of Contract Documents
Add the following:

The Special Provisions shall include the Bid Proposal.
3-8 SUBMITTALS
3-8.1 General
In respect to the work performed under the Contract, under Subsection 3-8.1, “General,” of the Standard Specifications shall be deemed revised to include the following:

Within fourteen (14) calendar days after the Award of Contract, the Contractor shall, at his or her expense, transmit by letter to the Engineer for review and acceptance, working drawings, shop drawings, supporting information, and/or other available instructive and descriptive information from the manufacturer, when and as required by the Plans or Special Provisions, or requested by the Engineer. Shop drawings will normally not be required for standard items in common use for which adequate manufacturers’ literature is available.

The Contractor shall consecutively number, thoroughly check, approve and sign each submittal and transmit the submittals by letter to the Engineer for review. In the event that certain submittals are submitted without the Contractor’s approval signature or are unacceptable to the City, they will be rejected by the Engineer. The Contractor shall thereafter, correct said submittals and resubmit.

In the event that in the process of development of the submittals, it is discovered that there are defects and/or errors on the Plans, resulting in conflict between said Plans and the submittals, or if the submittals show variation from the Plans and/or Contract requirements because of standard shop practice or other reasons, the Contractor shall thoroughly describe and explain said defects and/or conflicts in his or her transmittal letter to the Engineer.

The Engineer’s review of the submittals will be for general design and arrangement only and shall not relieve the Contractor from responsibility for errors of any sort in the submittals or of the responsibility for executing the work in accordance with the Contract. The Contractor shall be solely responsible for the correctness of the submittals, for shop fits and field connections, and for the results obtained by use of such submittals. The Contractor shall verify and be fully responsible for all dimensions and job-site conditions affecting the work and shall be responsible for furnishing and installing the proper materials required by the Contract, whether or not DRAFT 18 indicated on the submittals when reviewed. The Contractor will not be given an extension of contract time due to the failure of the Contractor to provide submittals as required by the Specifications in a timely manner.
3-10 SURVEYING
3-10.1 General
In respect to work performed under the contract Subsection 3-10.1, “General,” of the Standard Specifications shall be deemed revised to read:

The contractor will provide surveying and construction staking required for the construction of this project, consistent with industry standards and as determined by the Engineer.

The Contractor shall establish his own finish elevation control from the offset construction staking.

Payment for surveying service and/ or setting additional control shall be considered as included in the price bid for the applicable items of work.

The Contractor shall notify the Engineer, at least 7 days before starting work. The contractor shall preserve all survey monuments, lot stakes (tagged), and benchmarks. The Contractor shall not disturb survey monuments, lot stakes (tagged), or benchmarks without the consent of the Engineer. The Contractor shall bear the expense of replacing any that may be disturbed without permission.

Replacement shall be done only under the direction of the Engineer by a Registered Land Surveyor or a Registered Civil Engineer authorized to practice land surveying within the State of California.

The Contractor shall preserve bench marks, survey monuments, survey stakes and points set for lines, grades or measurements of work in their proper places unless removal is authorized by the Engineer. In case of their impending removal or destruction by his/her operations he/she shall be responsible for notifying the City Engineer prior to their removal. Failure to provide such notification will result in in the Contractor being liable for all costs associated with their replacement. The cost of re-staking due to the negligence of the Contractor will be deducted from the Contractor’s progress payment.
3-10.2 Lines and Grade
Add the following:

Unless otherwise specified in the Contract Special Provisions, all lines and grades will be established by the Contractor.

Add the following subsection:
3-10.3 Measurement and Payment
The Contract unit price paid for construction survey and staking shall include full compensation for furnishing all labor, materials, tools, equipment, surveyor, supervision, and incidentals for doing all the work, and no separate or additional compensation will be allowed therefore. 3-12 WORK SITE MAINTENANCE
3-12.1 General DRAFT
19 In respect to work performed under the Contract, the second paragraph of Subsection 3-12.1, “General,” of the Standard Specifications shall be deemed revised to read as follows:

When and as often as required by the Engineer, the Contractor shall furnish and operate selfloading motorized street sweeper equipped with a functional water spray system, to keep paved areas affected by the work clean and dust free. If the sweeper fails to keep the paved areas clean and dust free then the Contractor shall provide the additional sweepers or stop the work until the paved areas are clean and dust free. The use of water resulting in mud on paved areas will be not permitted.

In respect to work performed under the contract, Subsection 3-12.1, “General”, of the Standard Specifications shall be deemed revised to include as follows:

All cleanup costs shall be included in the various related items of work and no additional compensation will be allowed as a result of suspension of work for failure to comply with clean up orders.
3-12.2 Air Pollution Control
Add the following:

The contract item Dust Abatement includes the action necessary to prevent, reduce or control dust within the work area as required completing the work. The Contractor shall carry out proper and efficient measures to prevent his operations from producing dust in amounts damaging to property or causing a nuisance or harm to persons living nearby or occupying buildings in the vicinity of the work.

The Contractor shall implement appropriate fugitive dust control measures including watering, stabilized construction access to reduce tracking of mud or dirt onto public roads, covering trucks hauling loose dirt offsite and street sweeping of track-out. The Contractor can contact SCAQMD for their Rule 403 and Rule 403.1 implementation handbooks which contain a detailed listing of reasonably available dust control measures.

The Contractor shall prepare and implement a dust control plan in accordance with the requirements set forth in the latest version of the SCAQMD Rule 403 and Rule 403.1. The methods to be used for controlling dust in the construction area and along haul roads shall be approved by the Engineer prior to starting any work included in this contract. If the Contractor's operations meet the Rule 403 definition of "Large Operations", the dust control plan shall be submitted to SCAQMD for review and approval prior to start of operations.

Construction equipment idling shall not exceed 10 minutes to ensure that the SCAQMD daily thresholds are not exceeded.

The contract lump sum price paid for Dust Abatement shall include full compensation for all direct and indirect costs incurred under this section.

This payment will be made on a basis of the percentage of work completed on the entire project. DRAFT 20 3-12.6.4 Dewatering
In respect to work performed under the contract, the second paragraph of Subsection 3-

12.6.4, “Dewatering”, of the Standard Specifications shall be deemed revised to include as follows:

The Contractor shall maintain drainage within and through the work areas. 3-13 COMPLETION, ACCEPTANCE, ANDWARRANTY
3-13.3 Warranty
In respect to work performed under the Contract, add to the first paragraph of Subsection 3-

13.3, “Warranty” of the Standard Specifications shall be deemed revised to read as follows:

The Contractor shall warranty that all work performed by him/her under this Contract fully meets the requirements thereof as to quality of workmanship and materials furnished. If any defects in materials or workmanship become evident within a period of one year from the date of the acceptance of the work by the City Council, the Contractor shall, at his or her own expense, make any repair or replacement necessary, including repair of settled backfill and resurfacing, pay administrative costs relative to inspection, testing, Contract administration, and attorney fees to restore the work to full compliance with the Plans and Specifications.

Such repair and replacement shall be made promptly upon receipt of written notice from the Engineer. If the Contractor fails to make such repair and replacement promptly, the Engineer may cause the work to be done and the costs incurred thereby shall become the liability of the Contractor and his or her Surety.

If in the opinion of the Engineer, defective work creates a dangerous condition or requires immediate correction or attention to prevent further loss to the City or to prevent interruption of operations of the City, the City will attempt to give the notice required by this article. If the Contractor cannot be contacted or does not comply with the Engineer’s request for correction within a reasonable time as determined by the Engineer, the City may, notwithstanding the Provisions of this article, proceed to make such correction or provide such attention, and the costs of such correction or attention shall be charged against the Contractor. Such action by the City will not relieve the Contractor of the guarantees provided in this article or elsewhere in this Contract.

This article does not in any way limit the warranty on any items for which a longer warranty is specified or on any items for which a manufacturer gives a guarantee for a longer period, nor does it limit other remedies of the City in respect to latent defect, fraud implied warranties, or assigned claims.

Warranty does not include items of maintenance with normal ware or items over which the Contractor has no control.

Payment for fulfilling the requirements of this section shall be considered to be included in the prices paid for the various Contract items of work and no additional compensation will be allowed therefore. DRAFT
21 3-14 PROJECT IDENTIFICATIONSIGNS
Section 3-14, “Project Identification Sign” is hereby added to Section 3, of the Standard Specifications asfollows:

The Contractor shall provide and erect project identification signs at the locations noted in the Plans or as otherwise approved by the Engineer. The signs shall be furnished by the Contractor, and shall be labeled as shown in the Appendix. The project identification signs shall be erected five working days prior to the start of work.

The project identification signs shall be 1.22 m x 2.44 m (4’ x 8’) in size, with two (2) 100 mm x 100 mm x 4.88 m (4” x 4” x 16’) posts. The sign posts shall be set 1.5 m (5’) in good, solid ground, and the backfill shall be carefully tamped into place.

The Contractor shall revise all misspellings and any other corrections on the sign at no extra cost to the City. If the Contractor is ordered to revise the Mayor's name and council member's name(s) on the sign, after the project identification sign has been approved by the Engineer, a Contract Change Order will be issued in accordance with Subsection 2-7, "Changes Initiated by the Agency," of the Standard Specifications for the cost of changing names.

Upon completion of the project, each project identification sign shall be removed from the project limits and disposed of by the Contractor. The cost of project identification sign removal and disposal shall be considered incidental to the other items of work and no separate or additional payment will be allowed therefore.

The Contract unit price paid for project identification signs shall include full compensation for furnishing all labor, equipment materials and tools required for performing all work necessary to paint, label, assemble, and for erecting project identification signs complete in place, and no separate or additional compensation will be allowed therefore. 3-15 AGENCY PHONENUMBERS
Subsection 3-15 is hereby added to Section 3 of the Standard Specifications as follows:

The following list of individuals or entities, that may have facilities in the area to be improved hereunder is merely for the Contractor’s information and may not be accurate or complete:

Time Warner Communications 951.549.3977
City of Lake Elsinore, Public Works Division 951.674.3124 City of Lake Elsinore, PW Operations Department 951.674.5170 City of Lake Elsinore Police Department 951.275.3300
City of Lake Elsinore Fire Department 951.674.2161
Elsinore Valley Municipal Water District 951.674.3146
Lake Elsinore Unified School District 951.674.7731
Comcast Cable 951.549.3997
Riverside Transit Agency 951.684.0850
SBC (formerly Pacific Bell) 800.750.2355 DRAFT
22 Southern California Edison Company 951.928.8206
Southern California Gas Company (Distribution) 909.335.7582 Southern California Gas Company (Transmission) 213.244.2268 Trash Collection (CR&R) 800.755.8112
Underground Service Alert 800.227.2600
Verizon 951.929.9493
3-16 SOUTHERN CALIFORNIA EDISON COMPANY TEMPORARY ELECTRICAL SERVICE

CONNECTIONFOR CONSTRUCTION POWER
Subsection 3-16 is hereby added to Section 3 of the Standard Specifications as follows:

The Contractor shall apply for and pay all charges levied by Southern California Edison Company for rendering temporary electrical service to this project. Charges can be obtained by contacting Southern California Edison Company, 26100 Menifee Road, Romoland, California 92585, Phone 951.928.8288. The foregoing address and telephone numbers are for informational assistance only and may not be accurate or complete.

DRAFT
23 SECTION 4 – CONTROL OF MATERIALS
4-1 GENERAL
4-1.1 Property Rightsin Materials
Subsection 4-1.1 is hereby added to Section 4 of the Standard Specifications asfollows:

Nothing in the Contract shall be construed as vesting in the Contractor any right, title or interest in material used in the work after it has been attached or affixed to the work or the soil. All such material shall become the property of the City upon being so attached or affixed. 4-1.2 ForeignMaterials.

Subsection 4-1.2 is hereby added to Section 4 of the Standard Specifications as follows:

Materials which are manufactured, produced or fabricated outside of the United States shall be delivered to a distribution point in California, unless otherwise required in these Specifications or the Special Provisions, where they shall be retained for a sufficient period of time to permit inspection, sampling, and testing.

The Contractor shall not be entitled to an extension of time for acts or events occurring outside of the United States and it shall be the Contractor’s responsibility to deliver materials obtained from outside of the United States to the point of entry into the continental United States in sufficient time to permit timely delivery to the job site.

The Contractor, at no cost to the City, shall supply the facilities and arrange for any testing required in California, which the City is not equipped to perform. All testing by the Contractor shall be subject to witnessing by the Engineer.

The manufacturer, producer or fabricator of foreign material shall furnish to the Engineer a Certificate of Compliance in accordance with the provisions in Subsection 4-5 “Certificate of Compliance.” In addition, certified mill test reports or actual specimen tests clearly identifiable to the lot of material shall be furnished where required in these Specifications or otherwise required by the Engineer.

If the welding of steel for structural steel members or the casting and pre- stressing of precast pre-stressed concrete members is to be performed outside of the United States, the following requirements shall apply:

A. The fabrication shall be performed only within the plants and by fabricators who have previously established, to the satisfaction of the Engineer, that they have the experience, knowledge, trained manpower, quality controls, equipment and other facilities required to produce the quality and quantity of work required. At the option of the Engineer, prequalification of the plant and fabricator will be established either by the submission of detailed written proof thereof or DRAFT 24 through in-plant inspection by the Engineer or the Engineer’s representative, or both.

B. The Contractor shall make written application to the Engineer for approval for the foreign fabrication at the earliest possible time and in no case later than 50 days in advance of the planned start of fabrication. The application shall list the specific units or portion of a work that will be fabricated outside of the United States.

C. The Contractor shall advise the Engineer, in writing, at least 20 days in advance of the actual start of any of the foreign fabrication.

D. All documents pertaining to the Contractor, including but not limited to, correspondence, Bid documents, working drawings and data shall be written in the English language and all numerical data shall use the International System of Units (SI) for measurement.
4-1.3 State SpecificationNumber
Subsection 4-1.3 is hereby added to Section 4 of the Standard Specifications asfollows:

The State Specification number of material furnished on the Contract shall conform to the number specified in these Specifications or the Special Provisions for the material involved, except that material conforming to a later specification issue will be acceptable. 4-2 PROTECTION
In respect to work performed under the contract, Subsection 4-2, “Protection,” of the Standard Specifications shall be deemed revised to include the following:

Materials shall not be stored in the right-of-way unless written permission is given by the Engineer.
4-4 TESTING
In respect to work performed under the Contract the third sentence of the first paragraph of Subsection 4-4, “Testing” of the Standard Specifications shall be deemed revised to read as follows:

Unless otherwise called for hereinafter in these Special Provisions, all testing will be performed by the City in such number and at such locations as deemed necessary by the Engineer to insure compliance with the Plans and Specifications; the cost of all initial testing will be borne by the City; the cost of all retesting will be borne by the Contractor, and the amount due the City for said retesting will be deducted from the Contractor’s progress payments. DRAFT 25 Add the following subsection:
4-4.1 Material Testing
All materials shall first be tested and satisfactorily passed in accordance with the requirements of the plans and these specifications, before incorporating said material in the work. Materials placed otherwise shall be considered defective and will be subject to rejection. The cost of testing of materials and workmanship shall be paid by the City. The cost of re-testing of materials and workmanship shall be at the expense of the contractor. The contractor, at his expense, shall deliver materials for testing to the place and at the time designated by the Engineer.

All fill, sub-base, base, under pavement, curb, gutter, and sidewalk to be completed in place to 95% relative compaction except where specified otherwise. The earthwork and geotechnical related compaction will be tested for compliance by a Registered Soils Engineer contracted and scheduled by the contractor. The test results will be submitted to the City for approval. The contractor will be paid by the City for tests that pass the minimum compaction requirements. Any testing by the Soils Engineer due to failure to achieve minimum compaction will be paid for by the Contractor. 4-5 CERTIFICATE OF COMPLIANCE
In respect to work performed under the contract, Subsection 4-5, “Certificate of Compliance,” of the Standard Specifications shall be deemed revised to include the following:

A Certification of Compliance shall be furnished prior to the use of any materials for which these Specifications or the Special Provisions require that a certificate be furnished. In addition, when so authorized in these Specifications or in the Special Provisions, the Engineer may permit the use of certain materials or assemblies prior to sampling and testing if accompanied by a Certificate of Compliance. The certificate shall be signed by the manufacturer of the material or the manufacturer of assembled materials and shall state that the materials involved comply in all respects with the requirements of the specifications. A Certificate of Compliance shall be furnished with each lot of material delivered to the work and the lot so certified shall be clearly identified in the certificate.

All materials used on the basis of a Certificate of Compliance may be sampled and tested at any time. The fact that material is used on the basis of a Certificate of Compliance shall not relieve the Contractor of responsibility for incorporating material in the work which conforms to the requirements of the Plans and Specifications, and any material not conforming to the requirements will be subject to rejections, whether in place or not.

The City reserves the right to refuse to permit the use of material on the basis of a Certificate of Compliance.
4-6 TRADE NAMES
In respect to work performed under the Contract, Subsection 4-6, “Trade Names” of the Standard Specifications shall be deemed revised to include the following: DRAFT 26 The words “or equal” shall be interpreted to mean “or approved as equal in the opinion of the Engineer.”
Within ten (10) working days from the date of the Award of Contract, the Contractor shall, at his/her expense, submit a written request to the Engineer for each desired substitution, accompanied by complete descriptive information from the manufacturer, samples as requested by the Engineer, complete detailed test results from a licensed independent testing laboratory of the City’s choice if requested by the Engineer, and if requested by the Engineer, an evaluation report from a qualified licensed professional engineer, all for final evaluation by the Engineer. If in the Engineer’s opinion, the requested substitution is of lesser quality or in variance with that specified, or if the information submitted is insufficient or incomplete, the requested substitution will be disallowed, and the specified materials or equipment shall be furnished. No request for substitutions submitted after the 10-day deadline specified hereinabove, will be considered.

The City may describe in the “Notice Inviting Bids,” in the Bidder’s Schedule, Specifications, Plans, or Request for Proposals that a particular material, product, thing, or service is designated by specific brand or trade name in accordance with Section 3400 of the Public Contract Code for either of the following purposes: a) In order that a field test or experiment may be made to determine the product’s suitability for future use, b) In order to match other products in use on a particular public improvement, either completed or in the course of completion.

DRAFT
27 SECTION 5 – LEGAL RELATIONS AND RESPONSIBILITIES
5-4 INSURANCE
Liability Insurance shall be in accordance with Section 9 of the Agreement. In respect to work performed under the Contract, Subsection 5-4, “Insurance,” of the Standard Specifications shall be deemed to have been deleted.

DRAFT
28 SECTION 6 – PROSECUTION AND PROGRESS OF THE WORK
6-1 CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE AND COMMENCEMENT OF WORK
In respect to work performed under the Contract of Subsection 6-1, “Construction Schedule and Commencement of Work”, of the Standard Specifications shall be deemed revised to include as follows:

The Contractor’s representative and the Contractor’s principal subcontractors shall attend the City’s pre-construction meeting. Other agencies and utilities involved in this project may also have separate pre-construction meetings; the contractor and applicable subcontractors are required to attend the agency/utility meetings.

In respect to work performed under the Contract, the first sentence of the first paragraph of Subsection 6-1, “Construction Schedule and Commencement of Work,” of the Standard Specifications shall be deemed revised to read asfollows:

The Contractor shall submit a proposed construction schedule (Gant Chart) for the entire work to the Engineer for review and approval five (5) working days prior to the Pre-Construction Meeting and revised schedules thereafter as required by the Engineer when the Contractor’s activities differ or are expected to differ from the latest existing schedule. If the Contractor has not submitted a Construction Schedule upon the date to start work in the Notice to Proceed, the Contractor will not be allowed to start work and will not be granted additional time. The Contractor shall refer to the PROJECT SPECIFIC SCOPE OF WORK section in the Technical Provisions for any required or preferred sequence of work.

In respect to work performed under the Contract, the second paragraph of Subsection 6-1, “Construction Schedule and Commencement of Work,” of the Standard Specifications shall be deemed to have been deleted.
6-2 PROSECUTIONOF WORK
The following sentence is hereby added to Section 6-2:

The Contractorshall provide the following:

1. The Contractor must place concrete within 3 working days after the removal of existing concrete. Asphalt Concrete pavement replacement at driveways shall be installed within 3 calendar days of pouring concrete.

2. AC pavement replacement shall be installed the same day as removals are performed.

3. The Contractor shall clean up all rubble/debris piles daily.

4. The Contractor shall not commence any cold milling operation unless the traffic signal camera is in full operation and shall not be performed more than 3 calendar days ahead of paving. DRAFT 29 5. Permanent striping shall be performed within 72 hours of paving on allstreets.

6. Manhole frames and covers to be raised shall be raised and patched with within 3 calendar days of final day of overlay paving.

FAILURE OF THE CONTRACTOR TO COMPLY WITH THE AFOREMENTIONED WORK SCHEDULING REQUIREMENTS, (1)-(6), DUE TO CONDITIONS UNDER HIS CONTROL WILL RESULT IN DAMAGES BEING SUSTAINED BY THE AGENCY. SUCH DAMAGES ARE, AND WILL CONTINUE TO BE, IMPRACTICAL AND EXTREMELY DIFFICULT TO DETERMINE. FOR EACH DAY THE CONTRACTOR FAILS TO CONFORM

TO THESE REQUIREMENTS, THE CONTRACTOR SHALL PAY TO THE AGENCY, OR HAVE WITHHELD MONIES DUE TO HIM THE SUM OF FIVE HUNDRED DOLLARS ($500.00), AS LIQUIDATED DAMAGES FOR EACH CALENDAR DAY.

All costs to the Contractor for protecting, removing, restoring, relocating, repairing, replacing, or reestablishing existing improvements shall be included in the bid.

The Contractor shall protect all work, materials, and equipment from damage from any cause whatever, and shall provide adequate and proper storage facilities during the progress of the work.

He or she shall provide for the safety and good condition of all work until final acceptance of the work by the City, and shall replace all damaged or defective work, materials, and equipment before requesting final acceptance.

The Contractor is and shall be held responsible for the protection and correction of the work of all trades from smears, splashes, stains, or damages that might occur in the process of the work.

The Contractor shall constantly monitor the worksite and all equipment and appurtenances associated with the project for vandalism/graffiti. Equipment, materials, or signs containing graffiti shall not be brought to the project. Any vandalism/graffiti found within the project limits or worksite by the Contractor or the City shall be removed or repaired by the Contractor within 24 hours. Failure to correct the situation to the satisfaction of the City within 24 hours will result in the Agency taking corrective action and deducting the cost from any monies due to the Contractor.

Prior to final acceptance of the project the Contractor shall remove all markings including, but not limited to, USA markings from the project area to the satisfaction of the City Engineer.

Full compensation for furnishing all labor, equipment, materials, and tools required for protection of work, including but not limited to graffiti removal, vandalism repair and/or USA marking removal, as ordered by the Engineer, shall be considered as being included in the various Contract items of work and no separate or additional compensation will be allowed therefore. 6-3 TIME OF COMPLETION
6-3.2 Contract Time Accounting
In respect to work performed under the Contract, Subsection 6-3.2, of the Standard Specifications shall be deemed to include the following:DRAFT
30 The Contract time, commencement of work, and completion of work, including corrective items of work, shall be in accordance with Section 3 of the Agreement.

Extensions of time, when granted by the Engineer, will be in working days and will otherwise be in accordance with the Standard Specifications and given in writing by Contract Change Order. 6-3.3 Holidays
Subsection 6-3.3 is hereby added to Section 6 of the Standard Specifications as follows:

The following days have been designated as holidays by the City of Lake Elsinore:

New Year’s Day January 1
Martin Luther King, Jr. Day 3rd Monday in January
President’sDay 3rd Monday in February
Memorial Day Last Monday in May
Juneteenth June 19
IndependenceDay July 4
Labor Day 1st Monday in September
Veterans’ Day November 11
Thanksgiving 4th Thursday in November
Day after Thanksgiving 4th Friday in November
Christmas Day December 25
If a holiday falls upon a Sunday, the following Monday shall be the day the holiday is observed, and if a holiday falls upon a Saturday, the preceding Friday shall be the day the holiday is observed. 6-3.4 Work Outside Regular Hours
Subsection 6-3.4 is hereby added to Section 6 of the Standard Specifications as follows:

No work shall be allowed outside of regular working hours (in general unless specified, 7:00 a.m. to 3:30 p.m., on weekdays), without the approval of the Engineer, except work items relating to maintenance and cleanup of the work area for the purpose of public safety and convenience. The Contractor shall not fuel, grease, or perform work on the equipment or trucks between the hours of 7:00 p.m. to 6:00 a.m., Monday through Friday, and at no time on Saturday, Sunday or holidays.

Should work outside of the above hours be approved, inspection, testing and construction engineering costs as a result of the work outside of regular working hours shall be paid by the Contractor at the hourly rate, including fringe benefits, at straight time or time and one-half rates as applicable, or if consultant inspection service is retained by the City, then the Contractor will reimburse the City for the actual cost. Under no circumstances will work outside regular hours be allowed without full-time inspection.
6-4 DELAYS AND EXTENSIONS OF TIME
In respect to work performed under the contract, Subsection 6-4, “Delays and Extensions of Time,” DRAFT 31 of the Standard Specifications shall be deemed revised to include the following:

In accordance with Section 4215, of the California Government Code, if such utilities have not been identified with reasonable accuracy in the Contract documents, the Contractor shall be compensated for the cost of protecting, removing, relocating, and repairing damage to main or trunk line utility facilities located on the job site, where not due to the failure of the Contractor to exercise reasonable care; and for the operating costs for equipment on the project necessarily idled during such work.
6-4.1 General
In respect to work performed under the Contract, add to the first paragraph of Subsection 6-4.1, “General” of the Standard Specifications shall be deemed revised to read as follows:

Work will not be allowed on days predicted by the South Coast Air Quality Management District (SAQMD) to be “Stage III” smog episode days. Notification will be given to the Contractor’s representative by the Engineer no later than 3:00 p.m. on the day preceding the predicted “Stage III” episode day. The Contractor will be entitled to an extension of time for such delays, but the Contractor will not be entitled to damages or additional payment due to such delays.

Work required to maintain the project site in a safe condition (including but not limited to maintenance of traffic control), shall be allowed on all days. 6-4.2 Extension of Time
Add the following:

If the Contractor is delayed in completing the work by reasons of any change ordered by the City, the time for completion of work will be extended for a period equal to the number of days by which the entire project has been delayed because of such change. The Contractor will not be liable for liquidated damages for such period of time and shall have no claim for any other compensation for any such delay except as provided herein.
6-6 SUSPENSION OF THE WORK
6-6.2 Archaeological and Paleontological Discoveries
In respect to work performed under the contract Subsection 6-6.2 “Archaeological and Paleontological Discoveries,” of the Standard Specifications shall be deemed to include:

During construction, if subsurface archaeological resources are encountered, they shall be left in place and a qualified archaeologist shall be called in to examine the findings. Work shall not resume, where discovery was made, until the archaeologist has reviewed the findings, made recommendations for their removal or preservation, and has a reasonable opportunity to carry out the necessarymitigation procedures.

An extension of time will be granted only where the Contractor shows that there is no possible way to DRAFT 32 proceed with other work items.
6-9 LIQUIDATEDDAMAGES
In respect to work performed under the Contract, the last sentence of the first paragraph of Subsection 6-9, “Liquidated Damages” of the Standard Specifications shall be deemed revised to read as follows:

Liquidated damages shall be in the amount as specified in the Agreement and shall be for each consecutive calendar day in excess of the time allowed under this Contract for the completion of the work, including corrective items of work as adjusted by the Contract Change Order. The amount of the liquidated damages shall be deducted from payments due the Contractor.

In respect to work performed under the Contract, the following paragraph is added after the last paragraph of Subsection 6-9, “Liquidated Damages” of the Standard Specifications:

The Contractor will not be assessed liquidated damages for delay in completion of the project, when such delay was caused by the failure of the City or the Owner of a utility to provide for removal or relocation of an existing unknown utility facility.

DRAFT
33 SECTION 7 – MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
7-3 PAYMENT
7-3.1 General
In respect to work performed under the Contract, the ninth paragraph of Subsection 7-3.1, “General,” of the Standard Specifications, shall be deemed revised to include the following:

In the event that one or more Stop Notices are filed with the City, an amount equal to 125% of the total of the amount(s) called for therein will be retained by the City until the demand(s) have been satisfied in accordance with applicable laws.
7-3.2 Partial and Final Payment
In respect to work performed under the Contract, the first, second and third paragraphs of Subsection 7-3.2, “Partial and Final Payment,” of the Standard Specifications shall be deemed revised to read asfollows:

Except as otherwise provided for under Subsection 7-2, “Lump Sum Work,” hereinabove for L.S. items, the Contractor will be entitled to no more than one progress payment per month. Thirty days prior and prerequisite to each progress payment, the Contractor shall submit to the Engineer a detailed estimate and invoice of the total quantity and value of work completed since the cut-off date for the previous progress payment. The Engineer will make the final determination as to the actual quantity and value of work completed for which payment will be made. Five percent (5%) of the value will be deducted from each progress payment and retained by the City until later released asspecified hereinafter.

Before he or she shall be entitled to final payment of the retention withheld from the progress payments, the Contractor shall execute and file with the City a conditional or unconditional waiver and release, upon a form which complies with Section 3262, of the Civil Code, and which is acceptable to the City, releasing the City from all claims or liability relating to undisputed Contract amounts for work performed in relation to said amount. If pursuant to a conditional release, such release shall contain or have attached a list of all Contract amounts as to which a dispute exists.

The Contractor will be permitted the substitution of securities for any monies withheld by a public agency to ensure performance under the Contract. At the request and expense of the Contractor, securities equivalent to the amount withheld shall be deposited with the City, or with a state or federally chartered bank as the escrow agent, who shall pay such monies to the Contractor upon satisfactory completion of the Contract. Securities eligible for investment shall include those listed in Section 16430 of the Government Code or bank or savings and loan certificates of deposit.

The Contractor shall be the beneficial owner of any securities substituted for monies withheld and shall receive any dividend interest thereon. Such substitutions shall be conducted in accordance with Section 22300, of the Public Contract Code. DRAFT
34 The final payment of the five percent (5%) retention withheld from the progress payments shall not be due and payable until the expiration of at least 35 calendar days from the date of recording of the “Notice of Completion” with the County Recorder.

In respect to work performed under the Contract, the fourth paragraph of Subsection 7-3.2, “Partial and Final Payment,” of the Standard Specifications, shall be deemed revised to include the following:

The amount of liquidated damages will be deducted from earned progress payments due the Contractor.
7-3.3 DeliveredMaterials
Subsection 7-3.3, “Delivered Materials,” of the Standard Specifications shall be deemed revised to read asfollows:

Unless included in the Bid Schedule, or unless otherwise called for in these General Provisions, no payment will be made for materials or equipment delivered but not yet incorporated in the work. 7-3.4 Mobilization
In respect to work performed under the Contract, Subsection 7-3.4, “Mobilization,” of the Standard Specifications shall be deemed revised to read as follows:

Mobilization shall consist of preparatory work and operations, including but not limited to, those necessary for the movement of personnel, equipment, supplies, and incidentals to the project site; for the establishment of all offices, buildings, construction yards, sanitary facilities, and any other facilities necessary for work on the project; and for all other work and operations which must be performed or costs incurred prior to beginning work on the various contract items on the project site, as well as the related demobilization costs anticipated at the completion of the project.

The cost of all bonds and insurance policies, including premiums and incidentals, shall be included in Mobilization.

No additional compensation will be allowed for additional mobilizations required, including but not limited to, delays caused by the relocation of existing utility facilities shown on the plans or discovered during construction operations.

The amount credited for Mobilization on each monthly progress payment shall be based upon the percentage of the total of the amounts credited for work on all the other contract items for that monthly progress payment, up to a cumulative limit of eighty (80) percent of the contract item price for Mobilization. The remaining twenty (20) percent of the contract item price for Mobilization shall be paid with the final progress payment.

The deletion of work or the addition of extra work as provided for herein shall not affect the price paid for Mobilization.

The contract lump sum price paid for mobilization shall include full compensation for furnishing all DRAFT 35 labor, materials, tool, equipment, the cost of all bonds and insurance policies, and incidentals, and for doing the work involved in mobilization asspecified herein. 7-3.5.2 Increases of More Than 25 Percent
In respect to the work performed under the contract, the first paragraph of Subsection 7-3.5.2 “Increases of More than 25 Percent” of the Standard Specifications shall be deemed revised to read as follows:

Should the actual quantity of a major item of work covered by a Contract Unit Price and constructed in conformance with the Plans and Specifications, exceed the Bid quantity by more than 25 percent, a Contract Change Order will be issued and payment for the quantity in excess of 125 percent of the Bid quantity will be made on the basis of the extension of contract with price adjustment in the Contract Unit Price mutually agreed to by the Contractor and the Agency, Subsection 7-3.7 “Agreed Prices”, of the Standard Specifications or at the option of the Engineer, on the basis of Subsection 2-8 “Extra Work” of the Standard Specifications.

The Contractor will be paid at the contract unit price for minor bid items regardless of if there is an increase in excess of twenty-five percent (25%) in the quantity listed in the bid. 7-3.5.3 Decreases of More Than 25 Percent
In respect to the work performed under the contract, the first paragraph of Subsection 7-3.5.3 “Decrease of More than 25 Percent”, of the Standard Specifications shall be deemed revised to read as following:

Should the actual quantity of a major item of work covered by a Contract Unit Price, and constructed in conformance with the Plans and Specifications, be less than 75 percent of the Bid quantity, and adjustment in payment will not be made unless so requested in writing by the Contractor. If the Contractor so requests, a Contract Change Order will be issued and payment will be made on the basis of an adjustment in the Contract Unit Price mutually agreed to by the Contractor and the Agency, or at the option of the Engineer, on the basis of Subsection 2-8 “Extra Work” of the Standard Specifications; however, in no case will payment be less than would be made for the actual quantity at the Contract Unit Price.

The Contractor will be paid at the Contract Unit Price for minor bid items regardless of if there is a decrease in excess of twenty-five (25%) percent in the quantity listed in the bid. 7-4 PAYMENT FOR EXTRA WORK
7-4.2 Basisfor Establishing Costs
7-4.2.1 Labor
In respect to work performed under the Contract, the first paragraph of Subsection 7-4.2.1, “Labor” of the Standard Specifications shall be deemed revised to read asfollows: DRAFT 36 The costs of labor will be the actual cost for wages prevailing locally for each crafter type of worker (including foreman when authorized by the Engineer) performing the extra work at the time the extra work is done, plus, liability insurance, health and welfare, pension, vacation, apprenticeship funds, and other direct costs, as well as assessments or benefits required by lawful collective bargaining agreements.

To the actual wages, as defined above, will be added a labor surcharge set forth in the California Department of Transportation publication entitled “Labor Surcharge and Equipment Rental Rates,” which is in effect on the date upon which the work is accomplished, and which is part of the contract.

The labor surcharge shall constitute full compensation for all payments imposed by state and federal laws and for all other payments made to, or on behalf of the workers, other than actual wages, subsistence and travel paid to the workers. Labor surcharge includes Workers’ Compensation Insurance, Social Security, Medicare, Federal Unemployment, State Unemployment and State Training Taxes.
7-4.2.2 Materials
In respect to the work performed under the contract, Subsection 7-4.2.2 “Materials,” of the Standard Specifications shall be deemed revised to include the following:

If the Contractor does not furnish satisfactory evidence of the cost of the materials from the actual supplier thereof within a specified time period after the date of delivery of material, the Engineer reserves the right to establish the cost of the materials at the lowest current wholesale prices at which the materials were available, in the quantities concerned, delivered to the location of the work, less any discounts.
7-4.2.3 Tool and Equipment Rental
In respect to work performed under the Contract, the first paragraph of Subsection 7-4.2.3, “Tool and Equipment Rental,” of the Standard Specifications shall be deemed revised to read asfollows:

Individual pieces of equipment or tools not listed in the Equipment Rental Rates and having a replacement value of $200 or less, whether or not consumed by use, shall be considered to be small tools and no payment will be made therefore.

The Contractor will be paid for the use of equipment at the rental rates listed for such equipment in the Department of Transportation publication entitled, “Labor Surcharge and Equipment Rental Rates,” which is in effect on the date upon which the work is accomplished.

Move in and out, or minimum charges other than the hourly rate, shall not apply to equipment available from the force already on the job site.

Equipment which is rented from a local equipment agency, other than Contractor owned, the Contractor will be paid at the hourly rate shown on the rental agency invoice or agreement for the time used on extra work. If a minimum equipment rental amount is required by the local equipment rental agency, the actual amount charged will be paid to the Contractor. DRAFT 37 If it is deemed necessary by the Engineer to use equipment not listed in the Labor Surcharge and Equipment Rental Rates publication, a suitable rental rate for that equipment will be established by the Engineer. The Contractor may furnish any cost data that might assist the Engineer in the establishment of the rental rate. If the rental rate established by the Engineer is $10.00 per hour or less, the provisions above concerning rental of equipment from a local equipment agency shall apply.

Rental time will not be allowed while equipment is inoperative due to breakdowns.

When owner operated equipment is used to perform extra work to be paid for on a force account basis, the Contractor will be paid for the equipment and operator as follows:

Payment for the equipment will be made at the rental rates listed for such equipment in the Department of Transportation publication entitled “Labor Surcharge and Equipment Rental Rates,” which is in effect on the date upon which the work is accomplished.

Payment for the cost of labor will be made in conformance with the provisions in Subsection 7-4.2.1 “Labor” of the Standard Specifications as revised.
7-4.3 Markup
In respect to work performed under the Contract Subsection 7-4.3 (.1 & .2), “Markup,” of the Standard Specifications, shall be deemed revised to read as follows:

The markup for overhead and profit on work added to the Contract shall be according to the following schedule:

1. For work performed by the Contractor’s force, the added cost for overhead and profit shall be thirty-three percent (33%) to the cost of labor, fifteen percent. (15%) to the cost of materials, and fifteen percent (15%) to the cost of equipmentrentals.

2. For work performed by a subcontractor, the added cost for overhead and profit shall be thirtythree percent (33%) to the cost of labor, fifteen percent (15%) to the cost of materials, and fifteen percent (15%) to the cost of equipment rentals, to which the Contractor may add five percent (5%) of the subcontractor’s price of the work. The additional five percent (5%) mark-up shall reimburse the Contractor for additional administrative costs, and no other additional payment will be made by reason of performance of the extra work by a subcontractor.

3. For work performed by a sub-subcontractor, the added cost for overhead and profit shall be thirty-three percent (33%) to the cost of labor, fifteen percent (15%) to the cost of materials, and fifteen percent (15%) to the cost of equipment rentals, to which subcontractor and general Contractor may add an additional five percent (5%) each of the total price from DRAFT 38 the lower tier subcontractor. The additional five percent (5%) mark-up shall reimburse the subcontractor and general Contractor for additional administrative costs, and no other additional payment will be made by reason of performance of the extra work by a subcontractor.

4. For work performed by special force or other special services, the Engineer and the Contractor, by agreement, will determine that a special service or an item of extra work cannot be performed by the forces of the Contractor or those of any of his subcontractors, such service or extra work item may be performed by a specialist. Invoices for such service or item of extra work on the basis of the current market price thereof may be accepted without complete itemization of labor, material, and equipment rental costs when it is impracticable and not in accordance with the established practice of the special service industry to provide such complete itemization.

In those instances wherein a Contractor is required to perform extra work necessitating a fabrication or matching process in a fabrication or machine shop facilities away from the job site, the charges for that portion of the extra work performed in such facility may, by Agreement between the Contractor and Engineer, be accepted as a specialist billing.

To the specialist invoice price, less a credit to the City for any cash or trade discount offered or available, whether or not such discount may have been taken, will be added fifteen percent (15%) for overhead and profit in lieu of the percentages provided above.

5. The cost of direct supervision, except when provided by working foremen whose time is included above, of Contract Change Order work when done exclusively and not in conjunction or at the same time of other work performed on the job and when approved in advance by the Engineer including only payroll taxes, insurance, pension and direct costs for the labor of supervision, may be charged to the Contract Change Order. The cost of transportation, use of vehicle, and other costs incurred by supervision will not be allowed.

6. For added or deducted work by subcontractors, the Contractor shall furnish to the Engineer, with the subcontractor’s signed detailed estimate of the cost for labor, materials, and equipment, including the markup by such subcontractor for overhead and profit. The same requirement shall apply to subcontractors.

7. For added or deducted work furnished by a vendor or supplier, the Contractor shall furnish to the Engineer a detailed estimate or quotation of the cost to the Contractor for such work, signed by such vendor orsupplier.

8. Any change in the work involving both extras and credits shall show a net total cost, including subcontracts. Allowances for overhead and profit, as specified herein, shall be applied if the net total cost is an extra. The estimated cost of deductions shall be based on labor and material prices on the date the Contract was executed. DRAFT 39 7-4.4 Daily Reports
In respect to work performed under the Contract, Subsection 7-4.4, “Daily Reports,” of the Standard Specifications shall be deemed to include the following:

Material charges shall be substantiated by valid copies of vendor’s invoices. Such invoices shall be submitted with the daily extra work reports, or if not available, they shall be submitted with subsequent daily extra work reports. The Contractor shall maintain Contractor’s records in such a manner as to provide a clear account basis and the costs of other operations.

Daily extra reports shall be made on City daily work report forms. The daily extra reports shall describe in detail the work that was performed, location (station, etc.). Separate daily extra reports shall be submitted for work that is being performed for more than one location or for different tasks that occur on the same day.

The Engineer will compare the Inspector’s records with the completed daily extra work reports furnished by the Contractor and make any necessary adjustments. When these daily extra work reports are agreed upon and signed by both parties, said reports shall become the basis of payment for the work performed.

DRAFT
40 SPECIAL PROVISIONS
AMENDMENTS TO THE “GREENBOOK”

STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS FOR PUBLIC WORKS CONSTRUCTION
PART 2 CONSTRUCTION MATERIALS
The following SECTIONS supplement the STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS FOR PUBLIC WORKS CONSTRUCTION, (“Greenbook”), 2021 edition, regional supplements, and all current supplements, and supersede any conflicting requirements, (A “conflicting requirement” is one that cannot operate by law within the Special Provisionslisted herein or both cannot be physically produced). Otherwise, these Special Provisions only supplement the Standard Specifications. If any of the sections or part of sections below contradict or are not in conformance with current California Codes and Regulations at the time of bidding, the Contractor will assume that the current California Codes and Regulations supersedes that item in these specifications. When there are two or more specifications for the same item or work the contractor shall bid the more expensive item or work specified unless the one specified item specifically states that it shall take precedent over other specified items for the same work.

SECTION 200 ROCK MATERIALS
200-2 UNTREATED BASE MATERIALS
200-2.1 General
Add the following:

Aggregate base shall be either crushed miscellaneous base pursuant to Section 200-2.4, or recycled Class 2 Aggregate Base per Caltrans Standard Specification, Section 26: Aggregate Bases, Section 26-1.02B, Class 2 Aggregate Base, latest edition, and as specified herein.

Add the following section:
200-2.9 Class 2 Aggregate Base
Aggregate for recycled Class 2 aggregate base shall be free from organic matter and other deleterious substances and shall be of such nature that it can be compacted readily under watering and rolling to form a firm, stable base. Aggregate may be composed of a combination of the following:

1. 100% reclaimed asphalt concrete, Portland cement concrete, lean concrete base, or cement treated base

2. Broken stone

3. Crushed gravel

4. Natural rough surface gravel

5. Sand
The aggregate shall conform to the grading and quality requirements shown in the following tables. At the option of the Contractor, the grading for either the 11/2-inch maximum or 3/4 DRAFT 41 inch maximum shall be used, except that once a grading is selected it shall not be changed without the Engineer's written approval.

AGGREGATE GRADING REQUIREMENTS

PERCENTAGE PASSING
1 ½” Maximum ¾” Maximum
Sieve Sizes
Operating
Range
Operating
Range
2”………………… 100 —
1 ½”……………... 90-100 —
1”………………… — 100
¾ ”………………. 50-85 90-100
No. 4……………. 25-45 35-60
No. 30…………… 10-25 10-30
No. 200…………. 2-9 2-9

QUALITY REQUIREMENTS
Property California Test
Operating
Range
Resistance (R-value) 301. 78 Min.

Sand Equivalent 217 25 Min.

Durability Index 229 35 Min.

The aggregate shall not be treated with lime, cement or other chemical material before the Durability Index test is performed.

If the results of either or both the aggregate grading and Sand Equivalent tests do not meet the requirements specified for “Operating Range” but meet the “Contract Compliance” requirements, placement of the aggregate base may be continued for the remainder of that day.

However, another day's work may not be started until tests, or other information, indicate to the satisfaction of the Engineer that the next material to be used in the work will comply with the requirements specified for “Operating Range.”
If the results of either or both the aggregate grading and Sand Equivalent tests do not meet the requirements specified for “Contract Compliance,” the aggregate base which is represented by these tests shall be removed. However, if requested by the Contractor and approved by the Engineer, the aggregate base may remain in place and the Contractor shall pay to the City $2.25 per ton for such aggregate base left in place. The City may deduct this amount from anymoneys due, or that may become due, the Contractor under the contract. If both the aggregate grading and Sand Equivalent do not conform to the “Contract Compliance” requirements, only one adjustment shall apply.

No single aggregate grading or Sand Equivalent test shall represent more than 500 tons or one day's production, whichever is smaller. DRAFT
42 SECTION 201 CONCRETE, MORTAR, AND RELATED MATERIALS
201-1 PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE
201-1.1 General
Add the following:

The Contractor shall furnish the engineer in the field with a copy of the mix design to be used, and with a legible certified weighmasters certificate for each load of PCC delivered to the project. PCC delivered to the project site having a water content and/or slump greater than that specified in the mix design shall be rejected and removed from the project site. 201-3 EXPANSION JOINT FILLER AND JOINT SEALANTS
201-3.4 Type “A” Sealant (Two-Part Polyurethane Sealant) Add the following:

All finished concrete surfaces shall have a ½” continuous expansion joint at locations indicated on the plans and notes and shall be located either parallel or perpendicular to the curb line.

When not otherwise indicated, all expansion joints located adjacent to colored concrete shall be sealant Type “A” and colored to match the color of the concrete surface.

Contractor shall provide joint sealants that have been produced and installed to establish and to maintain watertight and airtight continuous seals without causing staining or deterioration of joint substrates.

The contractor shall submit product data from the manufacturer of each joint sealant product required, including instructionsfor joint preparation and jointsealer application. Contractorshall also submit samples for initial selection purposes in form of manufacturer’s standard bead samples, consisting of strips of actual products showing full range of colors available, for each product exposed to view. Samples shall be submitted to the Engineer. Submit complete schedule of type (and location where type is to be used) of each sealant.

The contractor shall engage an experienced installer who has completed joint sealant applications similar in material, design and extent to that indicated for Project that have resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance.

Provide joint sealants, joint fillers, and other related materials that are compatible with one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by sealant manufacturers based on testing and field experience.

Provide color selections made by Engineer from manufacturer’s full range of standard colors for products of type indicated. Sealant color parallel to curb line shall match color of Paving Treatment Type “A” as specified in Section 201-1.2.4(a) of these Special Provisions. DRAFT 43 Joint sealants shall be multi-component polyurethane sealant. Except as otherwise indicated, provide manufacturer’s standard, non-modified, 2-or-more-part, polyurethane-based, elastomeric sealant; complying with either ASTM-C-920-87, Type M, Grade P, Class 25, or FS TTS 0227E Class A, non-sag, Type II.

Provide sealant backings of material and type that are non-staining; are compatible with joint substrates, sealants, primers, and other joint fillers; and are approved for applications indicated by sealant manufacturer based on field experience and laboratory testing.

Plastic foam joint fillers shall be performed, compressible, resilient, non-staining, non-waxing, non-extruding strips of flexible plastic foam either open-cell polyurethane foam or closed-cell polyethylene foam, subject to approval of sealant manufacturer, for cold-applied sealants only.

Polystyrene foam is not acceptable.

DRAFT
44 SECTION 203 BITUMINOUS MATERIALS
203-1 PAVING ASPHALT
203-1 GENERAL
Add the following:

Paving Asphalt shall be PG 64-10
203-3 EMULSIFIED ASPHALT
Add the following sub section:
203-3.4.7 Polymer Modified Rejuvenating Emulsion (PMRE) for chip and scrub seals At least 14 days prior to use, the Contractor shall submit certifications from the manufacturers of the recycling agent and polymer identifying the types of agents and polymer used. The Contractor shall submit test results on the polymer supplied by the supplier of the polymer and shall submit certifications from the emulsion supplier that the emulsion meets the specification.

The engineer may request these specifications weekly during the project.

The asphalt emulsion shall be a quick break Polymer Modified Rejuvenating Emulsion with a latex polymer, a rejuvenating agent and asphalt and shall meet the following specifications.

Test on Emulsion Method Specification
Viscosity @122° F (SFS) ASTM D244 50 - 400
Residue, w%, minimum. ASTM D244 65
pH ASTM E70 2.0 - 5.0
Sieve, w%, max. ASTM D244 0.1
Oil distillate, w%, max. ASTM D244 0.5
Test on Residue(1)
Viscosity @ 140° F, (P), maximum. ASTM D2171 5000
Penetration @ 39.2°F, minimum. ASTM D5 40-65
Elastic Recovery on residue by distillation, %,
minimum. (3)
AASHTO T59, T301
(1,2) 60
OR
Modified Torsional Recovery, % minimum. (3) California Test 332 (4)
45 Test on Latex (5)
Tensile Strength, die C dumbbell, psi, minimum ASTM D412 500 Swelling in rejuvenating agent, % maximum; 48
hours exposure @ 104° F
ASTM D471(6)
Modified
40% intact film DRAFT
45 Test on Rejuvenating Agent:

Viscosity, 104° F, CST ASTM D2170 50-175
Flash point, COC , °F ASTM D92 > 380
Saturate, %, by wt. ASTM D2007 30 Max.

Asphaltness ASTM D2007 1.0 Max.

Test on Rejuvenating Agent Residue:

Weight Change, % ASTM D2872 6.5 Max.

Viscosity Ration ASTM D2170 3 Max.
(1) Exception to AASHTO T59: Bring the temperature on the lower thermometer slowly to 350o F plus or minus 10o F.

Maintain at this temperature for 20 minutes. Complete total distillation in 60 plus or minus 5 minutes from first application of heat.
(2) Elastic Recovery @ 10o C (50o F): Hour glass sides, pull 20 cm, hold 5 minutes then cut, let sit 1 hour. (3) Choose either Elastic Recovery or Torsional Recovery as a test. (4) Torsional Recovery shall include the first 30 seconds. (5) Latex films shall be cured at 75° F and 50% relative humidity for 14 days prior to cutting or molding specimens. Suitable substrate for film formation shall be polyethylene boards, silicone rubber sheeting, glass, or any substrate which produces a cured film of uniform cross-section.
(6) Report mass increase as a percent by weight of the original latex film mass upon exposure of films to “Rejuvenating Agent” Asphalt rejuvenating agent furnished without a Certificate of Compliance shall not be used in the work until the Engineer has approved the asphalt rejuvenating agent for use. The Engineer shall have 10 daysto approve the asphalt rejuvenating agent for use. If, in the opinion of the Engineer, the Contractor’s controlling operation is delayed to interfered with by reason of the Engineer not completing the evaluation of the asphalt rejuvenating agent within the time specified, the delay will be considered as the Contractors inability to perform the work and no extension of time shall be granted in accordance with section 6-6 Delays and Extension of Time of the Special Provisions.

The Contractor shall submit a contingency plan to the Engineer at least 10 days prior to applying the asphalt rejuvenating agent. The contingency plan shall describe in detail the corrective actions the Contractor will take if the coefficient of friction is less than 0.30 or if the asphalt rejuvenating agent does not break within the times specified for lane closures. The plan shall include any additional traffic handling, additional materials on hand, or additional equipment kept available for contingency situations. The engineer must approve the use of a corrective action before it is implemented.
203-4 MICROSURFACING
Replace entire section with the following:
203-4.1 Asphalt Emulsion
Asphalt emulsion shall conform to 203-3.4.6 of the Standard Specifications. DRAFT 46 203-4.2 Water and Additives
Water shall be potable and of such quality that the asphalt will not separate from the emulsion before the micro surfacing is in place on the pavement. If necessary for workability, a setcontrol agent that will not adversely affect the micro surfacing may be used. 203-4.3 Mineral Filler
Mineral filler shall be any recognized brand of non-air entrained Portland cement or hydrated lime that is free of lumps. The type and amount of mineral filler needed shall be determined by the laboratory mix design and will be considered as part of the mineral gradation requirement.

An increase or decrease of less than one percent may be permitted when the micro surfacing is being placed if it is found to be necessary for better consistency or set times. 203-4.4 Aggregate
The mineral aggregate used shall be of the type and grade specified for the particular use of the micro surfacing. The aggregate shall be manufactured crushed stone such as granite, slag, limestone, or other high-quality aggregate, or combination thereof. The material shall be free from vegetable matter and other deleterious substances. All aggregate shall be free of caked lumps and oversize particles.

The aggregate, prior to the addition of emulsion shall conform to the requirements of this section. If aggregates are blended each component aggregate shall meet the sand equivalency and abrasion resistance and shall be 100% crushed as tested in accordance with California Test 205. The definition of a crushed particle in California Test 205 Section D, is amended to read:
“Any particle having 2 or more fresh mechanically fractured faces shall be considered a crushed particle.”
The percentage composition by mass of the aggregate shall meet the following grading requirements when tested in conformance with California Test 202:

Sieve Size Percentage Passing
Type II Type III
3/8” 100 100
No. 4 94 - 100 70 - 90
No. 8 65 - 90 45 - 70 DRAFT
47 No. 16 40 - 70 28 – 50
No. 30 25 - 50 19 – 34
No. 200 5 - 15 5 – 15
Aggregate excluding mineral filler shall conform to the following additional quality requirements:

Test Method Requirement
Sand Equivalent California Test 217 65 minimum
Durability Index California Test 229 65 minimum
Percentage of crushed particles.* California Test 205 95% minimum Los Angeles Rattler
Loss at 500 revolutions**
California test 211 35% maximum
* Crushed particles must have at least 1 fractured face. **California Test 211 must be performed on the parent aggregate before crushing. 203-4.5 Mix Design
At least 7 working days before micro surfacing placement commences, the Contractor shall submit to the Engineer for approval a laboratory report of tests and a proposed mix design covering the specific materials to be used on the project.

The tests and mix design shall be performed by a laboratory capable of performing the applicable International Slurry Surfacing Association (ISSA) tests. The proposed micro surfacing mixture shall conform to the requirements specified when tested in accordance with the followingtests:

Test ISSA Test Requirement
Wet Cohesion TB* 139
@ 30 min.
(set)
12 kg-cm minimum DRAFT
48 @ 60 min.
(traffic)
20 kg-cm minimum
(or near spin)
Excess Asphalt TB 109 540 g/m[JF1] 2
maximum
Wet Stripping TB 114 Pass (90% minimum)
Wet Track
Abrasion
TB 100
Six day soak
810 g/m2
max loss
Displacement TB 147A
Lateral 5% max
Specific Gravity
after 1000 cycles
of 56.8 kg

2.10 Classification
Compatibility
TB 144** (AAA,BAA)
11 grade points
minimum
Mix Time @ 25°C TB 113 Controllable to 120
seconds minimum
* TB = Technical
Bulletin
The original laboratory report shall be signed by the laboratory that performed the tests and mix design and shall show the results of the test on individual materials, comparing their values to those required by the specifications. The report shall clearly show the proportions of aggregate, filler, water (minimum and maximum), set control additive, and asphalt solids content (minimum and maximum) based on the dry mass of aggregate. The laboratory shall also report the quantitative effects of moisture content on the unit mass of the aggregate (bulking effect).

Previous laboratory reports covering the same materials may be accepted provided they are made within the previous 12 months. The mix design will further show recommended changes in cement, water and additive proportions for high temperature weather conditions by reporting proportions of materials required for 60 seconds of mix time with materials heated to 38°C. This 38°C mixing report will not be required for projects requiring nighttime application or application in cool weather conditions. DRAFT
49 All the component materials used in the mix design shall be representative of the materials proposed by the contractor to be used on the project.

Once the proportions of materials to be used are approved by the Engineer, no substitution of other materials will be permitted unless the materials proposed for substitution are first tested and a laboratory report is submitted for the substituted design as specified above. Substituted materials shall not be used until the mix design for those materials is approved by the Engineer. 203-4.6 Proportioning
Aggregate, mineral filler, asphalt emulsion, water, and additives, including set-control agent if used, shall be proportioned by volume utilizing the mix design approved by the Engineer. If more than one kind of aggregate is used, the correct amount of each kind of aggregate to produce the required grading shall be proportioned separately, prior to adding the other materials of the mixture, in a manner that will result in a uniform and homogeneous aggregate blend.

The percentages of each individual material required shall be shown in the laboratory report.

Adjustments may be required during the construction, based on field conditions. The component materials shall be within the following limits:

Residual Asphalt 5.5% to 10.5% by dry weight of aggregate Mineral Filler 0% to 3% by dry weight of aggregate
Additive As needed
Water As required to produce proper mix consistency
The completed mixture, after addition of water and any set-control agent, shall be such that the micro surfacing mixture has proper workability and (a) will permit a traffic flow without pilotcar- assisted traffic control on the micro surfacing within one hour after placement, and (b) will prevent development of bleeding, raveling, separation or other distress within 15 days after placing the micro surfacing. However, when ambient temperatures are below 25°C traffic may not be permitted on the micro surfacing until it has sufficiently cured. The time for sufficient curing shall be mutually agreed upon between the contractor and the Engineer. DRAFT 50 203-6 ASPHALT CONCRETE
203-6.1 General
Delete the first two paragraphs and replace with the following:

Asphalt concrete shall be the product of mixing mineral asphalt with asphalt binder at a central mixing plant. Reclaimed Asphalt Pavement (RAP) shall be included in the mix per the specifications below:

Base course Asphalt shall contain a maximum of 10 percent RAP. There shall be no RAP in the final asphalt cap (1 1-/2” min).
203-6.2 Materials
Add the following:

Asphalt material shall conform to Section 39 “Asphalt Concrete,” of the Caltrans Standard Specifications 2022 edition. The amount of asphalt binder to be mixed with the aggregate shall be proposed by the Contractor for approval by the Engineer. The Contractor shall submit its mix designs for the asphalt concrete pavement specified herein, for review and approval by the Engineer, at the Pre-Construction Conference. The Contractor shall be responsible for providing the Engineer with all required technical and material specifications necessary to review the Contractor’s proposed mix designs. Modification of the amount of asphalt binder shall be made to the Contractor’s mix designs as may be required by the Engineer. Commencement of construction of asphalt concrete pavement shall not occur until the Contractor has received the Engineer’s approval of proposed mix designs.

All asphalt concrete pavement used on this project shall consist of Type A. Asphalt binder used in the asphalt concrete pavement shall comply with specifications for Performance Graded (PG) 64-10 asphalt binder, in accordance with Section 92 “Asphalt Binders,” of the Caltrans Standard Specifications.

Laboratory tests may be performed at the expense of the City, when required by the Engineer, to determine if aggregates at the plant fall within specifications. Sampling of asphalt concrete pavement delivered to the site and placed on a prepared base course shall be performed by the Engineer to ensure the type of asphalt concrete pavement laid conforms to these Special Provisions, and to the proposed mix designs approved by the Engineer.
203-6.4.1 Class and Grade
Base course asphalt concrete shall be class B-PG64-10
Final lift asphalt concrete shall be class C2-PG64-10.

Leveling course asphalt concrete shall be class D2-PG64-10 203-11 ASPHALT RUBBER HOT MIX (ARHM)
203-11.1 General DRAFT
51 Add the following:

Asphalt Rubber Hot Mix shall be Gap Graded (ARHM-GG) with class and grade C-PG 64-16.

Contractor and subcontractors shall comply with the following:
a. 100% California waste tires must be used in the runner portion of AHRM. b. AHRM to meet ASTM D6114-97 standard.
c. Submitting the “Recycled Content Certification” CIWMB 74G-RAC form along with supporting documentation.
203-11.2 Materials
Replace with the following:

Certificates of Compliance shall conform to section 4.5 and be submitted to the Engineer.

Certificates of Compliance for the paving asphalt and asphalt modifier shall be submitted prior to the start of asphalt rubber hot mix production. The Certificate of Compliance for the crumb rubber modifier shall be submitted no later than 1 week following completion of asphalt rubber hot mix production.
203-11.2.3 Crumb Rubber Modifier (CRM)
Replace the fourth sentence of the first paragraph with the following:

Whole scrap tire CRM shall be derived from whole scrap tires generated within the State of California.

DRAFT
52 SECTION 206 MISCELLANEOUS METAL ITEMS
Add the following section:
206-7 TRAFFIC SIGNS
Add the following section:
206-7.1 General
All traffic signs shall conform to the California Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices (MUTCD) except as modified herein.

Add the following section:
206-7.2 Sign Posts
Traffic signs shall be installed per City of Lake Elsinore Standard Plan No. 407 or as approved by the Engineer.

Add the following section:
206-7.3 Street Name Signs
Street name signs shall comply with City of Lake Elsinore Plan No. 400B or as approved by the Engineer.

DRAFT
53 SECTION 207 GRAVITY PIPE
207-2 REINFORCED CONCRETE PIPE (RCP)
207-2.5 Joints
Delete the second paragraph and add the following:

Reinforced concrete pipe with ‘O’ ring joints shall conform to the requirements of Section 208-3, Gaskets for Concrete Pipe, except the ‘O’ ring joints shall be as made by Ameron, Precon, HydroConduit, or other approved equal.

Pipe designated in the plans as “pressure pipe” or with a 100-year hydraulic grade line at or above the pipe soffit shall be bell and groove spigot joint with “O” rings conforming to ASTM C-443 and C-361 for the limits shown on the plans.

Add the following section:
207-26 SUBDRAIN PIPE FOR REINFORCED CONCRETE BOX
Add the following section:
207-26.1 General
The subdrain pipe, both perforated and non-perforated, shall comply with the following:

Material ASTM Specification
Polyvinyl Chloride D2729
Polyethylene F405
Pipe of the same material shall be used throughout the entire project.

Add the following section:
207-26.2 Pipe Perforations
Perforations shall be located in the bottom half of the pipe as laid.

Add the following section:
207-26.3 Pipe Joints
The joints between sections of perforated pipe shall be of a type that will hold the pipe securely in alignment and maintain the inner surfaces of abutting pipes flush and even. DRAFT 54 SECTION 211 MATERIALS TEST
Add the following section:
211-7 AGRONOMIC SOIL TEST
Prior to ordering material and delivery to the site, and prior to soil amendment and preparation, Contractor shall obtain soil samplesfrom proposed topsoil material as approved by the Engineer.

Contractor shall transmit soil samples to an approved agronomic soil–testing laboratory for analysis. Provide a soil analysis report from the laboratory, with recommendations for soil amendment and preparation. Submit a copy of the report to the Engineer for review. The contractor shall pay for soil sampling and testing. Soil analysis shall indicate following soil properties:
(a) organic matter content (%)
(b) fertility—nitrogen (N), phosphorus (P), potassium (K) (c) pH reaction (acid–neutral–alkaline)
(d) ECe (salinity)
(e) SAR (sodium absorption ratio)
(f) particle size analysis (% sand, % silt, % clay)
(g) micronutrients (calcium, magnesium, copper, zinc, manganese, iron) (h) specific toxicities (boron, chloride, fluoride, sodium, etc.) (i) percolation (water infiltration rate)
(j) recommendations for amendments
DRAFT
55 SECTION 213 ENGINEERING GEOSYNTHETHICS
213-5 GEOTEXTILES AND GEOGRIDS
213-5.1 General
Add the following:

Geosynthetic types shall be used for the applications listed in Table 213-5.2(F) TABLE 213-5.2(F)

GEOTEXTILE APPLICATIONS
Application of Geotextile Type
Designation
Subgrade stabilization Tensar
BX1200
Geogrid
Separation of Soil and Street Structural Section 90WS
Separation of Soil and Subsurface Aggregate Drain 180N
Reinforcement of Street Structural Section 200WS
Remediation and Separation of Soil 270WS
Reinforcement of Soil 270WS
Drainage at the Interface of Soil Structures N/A
Drainage at the Interface of Soil and Structures N/A
Rock Slope Protection Fabric for Rock Sizes Below 225 kg (¼ Ton) 180N Rock Slope Protection Fabric for Rock Sizes Including and Above 225 kg (¼ Ton)
250N
Plant Protection Covering 90N
Erosion Control Fence with 14 AWG - 150 mm x 150 mm (6”x6”) Wire and 3 m (10’) Post Spacing
90WS
Erosion Control Fence with 1.8 m (6’) Post Spacing and No Wire Fencing
200WS
Add the following section:
213-6 EROSION CONTROL SPECIALTIES
213-3.1 Gravel bags
Gravel bags for the use of temporary erosion control shall be burlap type, filled with no less than 23kg (50 lbs) of 19 mm (3/4“) crushed rock and securely tied closed. Plastic bags are not acceptable. DRAFT
56 SECTION 214 TRAFFIC STRIPING, CURB AND PAVEMENT MARKINGS, AND

PAVEMENT MARKERS
Delete the entire section and replace with the following:
214-1 REMOVALS
This work shall consist of the removal and disposal of existing or temporary traffic stripes, pavement markings, pavement markers, etc., on streets, parking lots in preparation for either the application of temporary delineation for public traffic or the application of permanent delineation as specified in the contract documents, and shall conform to the provisions of Section 15, “Existing Facilities,” of the State of California Standard Specifications 2022 edition and these Special Provisions.

Where paint, thermoplastic striping or markings exist, traffic stripe and pavement marking removal shall be by wet sandblasting or better.

The method of removal of traffic stripes and pavement markings shall result in complete removal to the extent that changing light conditions and/or wet pavement conditions shall not produce an image of the removed device. The Contractor shall extend grinding or sandblasting, beyond the edges of the stripes or markings being removed, sufficiently to eliminate such imaging.

Additional work necessary to achieve the foresaid effectiveness of removal shall be considered as compensated by the prices paid (in accordance with the applicable provisions for measurement and payment) for “Traffic Striping, Signage & Markings,” and no additional payment will be made therefore.

Removal of temporary traffic delineation shall conform to the procedural provisions of this section, and Section 15, Existing Facilities,” of the State of California Standard Specifications.

Where blast cleaning is used for the removal of painted traffic stripes and pavement markings or for removal of objectionable material, and such removal operation is being performed within 10 feet of a lane occupied by public traffic, the residue including dust shall be removed immediately after contact between the sand and the surface being treated. Such removal shall be by vacuum attachment operating concurrently with the blast cleaning operation.

Payment for all removal of all required traffic striping and markings shall be considered as included in the lump sum bid for “Install Sign, Thermoplastic Striping, Pavement Marking and Raised Marker,” and no additional payment will be made therefore. 214-2 THERMOPLASTIC PAVEMENT STRIPING AND PAVEMENT MARKINGS 214-2.1 General
All traffic striping shall be thermoplastic. Thermoplastic traffic stripes and pavement markings shall conform to the provisions in Sections 84 of the Standard Specifications of the California Department of Transportation 2022 edition, and as specified in these special provisions. DRAFT 57 214-2.2 Material
Thermoplastic striping material shall consist of 3M bonded core all weather reflective elements series 50 (or approved equal) and shall allow for both wet and dry reflectivity.

Thermoplastic material for traffic stripes and pavement markings shall be applied at a minimum thickness of 0.100 inch.

Thermoplastic traffic stripes and pavement markings with enhanced wet-night visibility shall consist of a single uniform layer of thermoplastic and a layer of bonded core elements and a layer of glass beads as follows:

The 1st layer of bonded core elements shall be 3M Bonded Core All Weather Reflective Elements for use in thermoplastic traffic stripes and pavement markings. The color of the bonded core elements shall match the color of the stripe or marking to which they are being applied.

The 2nd layer of glass beads shall comply with AASHTO M247 Type 2.

Both bonded core elements and glass beads must be surface treated for use with thermoplastic under the manufacturer’s instructions.

The bonded core elements (surface-drop) shall contain either clear or yellow tinted microcrystalline ceramic beads bonded to the opacified core. These elements shall not be manufactured using lead, chromate or arsenic. All “dry performing” microcrystalline ceramic beads bonded to the core shall have a minimum index of refraction of 1.8 when tested using the liquid oil immersion method. All “wet performing “microcrystalline ceramic beads bonded to the core shall have a minimum index of refraction of 2.30 when tested using the oil immersion method.

Gradations for the Bonded Core Elements
Element Gradations
Mass Percent Passing (ASTM D1214)
US
Mesh Micron “S” series
12 1700 85-100
14 1410 70-96
16 1180 50-90
18 1000 5-60
20 850 0-25
30 600 0-7
A sample of bonded core reflective elements supplied by the manufacturershall show resistance to corrosion of their surface after exposure to a 1 % solution (by weight) of sulfuric acid. The 1 % acid solution shall be made by adding 5.7 cc of concentrated acid into 1000 cc of distilledwater. DRAFT 58 The bonded core elements shall be surface treated to optimize embedment and adhesion to the thermoplastic binder.

Minimum retroreflectivity values [mcd(ft2)(fc)] metric equivalent [mcd(m2)(lux)] are shown below:

Minimum Initial Retroreflectivity Values
Test Method White Yellow
Dry (ASTM E1710) 700 500
Wet recovery (ASTM E2177) 280 250
Note: Increased element drop may be necessary to
compensate for increased surface area characteristic of rough pavement surfaces.
214-2.3 Application
Mobile truck mounted applicators shall be capable of traveling at a uniform, predetermined speed over variable road grades to produce uniform application of striping material, following straight lines and making normal curves in a true arc. The equipment shall be capable of air blasting the pavement, applying the stripe and immediately dropping the bonded core elements and glass beads in a single pass at speeds of up to 8 MPH.

Walk-behind cart applicators shall be capable of uniform application of striping material at walking speeds, following straight lines and making tight turns symbols and legends. Mobile equipment must be available to air blast the areas immediately prior to hand cart application.

The walk-behind cart shall be capable of applying the molten binder and immediately dropping the bonded core elements and glass beads in a single pass at walking speeds.

The equipment shall be capable of application of bonded core elements and glass beads to the surface of the pavement marking by double drop application. The element dispenser for the first drop shall be attached to the striping machine in such a manner that the elements are dispensed closely behind the binder application device. The bead dispenser for the second drop shall be attached to the striping machine in such a manner that the beads are dispensed immediately after the first drop (bonded core elements).

The applicator for the bonded core elements and glass beads shall be capable of delivering a uniform drop rate at required application speeds. The bonded core elements and glass beads are applied such that they appear uniform on the entire traffic marking.

The specified reflective media shall be dropped immediately after binder application. Reflective media consistsretroreflective elementsfollowed by glass beads commonly called “Double-Drop” and shall be applied to achieve the application rates shown below. DRAFT 59 Bonded Core Element Application Rates for Thermoplastic Binders Units Minimum for smooth
pavement surfaces
Lb. per 4 in. ln. ft. 0.022
Lb. per 100 sq. ft. 6.6
Gr. per 4 in. ln. ft. 10
Note: Increased element drop may be necessary to compensate for increased surface area characteristic of rough pavement surfaces
Application Rates for Glass Beads
Units AASHTO M247
Type 2
Lb. per 4 in. ln. ft. 0.048
Gr. per 4 in. ln. ft. 22
Lb. per 100 sq. ft. 14.4
Note: Increased glass bead may be necessary to compensate for increased surface area characteristic of rough pavement surfaces
214-3 PAINTED PAVEMENT STRIPING AND PAVEMENT MARKINGS
Painted traffic stripes and pavement markings shall conform to the provisions in Section 84-2 “Traffic Striping and Pavement Markings”, of the State of California Standard Specifications 2022 edition and these Special Provisions.

The subparagraphs of the first paragraph in Section 84-2.02, "Materials," of the State of California Standard Specifications are amended to read:

State Specification No.

Rapid Dry Water Base, Traffic Line. —White, Yellow and Black PTWB-01 The second and third paragraphs in Section 84-2.02, "Materials," of the State of California Standard Specifications are amended to read:

State Specifications for traffic paint and glass beads may be obtained from the Transportation Laboratory, 5900 Folsom Boulevard, Sacramento, CA 95819-4612, telephone number 916.227.7289.

Glass beads shall conform to 1-ACOT type beads or equal.

The Contractor shall layout and “cat-track” the alignment of the proposed striping at 15 ft intervals and “spot” the proposed pavement markings as called for on the Plans. Striping shall vary no more than 2” in 50 ft from the specified alignment. The Engineer may waive minor variations.

The Contractor shall not proceed with applying thermoplastic pavement markings until the Engineer has checked and approved the cat-tracking and spotting and has authorized the Contractor to proceed. DRAFT
60 Traffic striping shall be applied with airless equipment. All traffic striping shall be performed with a road liner type striping machine. Where the configuration or location of a traffic stripe is such that the use of a road liner type striping machine is unsuitable, traffic paint and glass beads may be applied by other methods and equipment approved by the Engineer. The Engineer shall determine if the road liner type striping machine is unsuitable for a particular use.

The first coat of paint shall be applied upon completion of the surfacing. The second coat of paint shall not be applied until seven (7) calendar days after the first coat. Each coat of paint shall be applied at the wet film thickness of 10-12 mils for white and yellow paint and 7 mils for black paint. All paint shall be applied at a relative humidity below seventy-five percent (75%) and an ambient temperature above 13°C (55°F), unless otherwise approved by the Engineer.

Except for black paint, No. 1 reflective glass beads shall be uniformly incorporated in all coats of paint concurrently with the application of the paint. The glass beads shall be embedded in the coat of traffic paint being applied to a depth of at least one-half their diameters. The reflective glass beads shall be applied to the first coat of paint at the rate of 0.7 kg (1.5 lb) of beads per liter (0.26 Gal) of paint, and to the second coat of paint at the rate of 0.95 kg (2 lb) of beads per liter (0.26 Gal) of paint.

Except as otherwise noted on the Plans or as directed by the Engineer, all angle points, as shown on the striping plans, shall be painted as a smooth, tangent curve with a radius and length as approved in the field.

Temporary tape or reflective markers utilized for the purposes of interim delineation for centerline, lane lines, and crosswalk lines shall be placed to the side of the final striping pattern in such a way so that it will not interfere with the first coat of paint. All temporary tape and reflective markers applied for the purpose of interim delineation shall be removed by the Contractor at no additional cost to the City upon completion of the first coat of striping and prior to the final striping.

Stencils used for pavement markings must conform to the latest Caltrans approved Metric Stenciling Standards.

Add to Subsection 84-2.01D(1), “General,” of the State of California Standard Specifications 2022 edition the following:

Newly painted striping or markings which are damaged as a result of the construction, including wheel markings by public traffic and the construction equipment, shall be replaced, and any associated removals shall be performed as outlined in these Special Provisions at the sole expense of the Contractor and no separate compensation will be allowed therefore.

Existing traffic striping and pavement markings that do not conform to the approved Plans shall be removed by wet sandblasting. Other methods may be requested by the Contractor but shall be submitted in writing to the Engineer for approval. Blackout of existing traffic striping or pavement DRAFT 61 markings, which do not conform to the approved Plan, shall not be allowed. 214-4 RAISED PAVEMENT MARKERS
Raised pavement markers shall conform to the provisions in Section 81-3, "Pavement Markers," of the State of California Standard Specifications 2022 edition and these Special Provisions.

Certificates of compliance shall be furnished for pavement markers as specified in "Prequalified and Tested Signing and Delineation Materials," elsewhere in these Special Provisions.

Reflective pavement markers shall comply with the specific intensity requirements for reflectance after abrading the lens surface in accordance with the retroreflectivity requirements, specified in Section 81-3.02C “Retroreflective Pavement Markers," of the State of California Standard Specifications.

The bituminous adhesive used to install the markers shall be a hot melt bituminous adhesive asphaltic material with a homogeneously mixed mineral filler and shall conform with the requirements specified in Section 95-1.02E,” Epoxy Adhesive for Pavement Markers,” of the State of California Standard Specifications.

Reflective pavement markers shall be installed per the approved Plan unless otherwise approved by the Engineer. The composition of the material shall be such that its properties shall not deteriorate when heated to and applied at temperatures up to 218°C (425°F), using either air or oil jacketed melters.

Reflective pavement markers shall be placed at locations as established by the applicable Caltrans striping detail noted on the approved striping Plan which includes but is not limited to temporary painted line(s), new striping, or existing striping. There shall be one marker for each location. The Contractor shall perform all work necessary to establish satisfactory locations for markers.

The Contractor shall remove existing reflective pavement markers that do not conform to the approved Plan.

Reflective pavement markers shall be of the prismatic reflector type (3M model white RP290w and yellow RPM 2912y or equal).

Existing pavement markers (blue) designating the location of the fire hydrants shall be replaced “in kind” after the paving is completed.

The Contractor shall contact the Engineer 72 hours before any legends are painted on city streets to ensure that the patterns the Contractor is using match the patterns used by the City of Lake Elsinore.

No other pattern will be allowed except patterns that match patterns used by the City of Lake Elsinore.

DRAFT
62 SPECIAL NOTE: The Contractor is advised that at some local intersections, the “STOP” legend and/or “STOP” bar may be missing. The Contractor shall install new “STOP” legends and/or “STOP” bars at local intersections, whether or not the “STOP” legend and/or “STOP” bar previously existed. Payment for installing new “STOP” legends and “STOP” bars shall be considered as included in the lump sum bid item price for removal and replacement of all existing traffic striping, and no additional compensation will be made therefore.
214-5 PAYMENT
The lump sum price paid for “Install Sign, Thermoplastic Striping, Pavement Marking and Raised Marker,” shall include full compensation for furnishing all labor, materials, tools, equipment, and incidentals, and for doing all the work involved installing traffic striping, markings, raised pavement markers and signs, complete in place, as shown on the Plans, as specified in the Standard Specifications and these Special Provisions and as approved by the Engineer, and no additional compensation will be allowed therefore.

The lump sum price paid for “Install Sign, Thermoplastic Striping, Pavement Marking and Raised Marker,” shall include full compensation for furnishing all labor, materials, tools, equipment, and incidentals, and for doing all the work involved in relocating or resetting existing signs, salvaging signs to the City Yard, and installing new traffic signs complete in place in accordance with the Plans and Specifications, and as directed by the Engineer, and no additional compensation will be allowed.

The contractor is required to submit a schedule of values for this lump sum bid item. Submit the schedule of values within 15 days of contract approval.

DRAFT
63 SPECIAL PROVISIONS
AMENDMENTS TO THE “GREENBOOK”

STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS FOR PUBLIC WORKS CONSTRUCTION
PART 3 CONSTRUCTION METHODS
The following SECTIONS supplement the STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS FOR PUBLIC WORKS CONSTRUCTION, (“Greenbook”), 2021 edition, regional supplements, and all current supplements, and supersede any conflicting requirements, (A “conflicting requirement” is one that cannot operate by law within the Special Provisionslisted herein or both cannot be physically produced). Otherwise, these Special Provisions only supplement the Standard Specifications. If any of the sections or part of sections below contradict or are not in conformance with current California Codes and Regulations at the time of bidding, the Contractor will assume that the current California Codes and Regulations supersedes that item in these specifications. When there are two or more specifications for same item or work the contractor shall bid the more expensive item or work specified unless the one specified item specifically states that it shall take precedent over other specified items for the same work.

SECTION 300 EARTHWORK
300-1 CLEARING AND GRUBBING
300-1.1 General
Add the following to the first paragraph:

Clearing and grubbing shall also include the removal, relocation, adjusting, or salvaging of all facilities so indicated on the Plans which are not designated as separate bid items, or which are not included in other bid items.

Add the following to the third paragraph:

During surface clearing operations, the Contractor shall not cover or bury any plant material or other objectionable materials. If the Contractor cannot successfully separate the plant material from the surface soil and advertently or inadvertently mixes organic or other objectionable materials with the soil, the soilso contaminated shall be removed from the site by the Contractor.

All costs associated with removing and disposing of the soil mixed with organic or other objectionable materials and importing soil to replace said contaminated soil shall be borne by the Contractor and no additional payment shall be made therefore.

Add the following:

Clearing and Grubbing shall also include, but is not limited to, the following items as shown on DRAFT 64 the Plans or specified in these Special Provisions:

Clearing for and providing temporary graded driveways and continuing maintenance thereof to provide safe, smooth, stable and continuous all weather access to all residences and businesses within the project area and as directed by the Engineer.

Minor grading for swales and drainage control.

Dust controlthroughoutthe duration of the project conforming to Section 3-12.2 ”Air Pollution Control”, ofthese Special Provisions.

Progressive clean-up and maintenance of project appearance.

Control of water and dewatering during construction.

Clean-up of project area upon completion of the Work.

Capping and removing sprinkler lines and sprinkler heads that are within the project limits and providing same to the property owner. The Contractor shall mark locations of capped lines with lath so that Owner can locate them later.

Removing and disposing of interfering portions of, making modifications to, and maintaining existing private sprinkler systems in working order. This includes water supply, water distribution, electrical supply, and electrical control elements of the existing sprinkler system.

Removing existing street signs and other miscellaneous signs that are in conflict with roadway construction and replacing/relocating them at new locations per plan or salvaging as directed by the Engineer.

Protection of all existing structures and improvements which fall within or are adjacent to the limits of work specified under this Contract in accordance with Sections 4-2 and 402-2 of the Standard Specifications.

Removal and salvage/disposal of miscellaneous items such as utility boxes and covers, street signs, posts, poles, interfering portions of water,sewer and storm drain pipes, fences, mail boxes, and retaining walls.

Removal and disposal of interfering portions of abandoned utility lines and structures and the filling with blown sand and plugging of abandoned pipes and conduits not removed.

Installation, maintenance, and removal of fences, temporary fences, and gates as required in these Special Provisions and/or for the contractor's convenience. DRAFT 65 Removal and disposal of any additional items not specifically mentioned which may be found within the work limits as directed by the Engineer.

Removal and disposal of existing A.C. berm, pedestrian ramps, lined ditches, curb inlets and outlets, and mow curbs which may be found within the work limits as directed by the Engineer.

Removal of all items necessary to complete the work including items not specifically shown on the demolition plans but discoverable through site visit or other reasonable means at time of bid. The Engineer shall have sole discretion in determining what items were “discoverable” but will generally be defined as items that could be seen, measured, and/or otherwise identified through surface investigation.
300-1.3 Removal and Disposal of Materials
300-1.3.1 General
Add the following:

The Contractor shall specify the route and the disposal site of the material that is required to be removed and hauled away. The Contractor shall provide this information at the Pre-Construction Conference
300-1.4 Payment
Delete the first paragraph and add the following:

Payment for clearing, grubbing and miscellaneous removals, relocations or adjustments not specifically identified on the Plans, not specifically designated in these Special Provisions or separately paid for in the Bid Schedule(s), shall be made at the contract lump sum price for Clearing and Grubbing, and no additional compensation shall be allowed therefore. The Contractor shall be required to remove adequately and completely any and all existing improvements within the limits of the Work, as necessary to construct the required improvements. 300-2 UNCLASSIFIED EXCAVATION
300-2.1 General
Delete the first paragraph and add the following:

Unclassified excavation shall consist of making all cuts and fills to the lines and grades shown on the Plans,stockpiling ofsuitable material, transport ofstockpiled materialto its ultimate location, all mixing, moisture conditioning, and compaction of stockpile and fill material, and export of excess material to a legalsite.

Unclassified excavation shall also include scarification, moisture conditioning, and compaction of the top one foot of subgrade material to 95 percent relative compaction under roadway and other paved areas bearing traffic loads. DRAFT
66 300-2.2 Unsuitable Material
300-2.2.1 General
Add the following:

Such direction may include, but is not limited to, directing the Contractor to blend, adjust moisture content of, rework, or place unsuitable soils at specific locations or elevations within the Project Site.

Add the following section:
300-2.2.3 Removal & Recompaction
Compressible soils such as uncontrolled fills, alluvium, and colluvium may exist within the limits of Work.

When encountered, these unconsolidated soils shall be removed by the Contractor until a firm and unyielding surface is exposed and approved by the Engineer. If the excavated material has a moisture content greater than optimum moisture content, the Contractor shall blend the wet soil with soils having a lower moisture content and/or spread the excavated material in a manner that enables the material to dry to optimum moisture content. The cost of blending, spreading and/or drying shall be included in the contract unit price for Removal and Recompaction. The excavated material shall be placed and compacted in accordance with Section 300-4, “Unclassified Fill”, except that Sections 300-4.9 and 300-4.10, “Measurement and Payment”, shall not apply.
300-2.5 Slopes
Add the following after the first sentence of the first paragraph:

A slope shall be defined as any area steeper than three horizontal to one vertical.

And add the following to the first paragraph:

The hinge points (the top and bottom) of slopes shall be located within 75 mm (0.25’) of the locations shown on the plans.
300-2.6 Surplus Material
Add the following:

The Contractor shall export all surplus material from the project. The Contractor shall utilize highway legal trucks for the export of material from the Project Site to a legal site secured by the Contractor. No earth moving equipment or special construction equipment, as defined in Section 565 of the California Vehicle Code, will be allowed for hauling material on public streets. 300-2.7 Selected Material
The text of Subsection 300-2.7 of the Standard Specifications is hereby deleted and replaced with the following:

Selected materials encountered in the excavations within the limits of the Work that conform to DRAFT 67 the Standard Specifications for base material, trench bedding, backfill, topsoil, or other specified materials shall be used as shown on the Plans, in the Special Provisions, or as directed by the Engineer. Topsoil excavated may be considered only for the purpose of backfilling areas to be planted.
300-2.8 Measurement
Delete the first and second paragraphs and add the following:

Unclassified Excavation payment quantity shall consist of all cut shown on the plans.

When paid as a unit price, Unclassified Excavation shall be measured based on the volume it occupies in its original position before excavation. The quantity of Unclassified Excavation shall be the volume of cut occupied between the original ground surface after clearing and grubbing and the design elevations shown on the plans. Materials excavated or otherwise removed as all or part of any other bid item shall not be measured as Unclassified Excavation.

Unclassified Fill shall be paid as Unclassified Excavation, and no separate payment will be made.

The Contractor shall notify the Engineer three (3) working days prior to completing clearing and grubbing and the removal of all deleterious material from the entire site. It is the intent of the Engineer to schedule and perform field survey and/or aerial photography of the entire site at one time to determine the original ground surface prior to grading for the purpose of Unclassified Excavation quantification. If the Contractor has not removed all deleterious material from the entire site by the day prior to the scheduled field survey and/or photography, the field survey and/or photography will be cancelled and not rescheduled until the Contractor has completed removing all material from the entire site. The Contractor shall not be entitled to any additional compensation or extensions in time if the field survey and/or aerial photography is cancelled due to the Contractor not completing clearing and grubbing and removal operations as scheduled. If the entire site cannot have field survey performed and/or be photographed because of weather, poor visibility or adverse flight conditions the Contractor will be entitled to a corresponding time extension but shall not entitled to any additional compensation due to the delay.

Removal and Recompaction shall be paid at the unit price bid. The quantity of Removal and Recompaction shall be the volume occupied between the original ground surface after clearing and grubbing where the original ground surface is at or beneath the design lines and grades and the bottom contours of the removal and recompaction area.

The Contractor shall allow a minimum of 36 hours after completion of the removal of compressible soils in Removal and Recompact areas for the Agency to measure the cut for the quantity of work performed.
300-2.9 Payment
Delete this section and add the following:

Paymentfor Unclassified Excavation and Removal & Recompaction will be made at the unit prices DRAFT 68 bid in the proposal unless specified otherwise. Only the quantity of Unclassified Excavation and Removal & Recompaction measured shall be paid for. No excavated material which is reexcavated will be paid for. For progress payments, the quantity of Unclassified Excavation and Removal & Recompaction shall be estimated by the Engineer. The Engineer's calculations shall be considered the definitive determinant for quantities for progress and final payments. All topographic surveying and calculations necessary to quantify Unclassified Excavation and Removal & Recompaction payment quantities shall be performed by the Engineer.

Payment for Unclassified Excavation and Removal & Recompaction shall include all costs for salvaging clean and suitable material and filling areas to the required grades and cross sections, transport, placement, compaction, moisture conditioning and water therefore, rework of compressible soils, all work incidental to Section 300-4.8, slope rounding, grading, stockpiling, exporting and disposing of excess material, access roads, temporary detour roads, matching existing grades, construction of transitions, and grading of earthen swales and drainage channels as shown on the drawings or required by the contract documents.

When payment for Unclassified Excavation is made as a Final Pay Quantity it shall be made pursuant to Section 7-1.1, “General”, and no additional payment shall be made therefore.

When no bid item(s) existfor Unclassified Excavation and/or Removal & Recompaction then costs shall be considered included in other items of work and no additional payment shall bemade.

Add the following section:
300-2.10 Grading Tolerance
The Contractor shall finish excavated areas other than slopes and subgrade below structures, within the roadway and sidewalk areas within 0.1’ of the grades shown on the plans. Subgrade tolerances shall conform to the requirements of Section 301-1.4, “Subgrade Tolerances”. 300-3 STRUCTURE EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL.
300-3.1 General
Add the following:

The Contractorshall excavate to the lines and levelsrequired and/orshown on the Drawings. The Contractor shall provide all shoring, bracing, cribbing, pumping, and planking required. The Contractor shall excavate and maintain the bottom of all trenches in a condition that is level, firm, clean and free from all debris or foreign matter. Excavations shall be kept free from water at all times. The Contractor shall remove any unsuitable material encountered below grade as directed by the Engineer.
300-3.6 Payment
Add the following:

Dewatering shall be considered incidental to structure excavation and no additional compensation shall be made therefore. Except for unsuitable materials removed as part of unclassified excavation, unsuitable material encountered below structural excavation finished DRAFT 69 grade will be paid for at the unit price, lump sum, or if neither are included in the Contract pursuant to Section 2-8, “Extra Work”, of Standard Specifications. 300-4 UNCLASSIFIED FILL
300-4.1 General
The following text is hereby added to subsection 300-4.1 of the Standard Specifications:

The site shall be graded to the limit lines and elevations shown on the drawings with such allowances as may be required for the construction of walks, and other site improvements.

Tolerance for rough grading is 1/10th of a foot, plus or minus, at drainage swales, adjacent property grates, and paved areas. At other areas, appearance shall be the governing factor.

Finish grades shall slope to drain without water pockets or irregularities and shall conform to the intent of all plans and sections, after thorough settlement, and compaction of the soil.

Finished grades shall meet all existing or established controls of sidewalks, curbs, and walls and shall be of uniform slope and grade between points of fixed elevations or elevation controls from such point to established grades. Tolerance for finish grading is ¼ inch, plus or minus.

Delete the second and third paragraphs of subsection 300-4.1 and replace with the following:

Rocks, broken concrete, or other solid materials which are larger than 1 inch in greatest dimension shall not be placed in fill areas that are to be planted.

Clods or hard lumps of earth 1 inch or more in greatest dimension shall be broken up before compacting the material in fill areas to be planted. Fill material containing large rocks, boulders, or hard lumps (such as hardpan or cemented gravel which cannot be broken readily) over 12 inches in greatest dimension shall not be incorporated in the fill. Such materials shall be removed from the site.

Selected material from the site that meets the requirements for Class C topsoil may be used in landscaped areas in the upper 12 inches of fill or as make-up fill material underneath hardscape paving.

Make-up fill material in landscaped areas shall be Class A topsoil for the upper 12 inches of fill. 300-4.3 Other Fill Materials
Delete this section and add the following:

Excesssoil remaining on the Project Site from excavations otherthan Unclassified Excavation may only be used for fill material when rocks, lumps, cobbles, clods, or other solid materials such as broken concrete or asphalt from removal operations are suitable for the particular area to be filled as determined by the Engineer and in conformance with the requirements of the geotechnical investigation. Broken concrete or asphalt pavement materials shall not be allowed within site fill areas or roadway fills less than three feet (3’) in height, within three feet (3’) of final grade in any area, or within five feet (5’) (vertically) of the existing ground water table. DRAFT 70 Concrete or asphalt placement shall be approved by the Geotechnical Engineer. Concrete or asphalt pieces shall be less than six inches (6”) in maximum dimension and surrounded by soil particles when used as compacted fill. No nesting shall occur. 300-4.4 Benching
Add the following:

Benching and keyways shall be constructed as shown in the Contract Documents. Benching and keyways shall be considered as incidental to Unclassified Fill and no separate payment shall be made therefore.
300-4.5 Placement
Add the following:

The Contractor shall perform grading such that the upper 3’ of fill placed in the roadway right-ofway is composed of properly compacted low expansive soils when available on-site or when specified. The more highly expansive soils shall be placed in the deeper fill areas and/or properly compacted or exported from the site. Low expansive soils are defined as those soils that have an Expansion Index of 50 or less when tested in accordance with 1994 UBC Standard 18-2 as published by the International Conference of Building Officials. Should insufficient soils meeting the requirement of an expansion index of 50 or less be present within the limits of work, soils of the least expansion index that are available within the limits of work shall be incorporated in the upper 3’ of fill placed in the roadway.

Delete the third paragraph and add the following:

No rock or similar irreducible material with a maximum dimension greater than 6 inches shall be buried or placed in fills closer than 10 feet to the finished grade unlessrecommendationsforsuch placement have been submitted by the Soils Engineer in advance and approved by the Engineer.

Rocks shall not be nested but shall be spread with sufficient room between them so that intervening voids can be adequately filled with fine material to form a dense, compact mass.

Oversized material shall be removed from the site by the Contractor. If disposed of within the City of Lake Elsinore, a separate grading permit will be required for disposal ofrock. 300-4.6 Application of Water
Add the following:

The Contractor shall place all fill soil at a moisture content no less than one (1) percent below optimum moisture as determined by ASTM test D-1557-91.
300-4.7 Compaction
Add the following:

The Contractor shall compact all fill soils placed within the top 1’ of roadway subgrade to a minimum of 95 percent relative compaction. DRAFT
71 300-4.8 Slopes
Add the following:

Feathering of fill over the tops of slopes will not be permitted. 300-4.10 Payment
Delete this section and add the following:

Unclassified fill, grading, shaping, compacting or consolidating, moisture conditioning, slope rounding, construction of transitions and all work included in and incidental to Section 300-4, Unclassified Fill, shall be paid for as unclassified excavation, and no additional payment will be made therefore.
300-5 BORROW EXCAVATION
300-5.2 Imported Borrow
Add the following section:
300-5.2.1 Imported Borrow Properties
The Contractor shall provide imported borrow that is clean well graded soil consisting of material conforming to all ofthe requirementsin Table 300-5.2.1(A) and the following requirements. Rock shall not be a component of imported borrow.

TABLE 300-5.2.1(A)

IMPORTED BORROW PROPERTIES
Tests Test Method No. Requirements
R-Value Calif. 301 40 Min.

Expansion Index UBC Standard 18-2 30 Max.

Plasticity Index ASTM D 424 4 Max.

Sieve Analysis ASTM D 422 Percent Passing 75µ (No. 200) DRAFT 15 Max.
72 SECTION 301 SUBGRADE PREPARATION, TREATED MATERIALS, AND PLACEMENT

OF BASE MATERIALS
301-1 SUBGRADE PREPARATION
301-1.2 Preparation of Subgrade
Delete the first sentence of the second paragraph and add the following:

After rough grading has been completed, when scarifying and cultivating are required, the roadbed shall be loosened to a depth of at least 12 inches (305 mm).

Delete the third paragraph and add the following:

Uniform pervious soils, that allow the immediate penetration of water or uniform impervious soils which will allow the penetration of water to a depth of at least 12 inches (305 mm) after the addition of a suitable wetting agent, will not require scarifying and cultivation unless a condition pervious set forth in this section requires such processing. When scarifying and cultivation are not required, the moisture content of the top 12 inches (305 mm) of the subgrade material shall be brought to optimum by the addition of water at the surface, and the material shall be compacted by approved equipment to the specified relative compaction.

Water for use in subgrade preparation shall be potable. Water shall be applied to compact soil, subgrade, base, and surfacing material through the use of a watering truck which shall spray water uniformly. No chemical additives shall be used during the water application process. 301-1.3 Relative Compaction
Delete the first paragraph and add the following:

The Contractor shall compact the upper 12” of subgrade beneath roadways, alleyways, parking lots, other pavement areas under traffic loading, and beneath and including curb to curb to not less than 95 percent maximum dry density as determined by ASTM test D-1557-91, whether pavement is placed directly on subgrade, subbase, or base. The top 12” of all other areas shall be compacted to no lessthan 90 percent maximum dry density as determined by ASTM test D-1557-

91. DRAFT
73 SECTION 302 ROADWAY SURFACING
302-2 CHIP SEAL
302-2.1 General
Add the following:

The Contractor shall treat all vegetation within the limits of the paved area to receive chip seal with a post emergent herbicide. Herbicide shall be applied at least 5 (five) working days prior to chip sealing the street. Allowance for the five-day period shall be shown in the schedule required per Section 6-1, Construction Schedule and Commencement of the Work.

The Contractor shall comply with Section 302-4.7 “Scheduling, Public Convenience and Traffic Control.”
302-2.4 Roadway Surface Preparation
Add to the first paragraph:

All traces of plastic, residual emulsion and chips shall be removed from all personnel covers, drain inlet covers, monument covers, and all other utility covers as quickly as possible, afterthe application of the chip seal and/or prior to final acceptance of the project.

Add to the second paragraph:

When removing the raised pavement markers the Contractor shall remove excessive adhesive left on pavement caused by the removal of raised pavement markers. Removal shall be done to the satisfaction of the Engineer.

Immediately prior to the chip sealing operations, the Contractor shall sweep the entire surface with vacuum assisted power brooms on city streets and kick brooms on county and state highways when approved by the Engineer. Areas that have been patched shall receive a fog seal at the discretion of the Engineer.

Add the following sub-section:
302-2.6.6 Polymer Modified Rejuvenating Emulsion (PMRE) for chip and scrub seals 302-2.6.6.1 General
The work shall consist of but not limited to furnishing all labor, materials, equipment and transportation for the application of the Polymer Modified Rejuvenating Emulsion. Application of aggregate to conform with 302-2 of the standard specifications and these Special Provisions unless otherwise specified herein. The work shall be done in the following order: Preparing the pavement surface; applying the Polymer Modified Asphalt Surface Sealer and scrubbing the applied emulsion sealer with a scrub broom as specified herein; applying aggregate, brooming the aggregate with a secondary broom when specified, rolling the aggregate; and sweeping up DRAFT 74 and disposing of excess aggregate off from the job site. The Polymer Modified Asphalt Rejuvenating Emulsion shall comply with Section 203-3 of these Special Provisions.

The screenings shall conform with section 200-1.2.2 and Section 302-2 of the Standard Specifications
302-2.6.6.2 Pre-Qualification
The Contractor shall: a) have had a minimum of three (3) years experience in the application of the Polymer Modified Rejuvenating Emulsions as applied to scrub-seal; and b) have successfully completed at least three (3) Scrub Seal projects utilizing the scrub-broom to the satisfaction of their clients.
302-2.6.6.3 Equipment
The following equipment to be used for the scrub-seal shall be as follows:

A. An asphalt distributor for application of the emulsion sealer shall have a full circulation spray bar that is adjustable to at least sixteen (16) feet wide in two (2) feet increments and capable of heating and circulating the emulsion simultaneously. It must have computerized rate control for adjusting and controlling the application from the cab that is adjusting by .01 gallons per square yard increments. The distributor shall also be equipped with a volume measuring device and a thermometer for measuring the emulsion temperature in thetank.

B. A SCRUB BROOM as described herein shall be used to scrub the emulsion sealer after application.

C. A self-propelled aggregate spreader with front discharge that can evenly distribute aggregate.

D. A minimum of two (2) pneumatic rollers weighing at least five (5) tons each.

E. Two (2) mechanically powered kick-brooms or vacuum type brooms.

F. A back pack blower for removing excess chips during the sweeping operation. 302-2.6.6.4 Scrub Broom Equipment
The scrub broom frame shall be constructed of metal. The scrub broom shall be attached to and pulled by the distributor truck. The scrub broom must be equipped with the means to mechanically raise and lower the scrub broom off and onto the road surface at designated points of completion and start up. It shall be tow able in the elevated position to the next area of construction. The weight of the broom assembly shall be such that it does not squeegee the emulsion sealer off the roadway surface.

The main body of the scrub broom shall be a minimum of 6’-9” wide and 8’-0” (ft) deep. The maximum width of the rigid frame at any pointshall not exceed 8’-0”. The depth shall not exceed DRAFT 75 10’-0” The nearest and furthest members, paralleling the back of the spreader truck, and diagonal members shall be equipped with street brooms. The leading member and the trailing member shall have broom heads angled at 15 degrees off the centerline of the supporting member. The diagonal members shall have broom heads attached in line with the centerline of the supporting member. Each individualstreet broom attached to the scrub broom assembly shall be 3 ½” w x 6 ½” h x 16” L and have stiff nylon bristles. Bristle height is to be maintained at a minimum of 5”.

The scrub broom shall be equipped with a min. of 2- hinged wing assemblies attached to the main body not to exceed 4’-6” (ft) in total per side, with diagonals and equipped with street brooms.

The purpose of the maximum rigid frame width and the hinged wing extensions is not only for maximum width of 16’ (ft) but to maintain the scrubbing process evenly as contours and crosssections change across the existing road surface.

NOTE: The contractor shall supply a scrub broom as described for the purpose of scrubbing the Polymer Modified Rejuvenating Emulsion. If the Contractor fails to supply the scrub broom specified, the project shall be shut down until the contractor supplies the required equipment in full operation. Shutdowns resulting from the failure to provide this specified scrub broom shall not excuse the Contractor from the provisions of contract working days.

DRAFT
76 DRAFT
77 302-2.6.6.5 Application
All incidental work such as surfacing of driveway aprons and returns shall be done concurrently with the surfacing of the street proper. The scrub seal shall be applied 0”-4” from the lip of the gutter. Where a curb exists without gutter, the scrub seal shall be applied 0”-4” from the face of curb when receiving a cape. If a cape is not specified, then the scrub seal shall be placed from edge of pavement to edge of pavement. Where no curb or gutter exists, the scrub seal shall be applied from edge of pavement to edge of pavement. The edges of the limits of the scrub seal application on both sides of the street shall be maintained in a neat and uniform line. Scrub seal shall not be applied on concrete gutters or pads unless directed by the Engineer.

The application of the Polymer Modified Rejuvenating Emulsion shall be applied when ambient temperature is above forty (40) degrees Fahrenheit and rising. The polymer modified rejuvenating emulsion shall not be placed if the ambient temperature during the twenty-four curing period (24) hours is expected to be below twenty-five (25) degrees Fahrenheit. The termination time of application shall be determined by the Engineer.

The areasto be scrub sealed shall have the Polymer Modified Rejuvenating Emulsion applied with a distributor truck to the pavement surface at a rate of 0.25 to 0.40 gallons per square yard. For cul-de-sacs, turnout pockets, elbows and curve returns the use of the scrub broom will not be required. The actual emulsion sealer application rate required will be determined by the pavement surface condition and aggregate the aggregate used. Recommended application rate ranges for both aggregate and emulsion are shown in Table 302-2.6.2 and Table 302-2.6.4.2 of the Standard Specifications. The actual application of the emulsion sealer shall be determined by the manufacturer’s representative and/or the Engineer.

The Polymer Modified Rejuvenating Emulsion temperature when applied shall be at a minimum of 110 degrees Fahrenheit. For smaller areas the emulsion sealer may be applied with a wand.

The emulsion sealer shall be immediately broomed to fill cracks and voids.

The application of the Polymer Modified Rejuvenating Emulsion and the scrub broom operation shall cease 40’ (ft) prior to the end of the street section or intersection. The remaining emulsion sealer shall be drug out by the scrub broom, and the remaining emulsion sealer required to complete the pass shall be applied only by the spread truck (boot truck), at the specified rate.

Immediately following the scrubbing of emulsion sealer, aggregate shall be applied at the rate specified. The rate shall be adjusted up or down so that no “bleed through” occurs during rolling.

The aggregate shall be spread evenly by a mechanical spreader. Aggregate ¼”X #10 or less shall be broomed with a SECONDARY AGGREGATE BROOM to fill all cracks and voids, unless otherwise directed by the Engineer. The SECONDARY AGGREGATE BROOM when used must be equipped with the means to mechanically raise and lower the broom off and onto the road surface at DRAFT 78 designated points of completion and start up. The design shall be similar in design to that of the emulsion broom. The exception would be that the internal diagonal members shall be used for stiffness and shall not have broom heads attached to the cross members. It shall be pulled by a vehicle following the aggregate spreader to ensure even distribution of the aggregate, and penetration of the aggregate into the cracks. The weight of the broom assembly shall be such that it does not roll or turn the aggregate that is set in the emulsion sealer. The use of the SECONDARY AGGREGATE BROOM can be used immediately after the application of the chips or after rolling. The sequence of operation will be determined by the Engineer. 302-2.7 Finishing
Finishing shall conform with section 302-2.7 of the Standard Specifications and these Special Provisions.

A minimum of two self-propelled pneumatic-tired rollers shall be used for the required rolling of the aggregate. The pneumatic-tired rollersshall be in good working condition and actively rolling at all times during the scrub seal operation. The pneumatic-tired rollers shall be a minimum of 5 tons. The pneumatic-tired rollers shall be operated in such a manner to prevent the dislodging of newly applied aggregate.

Power sweeping shall be done before the end of the day after scrub seal operation to remove any excess loose aggregate. During the sweeping process the Contractor shall use a backpack blower to clear driveways, gutters and sidewalks of excess aggregate at the end of each day until the street is surfaced. The Contractor shall wait a minimum of one day after the scrub seal application before applying other surface treatments as specified.

The Contractorshall exercise care to prevent oil from being deposited on concrete surfaces. Each day the Contractor shall remove oil from the surfaces not designated to caped. No additional streets shall be scrub sealed until this cleanup has been performed. The method of the oil removal shall be approved by the Engineer.

The Contractorshall install temporary raised pavement markers and tabs once the scrub seal is cured until the roadway surface is ready for permanent raised pavement markers and striping. 302-2.11 Payment
Add the following:

Payment for chip seal shall include post emergent herbicide treatment of the areas to receive chip seal and no additional payment will be made, therefore. DRAFT 79 302-3 MICROSURFACING
302-3.8 Scheduling, Public Convenience and Traffic Control Scheduling for Microsurfacing shall conform to Section 302-3.8 of the Standard Specifications and these Special Provisions.

The Contractor shall schedule the work so as to prevent damage by all traffic, including but not limited to, mail delivery and trash pickup. The Contractorshall not schedule work so asto conflict with trash pickup. The Contractor shall obtain the trash pickup schedule and provide its schedule and any modifications thereto to the trash pickup entity. At least two weeks prior to work, the Contractor shall send, by first class mail, notification letters to all property addresses on which sealing will occur and all other property addresses within 500 feet thereof. Obtaining the appropriate addresses shall be the contractor’s responsibility. Notification letters shall be in bold type as follows, with the appropriate information specific to the work inserted at the locations indicated in the brackets and italicized.
(Date)
(Name of Contractor)
(Address of Contractor)
(Contractor’s License Number)
As a part of the City of Lake Elsinore’s ongoing program to maintain its streets, your street will be sealed with a mixture of asphalt and aggregates, beginning in two or three weeks. This process requires that your street be closed for X day(s) starting at 7:00 a.m. to X:XX p.m. and until the Contractor removes the traffic control devices. You will be notified 72 hours in advance of the day your street will be closed by a brightly colored 3 ½” x 8 ½” card attached to your doorknob. You will also notice temporary no parking signs on your street with a specific no parking date written on it.

A successfulstreet maintenance program depends on your cooperation. Please do not drive, walk, play, skate or allow pets on the newly sealed street until all traffic control devices have beenremoved.

Furthermore, please do not wash your car or turn on any sprinklers during the closure period. If you plan to leave your home after 7:00 a.m. on the day your street will be sealed, and you need to use your vehicle later, please park your car on an adjacent street in your neighborhood that is not signed as a no parking zone. When walking to and from your car, remember not to walk on the newly sealed street or you will have black residue on the bottom of your shoes. The residue will damage some surfaces, will mark all surfaces that you track it on, and will be very difficult toremove. (Name of Contractor) is the Contractor that will be performing the resurfacing work for the City and you may call them at (24 hour per day attended telephone number in the 951 area code) for any questions you may have about the project. Sealing of your street will not occur on the day your trash is collected.

On the day yourstreetissealed mail delivery may be delayed until the following day. You will not know DRAFT 80 the exact date your street will be closed until you receive the 3 ½” x 8 ½” card. If you have a moving company scheduled to come to your house within the next two weeks, please call and inform the Contractor of the date. If you have any concerns which are not addressed by the Contractor, please call the City’s Engineering Department at 951-674-3124. They will assist you in resolving the concerns.

During sealing operations, the Contractor’s schedule shall be designed to provide residents and business owners whose streets are to be sealed sufficient paved parking within an 800 foot distance from their homes or businesses.
302-4 SLURRY SEAL SURFACING
302-4.1 General
Add the following:

Slurry Seal shall be emulsion-aggregate slurry (EAS) conforming to 302-4.3, TYPE II, with Carbon Black additive.

Add the following subsection:
302-4.1.1 Rout and Seal Random Cracks
All cracks will be filled with a rubberized asphalt material that has a minimum softening point temperature of 200° Fahrenheit and a safe heating temperature of 380° Fahrenheit, or otherwise directed by the City representative/inspector.

1. For cracks in size of 1/8 inch to 3/8 inch width, the crack shall be widened using a router to form a sealant reservoir which is a minimum of 1/2 inch wide and ¾ inch to 1 inch deep.

The routed crack shall then be cleaned with hot compressed air to remove all dust and moisture, and then sealed to service level.

2. Cracks that are more than 3/8 inch but less than ¾ inch shall be cleaned for the entire crack depth using sandblasting, brushing and hot air blowing techniques, as required to provide a crack free from all debris, dust, loose material, and moisture, The clean crack shall be filled with sealant, from the bottom up to the surface level, in a manner which does not result in sealant bridging or entrapped air pockets. With deep cracks, settlement of sealant may occur, thus requiring application of a second layer of sealant material. For cracks with depressed surfaces on each side of the crack shall be overfilled beyond level with pavement surface and then squeezed to fill in depressed area. No more than 2 inch wide and 1/16” thick strip of material may be applied to the pavement surface. The crack seal for the specified width of 3/8 inch to ¾ inch shall apply to all pavement surfaces receiving slurry seal II treatment with Black Carbon additive.

3. Cracks wider than ¾ inch and potholes shall be cleaned using sandblasting or other cleaning technique approved by the Engineer. The cracks and/or potholes shall then be filled with pea-gravel size hot mix asphalt concrete as directed by the Engineer. Filling cracks and potholes shall apply to all pavement surfaces receiving type II Slurry with Black Carbon DRAFT 81 additive.

4. No Slurry seal material shall be placed until after the crack seal and/or fill material has been in place for a minimum of two (2) calendar days.

Payment:

The Contract Lump Sum price for Rout and Seal Random Cracks/Fill Potholes shall include full compensation for furnishing all labor, materials, tools, equipment and incidentals, including traffic control, required for crack routing, crack cleaning, crack sealing, crack and pothole filling, sweeping and application of herbicide and sealant as directed by the engineer and no additional compensation will be allowed.
302-4.7 Scheduling, Public Convenience and Traffic Control Add the following:

The Contractor shall schedule the work so as to prevent damage by all traffic, including but not limited to, mail delivery and trash pickup. The Contractorshall not schedule work so asto conflict with trash pickup. The Contractorshall obtain the trash pickup schedule and provide its schedule and any modifications thereto to the trash pickup entity. At least two weeks prior to work, the Contractor shall send, by first class mail, notification letters to all property addresses on which sealing will occur and all other property addresses within 500 feet thereof. Obtaining the appropriate addresses shall be the contractor’sresponsibility. Notification letters shall be in bold type as follows, with the appropriate information specific to the work inserted at the locations indicated in the brackets and italicized.
(Name of Contractor)
(Address of Contractor)
(Contractor’s License Number)
(Date)
As a part of the City of Lake Elsinore’s ongoing program to maintain its streets, your street will be sealed with a mixture of asphalt and sand, beginning in two or three weeks. This process requires that your street be closed for X day(s) starting at 7:00 a.m. to X:XX p.m. and until the Contractor removes the traffic control devices. You will be notified 72 hours in advance of the day your street will be closed by a brightly colored 3 ½” x 8 ½” card attached to your doorknob. You will also notice temporary no parking signs on your street with a specific no parking date written on it.

A successfulstreet maintenance program depends on your cooperation. Please do not drive, walk, play, skate or allow pets on the newly sealed street until all traffic control devices have beenremoved.

Furthermore, please do not wash your car or turn on any sprinklers during the closure period. If you plan to leave your home after 7:00 a.m. on the day your street will be sealed, and you need to use your vehicle later, please park your car on an adjacent street in your neighborhood that is not signed as a no parking zone. When walking to and from your car, remember not to walk on the newly sealed street or DRAFT 82 you will have black residue on the bottom of your shoes. The residue will damage some surfaces, will mark all surfaces that you track it on, and will be very difficult to remove. (Name of Contractor) is the Contractor that will be performing the resurfacing work for the City and you may call them at (24 hour per day attended telephone number in the 951 area code) for any questions you may have about the project. Sealing of your street will not occur on the day your trash is collected.

On the day yourstreet issealed mail delivery may be delayed until the following day. You will not know the exact date your street will be closed until you receive the 3 ½” x 8 ½” card. If you have a moving company scheduled to come to your house within the next two weeks, please call and inform the Contractor of the date. If you have any concerns which are not addressed by the Contractor, please call the City’s Engineering Department at 951-674-3124. They will assist you in resolving the concerns.

During sealing operations, the Contractor’s schedule shall be designed to provide residents and business owners whose streets are to be sealed sufficient paved parking within an 800 foot distance from their homes or businesses.
302-4.8.2 Emulsion Aggregate Slurry (EAS)
Add the following section:

As part of surface preparation prior to application of emulsion-slurry seal the Contractor shall:

1. Treat the area to receive emulsion-slurry seal with a post emergent herbicide.

Herbicide shall be applied at least 5 (five) working days prior to sealing of street.

Allowance for the five day period shall be shown in the schedule required per Section 6-1, Construction Schedule and Commencement of the Work.

2. Remediate cracks, potholes, and large areas of alligator cracking. Remediation shall be accomplished by:
a) Removal of existing asphalt pavement, base material and soil and replacement with full depth asphalt concrete in locations designated by the Engineer.
b) Crack cleaning and sealing of all cracks designated by the Engineer. 302-5 ASPHALT CONCRETE PAVEMENT
302-5.1 General
Add the following:

The Contractor shall treat all vegetation within the limits of the paved area to receive asphalt concrete paving with a post emergent herbicide. Herbicide shall be applied at least 5 (five) working days prior to paving the area. Allowance for the five day period shall be shown in the schedule required per section 6-1, Construction Schedule and Commencement of the Work.

The surface course asphalt concrete shall be installed as a last order of work after all concrete improvements and base course asphalt has been installed. DRAFT 83 302-5.4 Tack Coat
Add the following:

The Contractor shall place a tack coat between the interface of existing pavement and new pavement and successive courses when, in the opinion of the engineer, the Contractor has failed to maintain or prepare each previously laid course of asphalt receiving the subsequent course of asphalt in a sufficiently clean state and the asphalt receiving the new pavement course is dirty enough to impair bonding between the next lift of asphalt.

Tack coat for overlay shall be Thermoplastic Polymer Modified High Performance Seal (TPMS) manufactured by Paramount Petroleum Corporation (562-531-2060), for overlay, or an approval equal. The Engineer shall approve the exact rate and number of applications.

The tack coat shall be applied as specified in Subsection 302-5.4 of the Standard Specifications and these Special Provisions. The Engineer will determine if the pavement is sufficiently dry for the application of the tack coat. Tack coat shall not be applied when the temperature of the surface to be tacked is below 50° F in the shade. Whenever pavement surface temperatures exceed 120, a small test section shall be applied approximately 30 feet in length to gauge setup time for the tack to not stick to truck tires. The setup time shall be recorded. Paving, material delivery and tack coat placement must be coordinated and scheduled to provide that tack is setup before placing trucks on the tacked area. Pavement surface temperatures shall be monitored, and additional test sections shall be performed to revise the paving operation as conditions change. Upon occurrence of tracking of tack coat, paving shall cease, except remaining material in the hopper shall be used, and the tack shall be allowed time to setup.

On all vertical joins of AC patching, apply SS-1H tack coat uniformly in two coats of .20 gallons per square yard each with full “break” in between, or .20 gallons per square yard PG 64-10 uniformly in one coat. Tack coat shall not be applied when the temperature of the surface to be backed is below 60° F in the shade.

The TPMS shall be heated slowly to 350-425 F. At no time TPMS shall be heated above 750 F. The product shall be applied through a distributor truck equipped with a heating unit capable of raising temperature at least 3 F per hour, and shall maintain tack coat temperature at or above 350 F. It shall be equipped with a full circulating spreader bar and pumping system capable of applying TPMS material within a +0.01 gallons per square yard tolerance of specified application rate and give uniform covering of the surface to be treated. The distributor shall also include a tachometer, pressure gauge, and volume measuring device and thermometer. The application rates shall be 0.15 gallons per square yard for all ARHM overlay or as otherwise directed by the Engineer.

Tack coat shall not be applied until preparation of the existing surface has been completed and thoroughly cleaned, and then only so far in advance of placing the overlay as permitted by the Engineer. Tack coat shall not be left exposed overnight. Immediately in advance DRAFT 84 of placing the overlay, additional tack coat shall be applied as directed by the Engineer, to areas where the tack coat has been destroyed or otherwise rendered ineffective, and no additional compensation will be allowed for such work.

Paving of overlay shall not proceed until the tack coat has stiffened sufficiently to not stick to truck tires.

Existing concrete curb faces and all concrete not to be overlaid shall be protected against disfigurement from the tack coat. Residue of tack coat material shall be removed from curb faces by sandblasting to return the concrete to its original condition unless otherwise directed by the Engineer.

Excessive tracking of tack coat onto adjacent pavements will require immediate clean-up. If significant amounts of paving asphalt are traced onto existing adjacent pavements, the contractor shall clean it off to the satisfaction of the Engineer or provide a slurry seal to restore the pavement at their own expense.
302-5.5 Distribution and Spreading
Modify as follows:

Add to the fifth paragraph:

Asphalt Concrete pavement sections greater than 4” thick shall be constructed in two lifts or as directed; pavement base course shall be type B-PG64-10 and the final lift (surface layer) shall be C2-PG64-10 with a minimum thickness of 1-1/2 inch and shall not exceed 2-1/2 inch. Spreading, once commenced, shall be placed without interruption. The final or surface layer of asphalt concrete shall not be placed until all on-site improvements have been completed, including all grading.

Add the following:

Contractor shall provide and install header along longitudinal edge of pavement adjacent to natural earth shoulders.

The Contractor shall provide 20-foot long automatic screed control on both sides of the paving machine for all paving with paving machine, as directed by Engineer.

Each paving machine used will require a paving foreman for each machine along with a full set of rollers as specified and two rakers and one shoveler laborer at a minimum. 302-5.6 Rolling
302-5.6.1 General
After last paragraph, add the following:

Unless directed otherwise by the Engineer, the initial breakdown rolling shall be followed by a DRAFT 85 pneumatic-tired roller as described in this section.

Rolling along a joint shall be such that the widest part of the roller is on the hot side of the joint.

Rubber tire rollers shall be used on any leveling course.

Three rollers shall be provided for installation of AC greater than 181 tonne (200 tons) per hour, regardless of thickness.

Construction of hot mix asphalt concrete shall conform to Section 302-5 “Asphalt Concrete Pavement” of the Standard Specifications, except as modified herein.

Should the methods and equipment furnished by the Contractor fail to produce a layer of asphalt concrete conforming to the requirements, including straightedge tolerance, of Subsection 302-

5.6.2, "Density and Smoothness," of the Standard Specifications, the paving operation shall be discontinued, and the Contractor shall modify his equipment or furnish substitute equipment.

A drop-off of more than 0.15 ft will not be allowed at any time between adjacent lanes open to public traffic.

The Contractor shall furnish a sufficient number of rollers to obtain the specified compaction and surface finish required by the Standard Specifications and these Special Provisions.

Pneumatic rollers shall be required on the lower layer only.

Initial breakdown compaction shall consist of a minimum of three (3) coverages of a layer of asphalt mixture. A pass shall be a movement of rolling in both directions over the same path.

Coverage shall consist of as many passes as are necessary to cover the entire width being paved.

Overlap between passes during coverage, made to ensure compaction without displacement of material in accordance with good rolling practice, shall be considered to be part of the coverage being made and not part of a subsequent coverage.

Each coverage shall be completed before subsequent coverages are started. 302-5.6.2 Density and Smoothness
Add the following to the first paragraph:

The completed surfacing shall be thoroughly compacted, smooth and free from ruts, humps, depressions or irregularities. Any ridges, indentations or other objectionable marks left in the surface of the asphalt concrete shall be eliminated by rolling or other means. The use of any equipment that leaves humps, ridges, irregularities, indentations or other objectionable marks in the asphalt concrete shall be discontinued, and acceptable equipment shall be furnished by the Contractor. DRAFT
86 The transverse slope of the finished surface shall be uniform to a degree such that no depressions greater than 0.01 ft. are present when tested with a straightedge 10 feet long, laid in a direction transverse to the center line.

If the test results for any lot of asphalt concrete indicate that the relative compaction is below 95.0 percent (95%), the Contractor will be advised that he is not attaining the required relative compaction and that his materials, procedures, or both, need adjustment. Asphalt concrete spreading operations shall not continue until the Contractor has notified the Engineer of the adjustment that will be made in order to meet the required compaction. 302-5.7 Joints
Add the following:

Before placing the top layer adjacent to cold transverse construction joints, the joints shall be trimmed to a vertical face and to a neat line. Longitudinal joints shall be trimmed to a vertical face and to a neat line if the edges of the previously laid surfacing are, in the opinion of the Engineer, in such a condition that the quality of the completed joint will be affected. Longitudinal and transverse joints shall be tested with a 10-foot straightedge and shall be cut back as required to conform to the provisions in Subsection 302-5.6.2, “Density and Smoothness,” for surface smoothness. Connections to existing surfacing shall be feathered to conform to the provisions for smoothness.

Longitudinal joints in the top layer shall correspond with the edges of proposed traffic lanes (striping). Longitudinal joints in all other layers shall be offset not less than 0.5 foot alternately each side of the edges of traffic lanes.

All feathered joints shall be sealed after rolling.

During asphalt concrete paving operations, it shall be the Contractor’s responsibility to place protective covering over, or to otherwise avoid paving over survey markers, monuments, and benchmarks, and to remove said covering and/or asphalt concrete after paving operations have been completed.

Join lines between successive runs shall be within 6 inches of lane lines or center of street or a minimum of 14 feet outside of the outer most lane line or center of street, or 5 to 6 feet from a lane line or center of street and within a lane. The joint pattern for all pavement layers shall be submitted in writing to the Engineer for review and approval 2 weeks in advance of the first lift of pavement to be placed. No exceptions to the specified requirements for joints shall be anticipated, and the Engineer’s decision shall be final. 302-5.9 Measurement and Payment
Add the following:

DRAFT
87 Payment for Asphalt Concrete shall be made at the price bid per ton and shall include full compensation for furnishing all labor, materials, equipment, and incidentals necessary to perform the work.

Payment for tack coat shall be included in the price bid for Asphalt Concrete for which tack coat is required and no additional payment shall be allowed therefore. 302-7 PAVEMENT FABRIC
302-7.1 General
Add the following:

Pavement reinforcing shall be placed to the limits approved by the Engineer. 302-7.2.3 Laydown
Add the following:

The fabric shall be stretched, aligned, and placed without any wrinkles that lap. The test for lapping shall be made by gathering together the fabric in a wrinkle. If the height of the double portion of extra fabric is 1/2” or more, the fabric shall be cut to remove the wrinkle, and then lapping in the direction of paving. Lap in excess of 2” shall be removed.

Delete the second sentence of the eighth paragraph and add the following:

If necessary, exposed tack coat on top of fabric shall be covered lightly with sand. 302-9 ASPHALT RUBBER HOT MIX (ARHM)
302-9.1 General
Replace the entire subsection with the following:

ARHM shall conform to 203-11. Unless otherwise shown on the Plans, ARHM shall be Class ARHM-GG-C.

The Contractor shall schedule the paving work such that no longitudinal drop-offs on the pavement will remain overnight in the travelled way. Any transverse drop-offs on the pavement over 1 inch in height that will remain overnight shall be ramped with temporary AC pavement. [Include the following if the Work includes full-width cold milling and placement of ARHM directly over the cold milled surface, not on an ARAM:] Roadways to receive full-width cold milling shall be resurfaced within 24 hours of cold milling any portion of the Work.
[End inclusion.]
[Include the following if the Work includes placement of ARHM over an ARAM:] DRAFT 88 ARHM shall be placed within 48 hours of the completion of placement of the asphalt rubber and aggregate membrane (ARAM).
[End inclusion.]
302-9.3 Distribution and Spreading
Replace the second sentence with the following:

Asphalt rubber hot mix shall not be placed until the atmospheric temperature is a minimum of 55 degrees F and rising, and the surface temperature of the underlying material is a minimum of 55 degrees F, or during unsuitable weather.

Add the following:

The spreading and finishing machine shall be equipped with a fully automatic screed control system which shall be in operation at all times. The system shall be either a contact (skid) or noncontact (sonic averaging) system. The skid shall be a minimum of 30-feet long, mounted on the side of the spreading and finishing machine which will receive the next mat of material, and be placed in contact with the pavement surface.

The sonic averaging system shall have a ski, a minimum of 24 feet long, mounted on the side of the spreading and finishing machine which will receive the next mat of material. A joint maker placed on the side of the spreading and finishing machine to ride on the existing or previously constructed surface or mat of material may be required as directed by the Engineer. 302-9.5 Joints
Add the following:

Longitudinal joints shall coincide with traffic lane lines unless otherwise approved by the Engineer.
302-9.6 Manholes (and Other Structures)
Add the following:

Survey monuments shall be protected in place. The Contractor shall locate all survey monuments within the project area prior to the start of the Work. During the progress of the Work, cold millings, hot or cold mix asphalt concrete materials, and other debris shall not damage or cover the survey monuments. Damaged survey monuments shall be replaced at the contractor’s expense. Should the survey monuments be damaged, the Contractor shall notify the Engineer prior to replacing. DRAFT
89 SECTION 303 CONCRETE AND MASONRY CONSTRUCTION
303-1 CONCRETE STRUCTURES
303-1.1 General
Add the following:

Where the Plans refer to the Standard Drawings or Standard Plans for construction details for concrete structures or elements and the primary dimensional requirements (such as chamber length, width, depth, etc.) are not shown in said Standard Drawings or Plans, then the next larger size dimension for that requirement shall be used to establish dependent structure element characteristics (such as wall thickness, reinforcement schedule, etc.).

The Contractor may extend or otherwise increase the total length of inlet, basin or cleanout structures by as much as a total of four feet (4'), to meet the uncut ends of pipe. Payment for pipe to the limits shown on the Plans shall be full compensation for extending such structures.

Where concrete structures are extended, steel reinforcing shall be extended in the pattern and spacing shown for the standard length structure.

Concrete brow ditches, if air-placed, shall be constructed in accordance with Section 303-2, Air Placed Concrete, of the Standard Specifications, and these Special Provisions. Otherwise, brow ditch construction and materials shall conform to the applicable provisions of Section 303-1, Concrete Structures.
303-1.2 Subgrade for Concrete Structures
Add the following section:
303-1.2.1 Reinforced Concrete Box Subgrade
The design details for the project provide for the placement of six-mil polyethylene sheeting as an underlayer below the RCB culvert and transition structures and over the gravel foundation mattress. The Contractor shall furnish and place six-mil polyethylene sheeting as an underlayer below these reinforced concrete structures. The placing of steel reinforcement and placement of concrete shall be accomplished as soon after the installation of the polyethylene sheeting as possible.

Add the following section:
303-1.2.2 Reinforced Concrete Box Gravel Foundation Mattress Gravel foundation mattress under the reinforced concrete box (RCB) culverts and reinforced concrete box (RCB) transition structures shall be constructed to the limits and grades shown on the Plans and in accordance with these Special Provisions.

It is the intent of these specifications that a firm, unyielding gravel mattress or layer be constructed to help bridge any earthen subgrade irregularities or minor differential settlements and to act as a stable working surface for the placement of reinforcing steel and concrete forms DRAFT 90 for the construction of RCB culverts and transition structures.

Permeable material for use as gravel foundation mattress under RCB and transition structures shall consist of hard, durable, clean sand, gravel, or crushed stone; and shall be free of organic material, clay balls, or other deleterious substances. Permeable material shall conform to the gradation requirements for Class 1, Type B permeable material specified in Section 200-3.2, “Permeable Material”, of these Special Provisions.

The Contractor shall place permeable material for foundation mattress within the limits and to the lines and grades shown on the Plan. Permeable material shall be placed directly on prepared subgrade unless filter fabric material is specified or shown on the Plans. The finish subgrade surface of the pervious mattress material shall be held to the closest practicable tolerance, and in no case shall the finish subgrade surface deviate from the indicated slope and grade lines by greater than plus zero inches (0”) above or minus two inches (-2”) below.

Permeable mattress material shall be spread uniformly on the prepared subgrade to the neat linesindicated on the drawingsin such a mannerthat the gradation afterfinal placement remains within the limits specified. Placing of material by methods which will tend to segregate particle size within the mattress layer will not be permitted.

Permeable material shall be deposited and spread in a manner so as to prevent damage to or displacement of the filter fabric subgrade cover below.

Imported permeable materialshall be placed on the subgrade as uniform mixtures and each layer shall be spread in one operation. Segregation shall be avoided, and the layer shall be free from pockets of coarse or fine material.

Permeable material shall be deposited at a uniform quantity per linear foot, which quantity will provide the required compacted thickness within the tolerances specified herein without resorting to spotting, picking up, or otherwise shifting the gravel material.

Where the required thickness is twelve inches (12”) or less, the gravel mattress material may be spread and compacted in one layer. Where the required thickness is more than twelve inches (12”), the permeable material shall be spread and compacted in two or more layers of approximately equal thickness, and the maximum compacted thickness of any one layer shall not exceed twelve inches (12”). Each layer shall be spread and compacted in a similarmanner.

The use of motor graders will be permitted during depositing, spreading, and compacting operations.

DRAFT
91 Rolling for compaction shall always be commenced along the edge of the area to be compacted and the roller shall gradually advance toward the center of the area to be compacted. Rollers shall be operated along lines parallel or concentric with the centerline of the road being constructed, and no material variation there from will be permitted. All rollers must be maintained in good mechanical condition.

During and after placement and compaction of the permeable mattress material, the surface shall be protected from damage, erosion, or movement by flowing water or mechanical injury.

Add the following section:
303-1.2.3 Reinforced Concrete Box Subdrain and Back drain Systems Sidewall back drain systems along reinforced concrete box (RCB) culverts and transition structures shall be constructed to the limits and grades and per the details shown on the Plans and in accordance with these Special Provisions.

Each pipe shall be carefully inspected immediately before it is laid, and any that are damaged or defective shall not be used. The pipe shall be placed on the bedding surface that is accurately shaped to conform to the lower ¼ of the outside portion of the pipe. Perforated pipe shall have two rows of perforations of one-half inch diameter (1/2” Φ) holes at five inches (5”) on center, with rows separated by 120 degrees (120°) of arc centered at the pipe bottom. Pipe shall be laid to the grades and alignment indicated or as directed. Pipe laying shall proceed upgrade from the lower end of the pipeline. Pipe grade shall be maintained within ¼ inch in 10 feet of that indicated. Upon completion of backfill, the area shall be suitable for placement of concrete invert or fill as applicable.

The Contractor shall flush the sidewall back drain system with sufficient water to develop a flow of at least five cubic feet per minute (5 cfm) out of the end of the length of pipe being tested, as measured by approved measuring equipment furnished by the Contractor. Tests shall be conducted in the presence of the Engineer.

Two separate tests to demonstrate the proper functioning of the sidewall back drain collector lines shall be made by the Contractor. The first test of each completed section of the new back drain system shall be made immediately prior to placing concrete invert. Both tests shall conform to the above requirements. Final acceptance will be made only if the discharge is free and of adequate quantity. Any necessary clearing of drain lines shall be performed at no additional cost to the Agency.

Add the following section:
303-1.2.4 Reinforced Concrete Box Subdrain and Back Drain Pipe Materials Pipe for weep holes and back drain collector pipes shall be smooth-wall polyvinyl chloride (PVC). DRAFT 92 Perforated pipe materials specified above for the back drain system shall conform to the requirements of Sections 68-1.02 and 68-2.02 of the State Standard Specifications and as specified herein.

Standard for pipe diameter requirement shall be deleted from Section 68-2.02 of the State Standard Specifications and as specified herein. PVC pipe shall be smooth-wall type; no corrugated pipe shall be allowed.

Cast iron pipe and fittings for back drain outlet shall be service weight and shall conform to the requirements of ASTM A74.

Add the following section:
303-1.2.5 Reinforced Concrete Box Back Drain Permeable Material Permeable material for sidewall back drains shall be Class 2 permeable material per Section 200- 3.3, Permeable Material, of these Special Provisions.

Add the following section:
303-1.2.6 Reinforced Concrete Box Filter Fabric/Composite Drain Filter fabric shall be in accordance with Section 213-5, “Geosynthetics and Geogrids”, of these Special Provisions.

Composite drain material on the sidewalls of the culverts shall be installed at the locations indicated on the project plans. Drain materialshall be Miradrain G100N, J-Drain 300, or approved equivalent drainage system installed in accordance with the recommendations of the manufacturer. The composite drain material shall have a minimum compressive strength of 20,000 pounds per square foot (20,000 psf), a minimum flow rate of seven gallons per minute per foot (7 gpmpf), and the filter fabric shall have a minimum grab tensile strength of 90 pounds.

The fabric side of the composite drain shall be placed toward the soil.

Add the following section:
303-1.2.7 Reinforced Concrete Retaining Wall Foundation Foundation soil shall be excavated as required to the depths and locations shown on the Plans or as directed by the Engineer. The exposed foundation soil shall be observed by the geotechnical engineer prior to construction to verify that the exposed material is suitable for the design bearing pressure and that the base of the excavation is free of loose soil, uncompacted fill, or water. The Contractor shall undercut any unsuitable soil when directed by the Engineer.

Undercut areas shall be filled with crushed gravel or granular native soil when required by the DRAFT 93 geotechnical engineer and compacted to at least 90% of the material’s maximum dry density (per ASTM D1557).

Add the following section:
303-1.2.8 Reinforced Concrete Retaining Wall Backfill
Wall backfill material shall be placed in maximum eight inch (8”) loose lifts and compacted to at least 90% of the material’s maximum dry density as determined by ASTM D1557. Backfill shall be placed, spread, and compacted in such a manner that minimizes disturbance to the wall backdrain and drainpipe. The soil shall be sloped during construction in such a manner to drain all water away from the wall.

Construction equipment shall be operated in such a way so as not to damage the wall drain and drainpipe system.

Wall backfill soil shall have the following properties:
• Soil friction angle shall be greater than or equal to 33 degrees. • Expansion index less than or equal to 50 (per UBC Standard 18-2). • Maximum particle size = 2 inches.

On-site soils meeting the above criteria may have to be processed or selectively graded, or soils may need to be imported onto the site to meet this specification. 303-1.3 Forms
Add the following:

Forms shall be braced to withstand the pressures developed and shall be tight to prevent loss of mortar. Tangent sections for formed wall surfaces shall result in concrete surface free of any unevenness greater than quarter-inch (1/4”) when checked with a ten-foot (10’)straightedge.

Forms for covered conduit or open channel curved sections shall be constructed along the arc of the curve. The finished surface shall follow the arc of the curve.

If permitted by the Engineer, covered conduit curved section may use chord panel length not to exceed eight feet (8’). Ends of the chord panel shall be on the arc of the curve.

Reinforcing steel shall be billet steel conforming to ASTM A615 and of the grade shown. 303-1.6 Falsework
303-1.6.2 Falsework Design
Add the following:

The Contractor shall provide all temporary bracing necessary to withstand all imposed loads DRAFT 94 during erection, construction, and removal of any falsework. The Contractor shall provide falsework drawings and calculations prepared by a registered professional engineer, civil or structural, that show provisions for resolution of all loads that may be imposed upon the falsework. Such plans and calculations shall include:

1. Resolution of all live, dead, wind, construction and impact loads that may be imposed on the falsework.

2. Temporary bracing or methods to be used during each phase of erection and removal of the falsework.

3. Concrete placement sequence.

4. Erection and removal sequence.

5. Deflection values for the falsework that include recommended methods to compensate for falsework deflections, vertical alignment, and anticipated falsework deflection. 303-1.7 Placing Reinforcement
303-1.7.1 General
Add the following:

Aluminum and plastic support for reinforcement shall not be used.

Bars shall be accurately spaced as shown on the Plans and spacing of the first bar immediately adjacent to a transverse construction joint shall be one-half the required spacing shown on the Plans. In no case shall the clear distance between parallel bars be less than 2 ½ diameters of the bar or a minimum of two inches (2”).

Unless otherwise shown on the plans, embedment of reinforcing steel (other than stirrups and spacers) shall be 1 ½ inches clear depth for #8 bars and smaller and shall be 2 inches clear for #9 bars and larger. Where placement of reinforcing steel requires alternate bars of different size, embedment requirements shall be governed by the larger bar. Stirrups and spacers shall be embedded not less than one-inch clear depth. Measurement of embedment shall be from the outside of the bar to the nearest concrete face.

Tack welding on reinforcing bars will not be permitted. 303-1.7.2 Splicing
Add the following:

Splicing of reinforcing barsshall be either by lapping, butt welding, or by mechanical buttsplicing, at the option of the Contractor.

Reinforcing bars may be continuous at locations where splices are shown on the Plans, at the option of the Contractor. The location of splices, except where shown on the Plans, shall be determined by the Contractor as approved by the Engineer, based upon using available commercial lengths where practicable. DRAFT
95 Unless otherwise shown on the Plans or approved by the Engineer,splices in adjacent reinforcing bars shall be staggered. The minimum distance between staggered splices for reinforcing bars No. 11 or small shall be the length required for a lapped splice in the bar.

Completed welded butt splices and mechanical butt splices shall develop not less than ninety percent (90 %) of the specified minimum ultimate tensile strength of the un-spliced reinforcing bar.

The deviation in alignment of reinforcing bars at a welded or mechanical splice shall not be more than ¼-inch over a 3 ½ foot length of bar.

Prior to use in the work, welded butt splices and mechanical butt splices shall be qualified by tests made on sample splices.

During the progress of the work, in addition to inspection and non-destructive testing performed by the Engineer on all types of butt splices, job control tests shall be made on sample splices representing each lot of mechanical butt splices. Sample splices for qualification and job control tests shall be tested for compliance with all specified requirements for splices.

All such sample splices shall be fabricated and tested by the Contractor at its cost and a copy of the test results furnished to the Engineer.

Splices shall consist of placing the reinforcing bars in contact and wiring them together in such a manner as to maintain the alignment of the bars and to provide minimum clearances.

No lapped splices will be permitted at locations where the concrete section is not sufficient to provide a minimum clear distance of two inches (2”) between the splice and the nearest adjacent bar. The clearance to the surface of the concrete shall not be reduced.

The length of lapped splicesshall be asfollows: Reinforcing bars No. 8, orsmaller,shall be lapped at least 45 diameters of the smaller bar joined, and reinforcing bars Nos. 9, 10, and 11 shall be lapped at least 60 diameters of the smaller bar joined, except when otherwise shown on the Plans.

Splices of tensile reinforcement at points of maximum stress shall be avoided; however, any deviation from splices shown on the Plans shall be approved by the Engineer. Splices in longitudinal steel shall be staggered at least the length of the splice. 303-1.8 Placing Concrete
Add the following:

When concrete is to be deposited in a member less than 16 inches in width, the use of double belting to preventsegregation of the concrete shall be permitted, in lieu of pipes ortremies. Each belt shall extend equidistant into the forms to a point where concrete shall not fall more than six feet (6’). When placed in the forms, the belts shall be aligned directly opposite eachother. DRAFT 96 303-1.8.6 Joints
Add the following:

Unless otherwise specified, transverse construction joints shall be placed in all reinforced sections at intervals of not less than ten feet (10’) or more than fifty feet (50’). The joints shall be in the same plane for the entire structure, and for concrete thickness greater than six inches (6”) shall be keyed as directed by the Engineer.

Construction of all reinforced concrete sections (including inverts) shall be by the alternate panel method, and no continuous placement through joints will be permitted. After placement of all concrete in a panel orsection on one side of the joint has been completed, placement of concrete on the other side of the joint shall be delayed as directed by the Engineer; but in no event shall the delay be less than eight (8) hours.
303-1.9 Surface Finishes
303-1.9.1 General
Add the following:

The longitudinal and transverse channel invert elevation shall not vary from true line and grade more than ½ inch. The unevenness shall not be more than ¼ inch when checked with a ten-foot (10’) straightedge.

Top of channel wall and channel side slope elevation shall not vary from true line and grade more than ½ inch. Unevenness shall not be more than ½ inch when checked with a ten-foot (10’) straightedge.

Any surfaces which fail to conform to the above tolerances shall be ground in accordance with the best standard practice until the tolerances are met. Grinding shall not reduce the concrete cover on reinforcing steel to lessthan 1-1/2 inches. Portions of inverts which cannot be corrected satisfactorily by grinding shall be removed and replaced.

Except as specified above, vertical or horizontal position of structures as shown on the Plans or as specified in these specifications, shall not vary more than ½ inch from true position. Elevation at inlet lips shall not vary more than ¼ inch from elevations shown on the Plans.

The ten-foot (10’) straightedge or template shall be furnished by the Contractor and shall be readily available prior to placing of concrete.
303-1.9.2 Ordinary Surface Finish
Add the following:

Ordinary surface finish shall not apply to rock pockets which, in the opinion of the Engineer, are of such an extent or character as to affect the strength of the structure materially or to endanger the life of the steel reinforcement. In such cases, the Engineer may declare the concrete DRAFT 97 defective and require the removal and replacement of the portions of the structureaffected.

Add the following section:
303-1.9.5 Surface Finish for Concrete Spillway
The Contractor shall provide a surface finish for concrete spillway to prevent the use of rollerblades, skateboards, and other rolling devices. Surface finish shall be a rough finish approved by the Engineer.
303-1.10 Curing
Add the following:

Where the curing compound method is used on concrete surfaces exposed after construction, the invert surface shall be sealed with a Type 1 chlorinated rubber base compound, and the wall surfaces shall be sealed with a Type 1 wax base compound. 303-1.12 Payment
Add the following:

Full compensation for this work shall be paid at the lump sum or unit prices bid for various concrete construction and appurtenant items or shall be considered as included in the Contract price for other items of work.

The unit or lump sum price paid for the various concrete structures shall be considered as including the furnishing and installation of all concrete, reinforcing steel, forming, finishing, form removal, miscellaneous metal, gratings, frames and covers, excavating, backfilling, compaction, making connection of pipes, chain, access steps, ladders, plates, hardware, concrete bases, supporting utilities, weep holes and back drains, and providing all labor, equipment, materials, and tools necessary to provide the structure complete in place.

Payment for curb inlets, curb outlets, catch basins, clean-outs, pipe collars and manholes shall be at the contract unit price per each.

Payment for concrete brow ditch shall be at the contract unit price per lineal foot complete in place.

Payment for concrete encasement or backfill of structures shall be considered as included in the contract price(s) paid for various types of pipe as specified elsewhere in these Special Provisions.

Add the following section:
303-1.12.1 Reinforced Concrete Box Payment
Payment for reinforced concrete box (RCB) culvert and transition structures shall be at the Contract lump sum or unit price bid. Such payment shall be considered as full compensation for the furnishing of all labor, material, tools, equipment, and for performing of all work necessary for the construction of RCB culverts, complete, and in place including, but not limited to, DRAFT 98 structural excavation, removal of portions of existing culverts and connecting thereto, forming, joints, joint material, finishing, Portland cement concrete, reinforcing steel; weepholes, permeable mattress and backdrain material, subdrain & backdrain systems, inlet pipe connections, access manholes, flab gates, variable-width common walls, interior wall hydraulic window openings, parapet walls, cut-off walls, wing walls, polyethylene subgrade cover; temporary utility support; phased construction requirements, integral utility crossing structures or sleeves, and backfill.

All costs involved in the construction of windows for box conduits shall be included in the price bid for the applicable RCB item. For purposes of payment, no additions or deductions in box quantities will be made for windows.

Add the following section:
303-1.12.2 Reinforced Concrete Retaining Wall Payment
Payment for reinforced concrete retaining wallsshall be made at the lump sum or unit prices bid.

Such payment shall be considered as full compensation for the furnishing of all labor, materials, tools, equipment and for performing all work necessary for the construction of the Project Site retaining walls, complete, and in place including, but not limited to, structural excavation, forming, joints, joint material, reinforcing steel, weep holes, Portland cement concrete, finishing, waterproofing, installation of wall back drain system and connections to the storm drain system, backfill, and spoils disposal.
303-4 MASONRY CONSTRUCTION
303-4.1 Concrete Block Masonry
303-4.1.2 Construction
Add the following section:
303-4.1.2.1 Masonry Retaining Wall Foundation
Foundation soil shall be excavated as required to the depths and locations shown on the Plans or as directed by the Engineer. The exposed foundation soil shall be observed by the geotechnical engineer prior to construction to verify that the exposed material is suitable for the design bearing pressure and that the base of the excavation is free of loose soil, uncompacted fill, or water. The Contractor shall undercut any unsuitable soil when directed by the Engineer.

Undercut areas shall be filled with crushed gravel or granular native soil when required by the geotechnical engineer and compacted to at least 90% of the material’s maximum dry density (per ASTM D1557).

Add the following section:
303-4.1.2.2 Masonry Retaining Wall Backfill
Wall backfill material shall be placed in maximum eight inch (8”) loose lifts and compacted to at least 90% of the material’s maximum dry density as determined by ASTM D1557. Backfill shall be placed, spread, and compacted in such a manner that minimizes disturbance to the wall DRAFT 99 back drain and drainpipe. The soil shall be sloped during construction in such a manner to drain all water away from the wall.

Construction equipment shall be operated in such a way so as not to damage the wall drain and drainpipe system.

Wall backfill soil shall have the following properties:
• The soil friction angle shall be greater than or equal to 33 degrees. • Expansion index less than or equal to 50 (per UBC Standard 18-2). • Maximum particle size = 2 inches.

On-site soils meeting the above criteria may have to be processed or selectively graded, or soils may need to be imported onto the site to meet this specification. 303-4.1.5 Measurement and Payment
Add the following section:
303-4.1.5.1 Masonry Retaining Wall Measurement and Payment Payment for masonry retaining walls shall be made at the lump sum or unit prices bid. Such payment shall be considered as full compensation for the furnishing of all labor, materials, tools, equipment and for performing all work necessary for the construction of the Project Site retaining walls, complete, and in place including, but not limited to, structural excavation, joints, joint material, reinforcing steel, weep holes, Portland cement concrete, finishing, waterproofing, installation of wall back drain system and connections to the storm drain system, backfill, and spoils disposal.

When paid by the square foot the quantity measurement shall be the length of the wall by the height of the wall from top of footing to top of wall.
303-5 CONCRETE CURBS, WALKS, GUTTERS, CROSS GUTTERS, ALLEY INTERSECTIONS, ACCESS

RAMPS, AND DRIVEWAYS
303-5.1 Requirements
303-5.1.1 General
After the second sentence of the first paragraph, add the following:

Delete the Class “B” mortar coat should curb be placed by extrusion machine and concrete mix is approved by the Engineer. All concrete shall be class 560-C-3250 unless otherwise specified on the plans.

Delete the first sentence of the second paragraph and add the following:

Unless otherwise specified on the Plans, and except as otherwise prescribed in 303-5.1.3, Driveway Entrances, the minimum thickness of walks shall be 4 inches (101.6 mm). Prior to DRAFT 100
placing concrete on subgrade, the existing grade shall be in a moistened condition to obtain optimum moisture content, and recompacted as determined by ASTM D1557-78.

Add the following:

When removals of curb and/or sidewalk are located at curb return, the Contractor shall install access ramps. The Contractor is to construct all access ramps in accordance with American Disability Act (ADA) Standards/California Code of Regulations Title 24 – Accessibility Regulations. If the ramps constructed by the Contractor are found to be in non-compliance with ADA Standards, the Contractor will be required to remove and replace the ramps to ADA Standards at the Contractor's expense.

All removed curb and gutter, cross gutters, spandrels, driveway approaches, and sidewalks shall be replaced within three (3) calendar days, unless the Contractor provides reasonable documentation to exceed the three (3) day limit five (5) working days before removal and approved in writing by the Engineer. The Asphalt Concrete patch shall be placed within five (5) working days after the curb and gutters are replaced, and seven (7) days after the cross gutter and spandrels are replaced.

No PCC shall be ordered and/or placed until the forms and subgrade have been inspected and approved by the Engineer in the field.

All pull boxes, water meter boxes, and water valve covers shall be adjusted to the proposed finish grade and approved by the Engineer in the field prior to placement of the PCC. 303-5.1.2 Drainage Outlets Through Curb
Add to the first paragraph with the following:

Coring shall be required for all drains through existing curbs. 303-5.4.3 Weakened Plane Joints
Add the following:

All weakened plane joints shall be spaced at a maximum of 10 feet for curbs, gutters, and sidewalks.

Scoring lines shall conform to those prevailing in the area and be uniform in spacing. 303-5.5 Finishing
303-5.5.2 Curb
Add the following:

The Contractor shall stamp the curb face with 3” high block letters directly above the point that it is crossed by underground facilities with the marking specified in Table 303-5.5.2(A) DRAFT 101
TABLE 303-5.5.2(A)

CURB FACE MARKINGS
Type of underground facilities Marking
Water Service Lateral W
Sewer Service Lateral S
Irrigation/Reclaimed Water Lateral or Sleeve RW
Gas Service Lateral G
Delete the last sentence of second paragraph and add the following:

The name of the Contractor and the year in which the improvement is constructed shall not be stamped in the completed work.

Delete the first sentence in Paragraph 1 and add the following:

The curb and gutter surface shall not vary more than 0.01 ft. from 10 ft. straightedge except at the grade changes. Prior to the removal of the forms, the surface shall be finished true to grade by means of a straightedge float of not less than 10 ft. in length and operated longitudinally over the surface of the concrete. Form clamps shall be constructed as not to interfere with the operation of the float. The form on the front of the curbs shall not be removed less than one (1) hour, or more than six (6) hours after the concrete has been placed. In no event shall forms be removed while the concrete is sufficiently plastic to slump. The top and face of the finished curb shall be true and straight and top surface of curbs shall be of uniform width, free from humps, sags, blemishes or other irregularities.
303-5.5.3 Walk
Add the following:

The sidewalk surface shall not vary more than 0.02' from the 10' straightedge except at grade changes, and the finished surface shall be free from humps, sags, blemishes or other irregularities. All sidewalks shall be a minimum of 4" thick, except at driveways where the sidewalks shall be a minimum of 6" thick for single family residential areas and 8" thick for all other areas.

Construction of concrete sidewalk shall conform to City of Lake Elsinore Standard Drawing No. 210 for Standard Curb Sidewalk and No. 211 for Non-contiguous Sidewalk. Sidewalk shall be constructed to the dimensions as specified in the City’s Standard Drawing and as shown on the Plans, but application details and other specifications not explicitly stated or shown in the City’s Standard Drawing shall conform to Section 303-5 of the Standard Specifications. Portland cement concrete material shall be Portland Cement Concrete of type 560-C-3250.

Certain segments of existing concrete curb may have broken or are out of alignment. Where any segment of existing concrete curb is broken and/or misaligned by more than one inch (1”), the broken or misaligned curb shall be removed and replaced with new concrete curb. A concrete sidewalk shall be constructed adjacent to curb that makes for a smooth flush surface. DRAFT 102
The Contractor is responsible for protecting all new Portland cement concrete construction from vandalism. All construction of Portland cement concrete shall be conducted under direct supervision of the Contractor’s staff and shall be monitored until the work has adequately cured and is not susceptible to damage from vandalism. Any vandalism identified on new concrete construction shall be removed and replaced by the Contractor, as required and directed by the Engineer, at no additional cost to the City.
303-5.6 Curing
Delete first paragraph and add the following:

Immediately afterfinishing operations are completed, Type 2 concrete curing compound shall be applied at a rate of one gallon per 150 square feet.
303-5.9 Measurement and Payment
Add the following:

Payment for concrete Curb and Gutter or Curb only shall be made at the price bid per linear foot, including transition sections where the curb face height varies (such as at pedestrian ramps, curb inlets, cross gutters and other depressions). Payment for concrete Sidewalk, Driveway, and Cross Gutter shall be at the unit prices bid per square foot, including transition sections where the concrete thickness varies (such as at the wings of driveways).

Payment for curb inlet transitions on each side of curb inlets shall be made at the unit price bid for Curb and Gutter and no additional payment shall be made therefore.

DRAFT
103
SECTION 304 METAL FABRICATION AND CONSTRUCTION
304-3 CHAIN LINK FENCE
304-3.1 General
Add the following:

The work includesinstallation of new chain link fencing and gates and the removal and relocation of existing chain link fencing as shown on the Plans.
304-3.2 Fence Construction
Add the following:

New fence construction includes both hole-dug ground surface installations and embedded-pole, structure-mounted installations (such as on parapets, wing walls, headwalls, retaining walls, and channel lining stiffeningbeams). Unless otherwise specified, materials and construction of chain link fencing and gates shall conform to Sections 206-6, Chain Link Fence, and 304-3, Chain Link Fence, of the Standard Specifications, the Plans, the Standard Drawings, and as provided herein.

Where so specified or shown on the Plans, chain link fence materials and construction shall conform to Section 80-3, Chain Link Fence, of the State Standard Specifications, the Standard Plans, and as provided herein.
304-3.3 Installation of Gates
Add the following:

Where existing chain link fencing and/or gate improvements are shown on the Plans to be relocated, or where new fencing is required to remodel Caltrans right-of-way fencing, new fabric and support posts or framework materials shall match those to be joined or extended.

Where existing fence is shown to be removed and relocated, and the Contractor does not undertake the installation in the new location immediately after removal, then the Contractor shall make provision to install temporary fencing or other type of perimeter enclosure orsecurity during the interim period. The use and type of temporary, interim fencing, if proposed, shall be approved by the Engineer prior to the removal of the original fencing. The needs and wishes of the affected property owner shall be considered when selecting the type of temporary fence material for, and the timing of, interim fence installation. 304-3.4 Measurement and Payment
Add the following:

Payment for the installation of new chain link fence shall conform to this section or alternatively, when applicable, to Section 80-3.04, “Payment”, of the State Standard Specifications, and the following: DRAFT
104
Payment for a new chain link fence, regardless of type, shall be at the contract unit price per lineal foot.

Payment for the removal and relocation of existing chain link fencing shall be at the contract unit price per lineal foot when a unit price bid item is provided or shall be included in clear and grub if no specific bid item is provided.

DRAFT
105
SECTION 306 OPEN TRENCH CONDUIT CONSTRUCTION
306-3 TRENCH EXCAVATION
Add the following:

The work covers trench excavation, installation and backfill of reinforced concrete pipe (RCP), polyvinyl chloride (PVC) pipe, corrugated high density polyethylene (N-12 HDPE) pipe, vitrified clay pipe (VCP), ductile iron pipe (DIP), cement mortar lined and coated (CMLC) steel pipe, cement mortar lined and epoxy painted steel pipe, Southern California Edison conduit, Gas Company, ATT/ Verizon conduit, Cox Communications/ Time Warner/ Mediacom Communications cable television conduit, irrigation conduit, other conduits of any type, and other appurtenant work.